Pioneer CRB2619 AU If Not Then AVIC Z3 Operation Manual0218

User Manual: Pioneer If not then Manual: ://www.pioneerelectronics.com/StaticFiles/Manuals/Navigation/AVIC-Z3_OperationManual0218

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 211 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

en
- Table of Contents

Operation Manual

HDD MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION SERVER

AVIC-Z3

Notice to all users:

This software requires that the navigation system is

properly connected to your vehicle’s parking brake and

depending on your vehicle, additional installation may

be required. For more information, please contact your

Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at

(800) 421-1404.

English

!The screens shown in the examples may

differ from the actual screens.

!The actual screens may be changed with-

out notice for performance and function

improvements.

Introduction

Manual Overview 8

–How to use this manual 8

–Overview for each chapter 8

–Terminology 10

–About the definition of terminology 10

–Color difference of the map display

between day and night 10

License Agreement 11

–PIONEER AVIC-Z3 - for U.S.A. 11

–PIONEER AVIC-Z3 - for Canada 13

–Terms and Conditions for the Tele Atlas

Data 15

–About the Data for the Map

Database 18

–Copyright 18

–About Gracenote® 19

Before Using the System

Important Safety Information 21

Additional Safety Information 22

–To ensure safe driving 22

Features (Characteristics of this

software) 22

–About XM NavTraffic Service and

Pioneer Navigation 24

Notes for Hard Disk Drive 24

–Recording equipment and

–Notes when writing data to the hard

disk drive at low temperature 24

–Points about recording 24

–Data saved or recorded by the

customer 25

–Failure to operate 25

Visit Our Web site 25

Basic Operation

Flow from Startup to Termination 26

How to Use Navigation Menu Screens 26

–Displaying the Navigation menu 26

–Navigation menu overview 27

Basic Navigation 28

–Basic flow of operation 28

–Calculating your destination by using

Address Search 28

–Checking and modifying the route 32

–When the route guidance starts 33

Canceling the Route Guidance 33

Modifying the Route Calculation

Conditions 34

–Items that users can operate 34

Checking the Current Route 35

–Checking the passing streets with a

list 35

–Checking the entire route overview on

the map 36

Editing Waypoints 36

–Adding a waypoint 36

–Deleting a waypoint 37

–Sorting waypoints 37

–Skipping a waypoint 37

How to Read the Map Display

How to Use the Map 38

–Switching the view mode 38

–How to view the map of the current

location 38

–Roads without turn-by-turn

instructions 43

–Changing the scale of the map 43

Contents

–Scroll the map to the location you want

to see 43

–Shortcut menu 45

Modifying Map Configurations

Entering the Map Menu 46

Setting the Item on the Map Screen 46

Selecting the Shortcut 48

Displaying POI on the Map 49

Viewing the Map Color Legend 49

Changing the View Mode for the Navigation

Map 49

Setting the Map Color Change between Day

and Night 50

Changing the Setting of Navigation

Interruption Screen 50

Changing the Map Color 50

Setting a Route to Your Destination

Searching for Points of Interest (POI)

Statewide 51

–Searching for a POI directly from the

name of the facilities 51

–Searching for POIs by specifying a

category first 52

–Searching for POIs by specifying a city

name first 53

Finding a POI in the Vicinity 53

–Searching for the facilities around the

current position 53

–Searching for the facilities around the

scroll cursor 54

Searching for Your Destination by Specifying

the Telephone Number 55

Route Calculation to Your Home Location or

to Your Favorite Location 55

Selecting Destination from “Destination

History”and “Address Book”56

Registering/deleting POI Shortcuts 56

–Registering a POI shortcut 56

–Deleting a POI shortcut 57

Registering and Editing Locations

Registering Locations Overview 58

Registering your home and your favorite

location 58

Registering a Location into “Address

Book”59

–Registering a location by scroll

mode 59

–Registering a location by “Address

Book”59

–Viewing “Address Book”60

–Editing the entry in “Address Book”60

–Deleting the entry in “Address

Book”63

Operating “Destination History”64

–Deleting the entry in “Destination

History”64

Using Traffic Information

Using XM NavTraffic Information 65

–Viewing traffic list 65

–Confirming traffic information on the

map 66

–Setting an alternative route to avoid

traffic congestion 67

–Selecting traffic information to

display 69

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

Using the XM Tuner to View Stock, Sports,

and Other Information 70

–Displaying stock prices 70

–Storing browsable information 70

–Displaying favorite browsable

Information 71

Checking the Reception Status of the XM

Tuner 72

Emergency Info 72

En 3

Contents

–Checking the information registered as

Emergency Info 73

–Searching for car service in an

emergency 74

–Registering user information 75

Setting the Vehicle Dynamics Display 76

Using Hands-free Phoning

Hands-free Phoning Overview 77

–Preparing communication devices 77

–Setting up for hands-free phoning 78

–Receiving a phone call 80

–Making a phone call 81

–Transferring the phone book 83

–Registering a phone number in “Dial

Favorites”84

–Editing the entry in “Phone Book”84

–Editing the received call or dialed

number history 86

Modifying the General Settings for

Navigation Functions

Entering the Settings Menu 88

Setting the Volume for Guidance and

Phone 88

Customizing the Regional Settings 88

–Changing the language for navigation

guidance and menu 88

–Setting the time difference 89

–Customizing the keyboard layout 89

–Changing the unit between km and

miles 89

–Changing the virtual speed of the

vehicle 90

Checking the Setting Related with

Hardware 90

–Checking the connections of leads and

installation positions 90

–Checking sensor learning status and

driving status 91

–Correcting the installation angle 92

–Checking the device and version

information 92

–Checking the hard disk

information 92

Registering the Home Location and Favorite

Location 93

Changing the Background Picture 93

–Limitations for importing pictures 94

–Precautions when changing the Splash

Screen 95

Using the Demonstration Guidance 95

Correcting the Current Location 95

Restoring the Default Setting 96

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive

and Radio)

Basic Operation 97

–Switching the Audio operation

screen 97

–Selecting a source 97

–About Steering Remote Control 98

–Viewing the audio operation screen and

displaying the Audio Settings

menu 99

Operating a Music CD 99

–Selecting [CD] as the source 99

–About auto hard disk recording 100

–Screen configuration 100

–Touch panel key operation 101

Operating the CD-ROM (MP3 disc) 101

–Selecting [ROM] as the source 102

–Screen configuration 102

–Touch panel key operation 102

–Notes on playing MP3 disc 104

Operating the DVD 104

–Selecting [DVD] as the source 104

–Screen configuration 104

–Touch panel key operation 105

Contents

–Searching for a desired scene, starting

playback from a specified time 106

–Entering the numerical

commands 106

Operating the Radio (FM) 107

–Selecting [FM] as the source 107

–Screen configuration 107

Touch panel key operation 107

Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies 108

Tuning in strong signals 108

Operating the Radio (AM) 108

–Selecting [AM] as the source 108

–Screen configuration 108

–Touch panel key operation 108

–Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies 109

–Tuning in strong signals 109

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

Music Library Recording 110

–Recording all tracks in a CD 111

–Recording a CD manually 111

–Recording only the first track of a

CD 111

–Stopping CD recording 111

–Notes on CD recording 112

Music Library Play 112

–Selecting [LIBRARY] as the

source 112

–Screen configuration 112

–Touch panel key operation 113

–Creating a playlist with a customized

order 116

–Editing a playlist or tracks 117

–Assigning another candidate for title

information 122

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

Operating the XM Satellite Radio 123

Selecting [XM] as the source 123

–Screen configuration 123

–Touch panel key operation 124

–Display the Radio ID 125

–Selecting a channel from the XM

channel list display 125

–Using “My Mix”function 126

–Using the direct traffic announcement

function 127

Operating the SIRIUS Satellite Radio 127

–Selecting [SIRIUS] as the source 128

–Touch panel key operation 128

–Selecting teams for Game Alert 129

–Displaying game information (Game

Info) 130

–Using “My Mix”function 130

–Using the Traffic & Weather preset

function 132

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)

Operating the Multi-CD Player 133

–Selecting [M-CD] as the source 133

–Screen configuration 133

–Touch panel key operation 133

Operating the iPod® 134

–Selecting [iPod] as the source 134

–Screen configuration 135

–Touch panel key operation 135

–Browsing for a song 136

Operating the TV tuner 136

–Selecting [TV] as the source 136

–Screen configuration 137

–Touch panel key operation 137

–Storing and recalling broadcast

frequencies 137

–Storing the strongest broadcast

stations sequentially 138

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

Operating the AV Input source 139

En 5

Contents

–Selecting [AV INPUT] as the

source 139

Operating the External Unit 139

–Selecting [EXT 1] or [EXT 2] as the

source 139

–Screen configuration 139

–Touch panel key operation 139

–Operate the external unit by using 1 key

—6 key 140

–Operate the external unit by using

Function 1 —Function 4 140

–Switching the automatic and manual

function 140

Operating the AUX input source (AUX) 141

–Selecting [AUX] as the source 141

Customizing the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

AV Setting Overview 142

–How to Operate the Audio Settings

screen 142

Customizing the Audio Settings Items 142

–Using the equalizer 142

–Setting the simulated sound

stage 144

–Using balance adjustment 144

–Using subwoofer output 145

–Using non fading output 145

–Adjusting loudness 145

–Using the high pass filter 146

–Adjusting source levels 146

Customizing the System Settings Items 146

–How to view and operate the System

Settings 146

–Setting up the built-in DVD drive 147

–Setting the parental lock 148

–Changing the wide screen mode 149

–Setting for rear view camera 149

–Setting the video input 150

–Switching the auxiliary setting 150

–Switching the muting/attenuation

timing 150

–Switching the muting/attenuation

level 151

–Changing the voice output of the

navigation guidance 151

–Switching the auto antenna

setting 151

–Setting the clock display on the video

image 151

–Setting the CD recording mode 152

–Setting the rear output and subwoofer

controller 152

–Switching the 5.1ch setting 152

Other Functions 153

–Selecting the video for “Rear

display”153

–Operating the picture adjustment 153

–Switching the backlight on or off 154

Language Code Chart for DVD 155

Operating Your Navigation System with

Voice

To Ensure Safe Driving 156

Basics of Voice Operation 156

–Flow of voice operation 156

–To start voice operation 156

Tips for Voice Operation 157

An Example of Voice Operation 158

–Search for POI in vicinity 158

–Search for the playlist 159

Available Voice Commands 159

–Basic commands for voice

operation 161

–Voice commands related to

navigation 161

–Voice commands related to hands-free

phoning 164

–Voice commands related to AV

operation 165

Contents

–After checking traffic information

manually 167

–Location screen (A) and (B) 167

Other Voice Commands 168

–Other voice commands for navigation

operation 168

–Other voice commands for AV

operation 170

–Category list for vicinity search 172

Appendix

Troubleshooting 174

Messages and How to React to Them 179

Messages for Audio Functions 184

Returning the Navigation System to the

Default or Factory Settings 187

–Setting items to be deleted 188

–If system errors frequently occur 190

–Completely returning the navigation

system to the initial state 190

Adjusting the Response Positions of the

Touch Panels (Touch Panel

Calibration) 190

Positioning Technology 191

–Positioning by GPS 191

–Positioning by dead reckoning 192

–How do GPS and dead reckoning work

together? 192

Handling Large Errors 193

–When the positioning by GPS is

impossible 193

Vehicles that Cannot Obtain Speed Pulse

Data 194

Conditions Likely to Cause Noticeable

Positioning Errors 194

When the Hard Disk Drive is

Disconnected 197

Route Setting Information 197

–Route search specifications 197

Detail Information for Playable Media 199

–DVD discs and other DVD media

types 199

–About playing DualDisc 199

–CD-R/CD-RW discs 199

–MP3 files 200

Display Information 202

–Navigation menu 202

–Shortcut menu 203

Menu in the Audio Screen 204

Glossary 205

Index 209

En 7

Contents

Manual Overview

This manual provides important information

you need to make full use of your new naviga-

tion system. The beginning sections outline

the navigation system and describe its basic

operation. The later sections describe the de-

tails of the navigation functions.

Chapter 12 to Chapter 17 describe how to op-

erate the AV functions. Please read these

chapters when you use a disc in the built-in

DVD drive or operate the Pioneer audio equip-

ment connected to the navigation system.

How to use this manual

Be sure to read the following

descriptions

!License Agreement (=Refer to License

Agreement on page 11)

This provides a license agreement of this

software. Be sure to read this before using

the software.

!About the Data for the Map Database

(=Refer to About the Data for the Map

Database on page 18)

This provides the date when the Map Data-

base was recorded.

!Copyright (=Refer to Copyright on

page 18)

This provides the copyright of the Map Da-

tabase.

!About Gracenote®(=Refer to About

Gracenote®on page 19)

This provides a license agreement and

tion service. Be sure to read this before

using this navigation system.

Finding the operation procedure from

what you want to do

When you have decided what you want to do,

you can find the page you need from the

“Contents”.

Finding the operation procedure from

a menu name

If you want to check the meaning of each item

displayed on the screen, you will find the ne-

cessary page from the “Display Information”at

the end of the manual.

Glossary

See the glossary to find the meaning of a

term.

Index

The section at the end of this manual provides

an index. See each term to find the main

pages where it is stated.

Overview for each chapter

2Before Using the System

For safety reasons, it is particularly im-

portant that you fully understand your

navigation system before using it. Be

sure to read this chapter.

3Basic Operation

Please read this section if you want to

operate the navigation system immedi-

ately. It will explain the basics of this

system.

This section describes the basic opera-

tions for navigation.

4How to Read the Map Display

This section describes how to read the map

screen, and the method of changing map

view or map scale.

5Modifying Map Configurations

The behavior of your navigation system de-

pends on the map display and guidance set-

tings. If you need to change any of the

current settings, read the relevant section of

this chapter.

Introduction

Chapter

6Setting a Route to Your Destination

This section describes various ways to

search for a destination, edit the current

route conditions and operate the route dur-

ing route guidance.

7Registering and Editing Locations

You can register and edit the points on the

map. This chapter describes how to register

a home location, favorite location or other

location, and how to edit the entry in “Ad-

dress Book”.

8Using Traffic Information

When Pioneer XM satellite radio tuner (GEX-

P10XMT) is connected to the navigation sys-

tem, the system can acquire traffic informa-

tion and perform navigation using the traffic

information. This chapter describes ways of

viewing traffic icons that are displayed on

the map and operation related traffic infor-

mation.

9Using XM Tuner and Other Information

When Pioneer XM satellite radio tuner (GEX-

P10XMT) is connected to the navigation sys-

tem, variety of information other than traffic

can be acquired. The navigation system can

also register emergency information. This

chapter describes ways of the information

acquired with XM satellite radio, registration

of emergency information.

aUsing Hands-free Phoning

When you are using a cellular phone featur-

ing Bluetooth®technology by connecting

the Bluetooth unit (sold separately) to the

navigation system, you can operate your cel-

lular phone hands-free. This chapter de-

scribes the operations related to hands-free

phoning.

bModifying the General Settings for Na-

vigation Functions

The behavior of your navigation system de-

pends a number of general settings for navi-

gation functions. If you need to change any

of the initial settings (default settings), read

the relevant section of this chapter.

cUsing the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive

and Radio)

This section describes how to use DVD-Vi-

deos, CDs, MP3, discs and the radio.

dUsing the AV Source (Music Library)

You can record a music CD to the hard disk

drive in the navigation system. This chapter

describes recording music and playing back

the recorded music.

eUsing the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

This chapter describes the audio source op-

erations that can be used when an XM satel-

lite radio tuner or SiriusConnect universal

tuner is connected.

fUsing the AV Source (M-CD, iPod®, TV)

This chapter describes the audio source op-

erations that can be used when Pioneer

audio equipment featuring IP-BUS (Multi-

CD player, Interface adapter for iPod, TV

tuner) is connected.

gUsing the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

This chapter describes the audio source op-

erations that can be used when connecting

AV equipment with an RCA connector (AV

input), future Pioneer devices (external

unit), or auxiliary equipment (AUX).

hCustomizing the Audio Setting related

with Audio Visual

Using the audio source, various audio-visual

settings are available to suit your tastes.

This chapter describes how to change the

settings.

iOperating Your Navigation System

with Voice

This section describes navigation opera-

tions, such as searching the destination

and performing audio operations by voice.

Introduction

En 9

Chapter

Introduction

jAppendix

Please read the appendix to learn more

about your navigation system and informa-

tion such as the availability of after-care.

Please see “Display Information”at the end

of this manual to check the details for each

item on the menu.

Terminology

Before moving on, take a few minutes to read

the following information about the conven-

tions used in this manual. They will help you

greatly as you learn how to use your new

equipment.

!Hardware buttons on your navigation sys-

tem are described in ALL CAPITAL,

BOLD lettering:

e.g.)

MENU button, MAP button.

!Items in the different menus or touch panel

keys available on the screen are described

in brackets [ ] and bold:

e.g.)

[Destination], [Settings].

!Extra information, alternative usages and

other notes are presented like this:

e.g.)

pTouch panel keys which are not avail-

able at this time are grayed out.

!References to sections that describe infor-

mation related to the current topics are in-

dicated like this:

e.g.)

=For details, refer to Modifying the Route

Calculation Conditions on page 34

About the definition of

terminology

“Front Display”and “Rear Display”

In this manual, the screen that is attached to

the body of this navigation unit will be referred

to as the “Front Display”. Any additional op-

tional screen that is purchased for use in con-

junction with this navigation unit will be

referred to as the “Rear Display”.

“Video image”

“Video image”in this manual indicates the

moving image from DVD-Video in the built-in

DVD drive or from the equipment that is con-

nected to this system with an AV-BUS or RCA

cable, such as a TV tuner or general-purpose

AV equipment.

Color difference of the map

display between day and night

Night display

The examples in this manual are illustrated

using the daytime display. When driving at

night, the colors you see may differ from those

shown.

Introduction

Chapter

License Agreement

PIONEER AVIC-Z3 - for U.S.A.

THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN

YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER

ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. (“PIONEER”).

PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDI-

TIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BE-

FORE USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON

THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY USING THE

SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER

PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY

THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFT-

WARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED BY

THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER( S) (“SUPPLIERS”),

AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COV-

ERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’SEPARATE

TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS

AGREEMENT (Refer to page 15). IF YOU DO

NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS,

PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRODUCTS

(INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND ANY

WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS

OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO THE

AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM

WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF

THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE

YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE-

MENT.

1 GRANT OF LICENSE

Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable,

non exclusive license to use the software in-

stalled on the Pioneer products (the “Soft-

ware”) and the related documentation solely

for your own personal use or for internal

use by your business, only on such Pioneer

products.

You shall not copy, reverse engineer, trans-

late, port, modify or make derivative works

of the Software. You shall not loan, rent, dis-

close, publish, sell, assign, lease, subli-

cense, market or otherwise transfer the

Software or use it in any manner not ex-

pressly authorized by this agreement. You

shall not derive or attempt to derive the

source code or structure of all or any portion

of the Software by reverse engineering, dis-

assembly, decompilation, or any other

means. You shall not use the Software to op-

erate a service bureau or for any other use

involving the processing of data for other

persons or entities.

Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all

proprietary ownership rights in the Soft-

ware. The Software is copyrighted and may

not be copied, even if modified or merged

with other products. You shall not alter or re-

move any copyright notice or proprietary le-

gend contained in or on the Software.

You may transfer all of your license rights in

the Software, the related documentation

and a copy of this License Agreement to an-

other party, provided that the party reads

and agrees to accept the terms and condi-

tions of this License Agreement.

2 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY

The Software and related documentation

are provided to you “AS IS”. PIONEER AND

ITS LICENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provi-

sions 2 and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s)

shall be collectively referred to as “Pioneer”)

MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY

FOR THE SOFTWARE, WHETHER EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED, AND ALL WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY

PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR THE SOFT-

WARE ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME

STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IM-

PLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EX-

CLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. The

Software is complex and may contain some

nonconformities, defects or errors. Pioneer

does not warrant that the Software will meet

your needs or expectations, that operation

of the Software will be error free or uninter-

rupted, or that all non-conformities can or

will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer does

not make any representations or warranties

regarding the use or results of the use of

the Software in terms of its accuracy, relia-

bility or otherwise.

Introduction

En 11

Chapter

Introduction

3 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE

FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-

CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT

LIMITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDEN-

TAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUEN-

TIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST

PROFITS, LOST INCOME, LOST SALES OR

BUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, INVEST-

MENTS, OR COMMITMENTS IN CONNEC-

TION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS OF ANY

GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULTING

FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE

THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS

BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR

SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELI-

HOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITA-

TION APPLIES TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES

OF ACTION INDIVIDUALLY OR IN THE AG-

GREGATE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITA-

TION BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF

WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILI-

TY, MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHER

TORTS. IF PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAI-

MER OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET

FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT SHALL OR

FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER BE HELD

UNENFORCEABLE OR INAPPLICABLE,

YOU AGREE THAT PIONEER’S LIABILITY

SHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT (50%)

OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE EN-

CLOSED PIONEER PRODUCT.

Some states do not allow the exclusion or

limitation of incidental or consequential da-

mages, so the above limitation or exclusion

may not apply to you. This warranty disclai-

mer and limitation of liability shall not be

applicable to the extent that they are prohib-

ited by any applicable federal, state or local

law which provides that such a disclaimer

or limitation cannot be waived or pre-

empted.

4 EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES

You agree and certify that neither the Soft-

ware nor any other technical data received

from Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof,

will be exported outside the United States

except as authorized and as permitted by

the laws and regulations of the United

States. If the Software has been rightfully

obtained by you outside of the United

States, you agree that you will not re-export

the Software nor any other technical data re-

ceived from Pioneer, nor the direct product

thereof, except as permitted by the laws and

regulations of the United States and the

laws and regulations of the jurisdiction in

which you obtained the Software.

5 TERMINATION

This Agreement is effective until terminated.

You may terminate it at any time by destroy-

ing the Software. The Agreement also will

terminate if you do not comply with any

terms or conditions of this Agreement.

Upon such termination, you agree to de-

stroy the Software.

6 U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS

If the Software is being acquired by or on

behalf of the United States government or

any other entity seeking or applying rights

similar to those customarily claimed by the

United States government, the Data is li-

censed with “Limited Rights”. Utilization of

the Software is subject to the restrictions

specified in the “Rights in Technical Data”

clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, or the

equivalent clause for non-defense agencies.

Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc., 2265 East

220th Street, Long Beach, CA 90810.

Introduction

Chapter

7 MISCELLANEOUS

This is the entire Agreement between

Pioneer and you regarding its subject mat-

ter. No change in this Agreement shall be ef-

fective unless agreed to in writing by

Pioneer. Pioneer retailers do not have the

authority to change this Agreement. This

Agreement shall be governed by and con-

strued in accordance with the internal laws

of the State of California. If any provision of

this Agreement is declared invalid or unen-

forceable, the remaining provisions of this

Agreement shall remain in full force and ef-

fect.

PIONEER AVIC-Z3 - for Canada

THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN

YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER

ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.

(“PIONEER”). PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND

CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CARE-

FULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE IN-

STALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY

USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE

PIONEER PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE

BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREE-

MENT. THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATA-

BASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER

(S) (“SUPPLIERS”), AND YOUR USE OF THE

DATABASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’

SEPARATE TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED

TO THIS AGREEMENT (Refer to page 15). IF

YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE

TERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRO-

DUCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND

ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5)

DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO

THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM

WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF

THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE

YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE-

MENT.

1 GRANT OF LICENSE

Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable,

nonexclusive license to use the software in-

stalled on the Pioneer products (the “Soft-

ware”) and the related documentation solely

for your own personal use or for internal

use by your business, only on such Pioneer

products.

You shall not copy, reverse engineer, trans-

late, port, modify or make derivative works

of the Software. You shall not loan, rent, dis-

close, publish, sell, assign, lease, subli-

cense, market or otherwise transfer the

Software or use it in any manner not ex-

pressly authorized by this agreement. You

shall not derive or attempt to derive the

source code or structure of all or any portion

of the Software by reverse engineering, dis-

assembly, decompilation, or any other

means. You shall not use the Software to op-

erate a service bureau or for any other use

involving the processing of data for other

persons or entities.

Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all

proprietary ownership rights in the Soft-

ware. The Software is copyrighted and may

not be copied, even if modified or merged

with other products. You shall not alter or re-

move any copyright notice or proprietary le-

gend contained in or on the Software.

You may transfer all of your license rights in

the Software, the related documentation

and a copy of this License Agreement to an-

other party, provided that the party reads

and agrees to accept the terms and condi-

tions of this License Agreement.

Introduction

En 13

Chapter

Introduction

2 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY

The Software and related documentation

are provided to you “AS IS”. PIONEER AND

ITS LICENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provi-

sions 2 and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s)

shall be collectively referred to as “Pioneer”)

MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY

FOR THE SOFTWARE, WHETHER EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED, AND ALL WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY

PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR THE SOFT-

WARE ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME

STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IM-

PLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EX-

CLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. The

Software is complex and may contain some

nonconformities, defects or errors. Pioneer

does not warrant that the Software will meet

your needs or expectations, that operation

of the Software will be error free or uninter-

rupted, or that all non-conformities can or

will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer does

not make any representations or warranties

regarding the use or results of the use of

the Software in terms of its accuracy, relia-

bility or otherwise.

3 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE

FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-

CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT

LIMITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDEN-

TAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUEN-

TIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST

PROFITS, LOST INCOME, LOST SALES OR

BUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, INVEST-

MENTS, OR COMMITMENTS IN CONNEC-

TION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS OF ANY

GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULTING

FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE

THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS

BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR

SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELI-

HOOD OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITA-

TION APPLIES TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES

OF ACTION INDIVIDUALLY OR IN THE AG-

GREGATE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITA-

TION BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF

WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILI-

TY, MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHER

TORTS. IF PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAI-

MER OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET

FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT SHALL OR

FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER BE HELD

UNENFORCEABLE OR INAPPLICABLE,

YOU AGREE THAT PIONEER’S LIABILITY

SHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT (50%)

OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE EN-

CLOSED PIONEER PRODUCT.

Some states do not allow the exclusion or

limitation of incidental or consequential da-

mages, so the above limitation or exclusion

may not apply to you. This warranty disclai-

mer and limitation of liability shall not be

applicable to the extent that they are prohib-

ited by any applicable federal, state or local

law which provides that such a disclaimer

or limitation cannot be waived or pre-

empted.

4 EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES

You agree and certify that neither the Soft-

ware nor any other technical data received

from Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof,

will be exported outside Canada except as

authorized and as permitted by the laws and

regulations of Canada. If the Software has

been rightfully obtained by you outside of

Canada, you agree that you will not re-export

the Software nor any other technical data re-

ceived from Pioneer, nor the direct product

thereof, except as permitted by the laws and

regulations of Canada and the laws and reg-

ulations of the jurisdiction in which you ob-

tained the Software.

5 TERMINATION

This Agreement is effective until terminated.

You may terminate it at any time by destroy-

ing the Software. The Agreement also will

terminate if you do not comply with any

terms or conditions of this Agreement.

Upon such termination, you agree to de-

stroy the Software.

Introduction

Chapter

6 MISCELLANEOUS

This is the entire Agreement between

Pioneer and you regarding its subject mat-

ter. No change in this Agreement shall be ef-

fective unless agreed to in writing by

Pioneer. Pioneer retailers do not have the

authority to change this Agreement. This

Agreement shall be governed by and con-

strued in accordance with the internal laws

of the Province of Ontario and the federal

laws of Canada applicable therein. If any

provision of this Agreement is declared inva-

lid or unenforceable, the remaining provi-

sions of this Agreement shall remain in full

force and effect.

Terms and Conditions for the

Tele Atlas Data

THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT (THE “AGREE-

MENT”) BETWEEN YOU, THE END USER, AND

TELE ATLAS NORTH AMERICA, INC. (“Tele

Atlas”). BY USING YOUR COPY OF THE TELE

ATLAS DATA, YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS

AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.

1Grant of License.

Tele Atlas grants you a non-transferable,

non-exclusive license to use the map data

and business points of interest information

(the “POIs”), (together, the “Data”) contained

on these discs, solely for personal, non-com-

mercial use and not to operate a service bu-

reau or for any other use involving the

processing of data of other persons or enti-

ties. You may make one (1) copy of the Data

for archival or backup purposes only but

you may not otherwise copy, reproduce,

modify, make derivative works, derive the

structure of or reverse engineer the Data.

The Data contains confidential and proprie-

tary information and materials, and may

contain trade secrets, so you agree to hold

the Data in confidence and in trust and not

to disclose the Data or any portions in any

form, including by renting, leasing, publish-

ing, leasing, sublicensing or transferring the

Data to any third party. You are prohibited

from removing or obscuring any copyright,

trademark notice or restrictive legend.

2Ownership.

The Data is copyrighted by Tele Atlas and its

licensors and they retain all ownership

rights in the Data. You agree not to alter, re-

move, obliterate, or obscure any copyright

notice or proprietary legend contained in or

on the Data.

Introduction

En 15

Chapter

Introduction

3Warranty Disclaimer.

THE DATA IS PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS”

AND “WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS”AND TELE

ATLAS AND ITS SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY

DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED

TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NONIN-

FRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, SATIS-

FACTORY QUALITY, ACCURACY, TITLE AND

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

NO ORAL OR WRITTEN ADVICE OR INFOR-

MATION PROVIDED BY TELE ATLAS OR

ANY OF ITS AGENTS, EMPLOYEES OR

THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS SHALL CREATE

A WARRANTY, AND YOU ARE NOT EN-

TITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH ADVICE OR

INFORMATION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF

WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDI-

TION OF THE AGREEMENT.

4Limitation of Liability.

TELE ATLAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU

FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,

SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DA-

MAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREE-

MENT, INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR

COSTS OF COVER, LOSS OF USE OR BUSI-

NESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE, RE-

GARDLESS OF WHETHER YOU WERE

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY-

THING TO THE CONTRARY CONTAINED

HEREIN, TELE ATLAS SHALL HAVE NO

MONETARY LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ANY

CAUSE (REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF

ACTION) UNDER OR RELATING TO THIS

AGREEMENT.

5Termination.

This Agreement will terminate immediately

and automatically, without notice, if you

breach any term of this Agreement. You

agree that in the event of termination of the

Agreement, you shall return the Data (in-

cluding all documentation and all copies) to

Tele Atlas and its suppliers.

6Indemnity.

You agree to indemnify, defend and hold

Tele Atlas, its Licensors, and its Suppliers

(including their respective licensors, suppli-

ers, assignees, subsidiaries, affiliated com-

panies, and the respective officers,

directors, employees, shareholders, agents

and representatives) free and harmless from

and against any liability, loss, injury (includ-

ing injuries resulting in death), demand, ac-

tion, cost, expense, or claim of any kind or

character, including but not limited to attor-

ney's fees, arising out of or in connection

with any use or possession by you of the

Data.

Introduction

Chapter

7U.S. Government Rights.

If you are an agency, department, or other

entity of the United States Government, or

funded in whole or in part by the United

States Government, then use, duplication,

reproduction, release, modification, disclo-

sure or transfer of this commercial product

and accompanying documentation, is re-

stricted in accordance with the LIMITED or

RESTRICTED rights as described in DFARS

252.227-7014(a)(1) (JUN 1995) (DOD com-

mercial computer software definition),

DFARS 227.7202-1 (DOD policy on commer-

cial computer software), FAR 52.227-19

(JUN 1987) (commercial computer software

clause for civilian agencies), DFARS

252.227-7015 (NOV 1995) (DOD technical

data –commercial items clause); FAR

52.227-14 Alternates I, II, and III (JUN 1987)

(civilian agency technical data and noncom-

mercial computer software clause); and/or

FAR 12.211 and FAR 12.212 (commercial

item acquisitions), as applicable. In case of

conflict between any of the FAR and DFARS

provisions listed herein and this License,

the construction that provides greater lim-

itations on the Government’s rights shall

control. Contractor/manufacturer is Tele

Atlas North America, Inc., 11 Lafayette

Street, Lebanon, NH 03766-1445. Phone:

pose of any public disclosure provision

under any federal, state or local law, it is

agreed that the Data is a trade secret and a

proprietary commercial product and not

subject to disclosure.

If you are an agency, department, or other

entity of any State government, the United

States Government or any other public en-

tity or funded in whole or in part by the Uni-

ted States Government, then you hereby

agree to protect the Data from public disclo-

sure and to consider the Data exempt from

any statute, law, regulation, or code, includ-

ing any Sunshine Act, Public Records Act,

Freedom of Information Act, or equivalent,

which permits public access and/or repro-

duction or use of the Data. In the event that

such exemption is challenged under any

such laws, this Agreement shall be consid-

ered breached and any and all right to retain

any copies or to use of the Data shall be ter-

minated and considered immediately null

and void. Any copies of the Data held by you

shall immediately be destroyed. If any court

of competent jurisdiction considers this

clause void and unenforceable, in whole or

in part, for any reason, this Agreement shall

be considered terminated and null and void,

in its entirety, and any and all copies of the

Data shall immediately be destroyed.

8Additional Provisions with respect to

POI Data only.

aNo Creation of Mailing Lists.

You are prohibited from using the POIs (i) to

create mailing lists or (ii) for other such si-

milar uses.

bCompliance.

You will use the POIs in compliance with all

applicable federal, state and local laws,

rules and regulations.

cIndemnification.

You shall indemnify and hold infoUSA, Inc.

harmless against all third party claims or

liability which are based in whole or in part

of the users failure to comply with such

laws, rules and regulations or which result

from the use of the POIs through you.

dWarranty.

In addition to the Warranties contained in

the Agreement, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT

THE POIS ARE LICENSED ON AN “AS IS”

BASIS WITHOUT GUARANTEE, AND

THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES

MADE WHETHER, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

ePOIs Segregation.

Introduction

En 17

Chapter

Introduction

You are prohibited from combining or mer-

ging the POIs with any other POI data. The

POIs shall be maintained in such a way

that they are separately identifiable from all

other POI data at all times.

9Miscellaneous.

This is the exclusive and complete Agree-

ment between Tele Atlas and you regarding

its subject matter. Nothing in this Agree-

ment shall create a joint venture, partner-

ship or principal-agent relationship between

Tele Atlas and you. The internal laws of Cali-

fornia shall govern this Agreement and you

consent to the jurisdiction of the Northern

District of California or the State of Califor-

nia for the County of Santa Clara. Sections 2

–4 and 7 –11 shall survive the expiration or

termination of this Agreement. This Agree-

ment may be amended, altered, or modified

only by Tele Atlas. You may not assign any

part of this Agreement without Tele Atlas’

prior written consent. You acknowledge and

understand that the Data may be subject to

restrictions on exportation and agree to

comply with any applicable export laws. In

the event that any provision or part of a pro-

vision of this Agreement is determined to be

invalid, illegal, or unenforceable, such provi-

sion or part thereof shall be stricken from

this Agreement and the remainder of this

Agreement shall be valid, legal, and enforce-

able to the maximum extent possible. Any

notice under this Agreement shall be deliv-

ered by courier to Tele Atlas North America,

Inc., Attention Contracts Department, 11 La-

fayette Street, Lebanon, NH 03766 USA. The

covenants and obligations undertaken by

you herein are intended for the direct bene-

fit of Tele Atlas and may be enforced by Tele

Atlas directly against you.

About the Data for the Map

Database

!This database was developed and recorded

up to May 2007. Changes to streets/high-

ways made after that time may not be re-

flected in this database.

!It is strictly prohibited to reproduce and use

any part or the whole of this map in any

form without permission from the copyright

owner.

!If the local traffic regulations or conditions

deviate from this data, follow the local traf-

fic regulations (such as signs, indications,

etc.) and conditions (such as construction,

weather, etc.).

!The traffic regulation data used in the map

database applies only to standard sized

passenger vehicles. Note that regulations

for larger vehicles, motorbikes, and other

non-standard vehicles are not included in

the database.

“NOTICE

This material is proprietary and the subject of

property rights owned or licensed to Tele Atlas.

Tele Atlas is an authorized distributor of se-

lected Statistics Canada computer files under

Agreement number 6776 and is an authorized

distributor of selected Geomatics Canada

computer files. The product includes informa-

tion copied with permission from Canadian

authorities, including ©Canada Post

Corporation. The use of this material is subject

to the terms of a License Agreement. You will

be held liable for any unauthorized copying or

disclosure of this material.”

SERVED.

Introduction

Chapter

About Gracenote®

Music recognition technology and related

data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is

the industry standard in music recognition

technology and related content delivery. For

more information visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote,

note. This product and service may practice

one or more of the following U.S. Patents:

#5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773,

#6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207,

#6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents is-

sued or pending. Some services supplied

under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.

Patent: #6,304,523. Gracenote and CDDB are

registered trademarks of Gracenote. The

Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Pow-

ered by Gracenote”logo are trademarks of

Gracenote.

Gracenote®End User License Agreement

Version 20061005

This application or device contains software

from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California

(“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote

(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this appli-

cation to perform disc and/or file identification

and obtain music-related information, includ-

ing name, artist, track, and title information

(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or em-

bedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote

Servers”) and to perform other functions. You

may use Gracenote Data only by means of the

intended End-User functions of this applica-

tion or device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data,

the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Ser-

vers for your own personal non-commercial

use only. You agree not to assign, copy, trans-

fer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any

Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE

NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,

THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACE-

NOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PER-

MITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to

use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft-

ware, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if

you violate these restrictions. If your license

terminates, you agree to cease any and all use

of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft-

ware, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote re-

serves all rights in Gracenote Data, the

Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Ser-

vers, including all ownership rights. Under no

circumstances will Gracenote become liable

for any payment to you for any information

that you provide. You agree that Gracenote,

Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agree-

ment against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier

to track queries for statistical purposes. The

purpose of a randomly assigned numeric iden-

tifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count

queries without knowing anything about who

you are. For more information, see the web

page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the

Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of

Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”

Gracenote makes no representations or war-

ranties, express or implied, regarding the ac-

curacy of any Gracenote Data from in the

Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the

right to delete data from the Gracenote Ser-

vers or to change data categories for any

cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No

warranty is made that the Gracenote Software

or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that

functioning of Gracenote Software or Grace-

note Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote

is not obligated to provide you with new en-

hanced or additional data types or categories

that Gracenote may provide in the future and

is free to discontinue its services at any time.

Introduction

En 19

Chapter

Introduction

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-

CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.

GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE-

SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR

USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR

ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL

GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSE-

QUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR

FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVEN-

UES.

Other Precautions

!Part of the data cannot be acquired. The

contents of the data in the Gracenote®Da-

tabase included in the hard disk drive are

not 100 % guaranteed.

!The Gracenote®Database included in the

hard disk drive contains the titles for the

300 000 most frequently accessed albums

worldwide as of August 2007.

Introduction

Chapter

Important Safety Information

Before using your navigation system, be sure

to read and fully understand the following

safety information:

WARNING

!Do not attempt to install or service your navi-

gation system by yourself. Installation or servi-

cing of the navigation system by persons

without training and experience in electronic

equipment and automotive accessories may

be dangerous and could expose you to the

risk of electric shock or other hazards.

!When a route is calculated, the route and

voice guidance for the route is automatically

set. Also, for day or time traffic regulations,

only information about traffic regulations at

the time when the route was calculated is

shown. One-way streets and street closures

may not be taken into consideration. For ex-

ample, if a street is open during the morning

only, but you arrive later, it would be against

the traffic regulations so you cannot drive

along the set route. When driving, please fol-

low the actual traffic signs. Also, the system

may not know some traffic regulations.

pRead the entire manual before operating

this navigation system.

pThe navigation features of your navigation

system (and rear view camera option if pur-

chased) are intended solely as an aid to

you in the operation of your vehicle. It is

not a substitute for your attentiveness,

judgment, and care when driving.

pDo not operate this navigation system (or

the rear view camera option if purchased) if

doing so will divert your attention in any

way from the safe operation of your vehicle.

Always observe safe driving rules and fol-

low all existing traffic regulations. If you ex-

perience difficulty in operating the system

or reading the display, park your vehicle in

a safe location and apply the parking brake

before making the necessary adjustments.

pNever allow others to use the system un-

less they have read and understood the op-

erating instructions.

pNever use this navigation system to route

to hospitals, police stations or similar facil-

ities in an emergency. Stop using any func-

tions relating to the hands-free phone and

please call 911.

pRoute and guidance information displayed

by this equipment is for reference purposes

only. It may not accurately reflect the latest

permissible routes, road conditions, one

way streets, road closures, or traffic restric-

tions.

pTraffic restrictions and advisories currently

in force should always take precedence

over guidance given by the navigation sys-

tem. Always obey current traffic restric-

tions, even if the navigation system

provides contrary advice.

pFailure to set correct information about the

local time may result in the navigation sys-

tem providing improper routing and gui-

dance instructions.

pNever set the volume of your navigation

system so high that you cannot hear out-

side traffic and emergency vehicles.

pTo promote safety, certain functions are dis-

abled unless the vehicle is stopped and/or

the parking brake is applied.

pThe data encoded in the hard disk drive for

the navigation system is the intellectual

property of the provider, and the provider is

responsible for such content.

pKeep this manual handy as a reference for

operating procedures and safety informa-

tion.

pPay close attention to all warnings in this

manual and follow the instructions care-

fully.

pDo not install this navigation system where

it may (i) obstruct the driver’s vision, (ii) im-

pair the performance of any of the vehicle’s

operating systems or safety features, in-

cluding air bags or hazard lamp buttons or

(iii) impair the driver’s ability to safely oper-

ate the vehicle.

Before Using the System

En 21

Chapter

Before Using the System

pPlease remember to wear your seat belt at

all times while operating your vehicle. If

you are ever in an accident, your injuries

can be considerably more severe if your

seat belt is not properly buckled.

pNever use headphones while driving.

Additional Safety Information

To ensure safe driving

Parking brake interlock

Certain functions (such as viewing of DVD

video and certain touch panel key operations)

offered by this navigation system could be

dangerous and/or unlawful if used while driv-

ing. To prevent such functions from being

used while the vehicle is in motion, there is an

interlock system that senses when the parking

brake is set and when the vehicle is moving. If

you attempt to use the functions described

above while driving, they will become disabled

until you stop the vehicle in a safe place, and

apply the parking brake. Please keep the brake

pedal pushed down before releasing the park-

ing brake.

WARNING

!To avoid the risk of damage and injury and the

potential violation of applicable laws, the navi-

gation system is not for use with a “Video

image”that is visible to the driver.

!In some countries or states the viewing of

“Video image”on a display inside a vehicle

even by persons other than the driver may be

illegal. Where such regulations apply, they

must be obeyed.

!When applying the parking brake in order to

view “Video image”or to enable other func-

tions offered by the navigation system, park

your vehicle in a safe place, and keep the

brake pedal pushed down before releasing the

parking brake if the vehicle is parked on a hill

or otherwise might move when releasing the

parking brake.

CAUTION

!Accuracy/performance of interlock may be im-

pacted by such factors as GPS signal detec-

tion, speed pulse wire connectivity, and

driving habits or conditions of the place where

the vehicle is parked.

!It is strongly suggested that the speed pulse

wire be connected for accuracy of navigation

and better performance of interlock.

!If the speed pulse wire is unavailable for some

reason, it is recommended that the pulse gen-

erator ND-PG1 (sold separately) be used.

When you attempt to watch “Video image”

while driving, the warning “Viewing of front

seat video source while driving is strictly

prohibited.”will appear on the screen. To

watch “Video image”on this display, stop the

vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking

brake. Please keep the brake pedal pushed

down before releasing the parking brake.

Rear view camera and [Rear View]

mode

With an optional rear view camera, you are

able to use the navigation system as an aid to

keep an eye on trailers or to back into a tight

parking spot.

WARNING

!SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR REVERSED.

!USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR

IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. OTHER USE

MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE.

Features (Characteristics of

this software)

Touch panel key operation

It is possible to operate the navigation func-

tions and the Audio functions by using touch

panel keys.

Before Using the System

Chapter

Variety of view modes

Various types of screen display can be se-

lected for navigation guidance.

Wide variety of facility information for

Points of Interest (POI) Search

You can search for your destination from all

areas.

!Approximately 12 million POIs are included

in the database.

!Some POI information may not be accurate

or may become inaccurate through the

passage of time. Please contact the POI di-

rectly to verify the accuracy of the informa-

tion about the POI that appears in this

database. POI information is subject to

change without notice.

Auto reroute function

If you deviate from the set route, the system

will re-calculate the route from that point so

that you remain on track to the destination.

pThis function may not work in certain

areas.

Auto CD title and MP3 file listing

Title lists are automatically displayed when a

CD or MP3 disc is played. This system pro-

vides easy-to-operate audio functions that

allow playback simply by selecting an item

from the list.

Compatible voice recognition system

Connecting the supplied microphone will en-

able voice operation for both the navigation

and AV functions.

Original image assignment

You can store your own pictures on a CD-R in

JPEG format and import original images in

this navigation system. These imported

images can be set as a background or splash

screen, or as a picture in an address book or

phone book entry.

Data communication function with XM

tuner

If you connect the optional XM tuner (GEX-

P10XMT) to the navigation system, you can

use traffic information as a part of the naviga-

tion function. A separate subscription for XM

NavTraffic is required.

In addition, if you subscribe to XM Audio ser-

vices, you can utilize the XM display which fea-

tures station logos and category icons,

improving your XM Audio experience.

=For details, refer to Using XM NavTraffic Infor-

mation on page 65

=For more details about “Listening to XM Sa-

tellite Radio”, refer to Using the AV Source (XM,

SIRIUS) on page 123

pThe icon of each broadcast station is con-

tained in the hard disk drive based on the

data provided by XM Satellite Radio as of

October 2007.

Any changes made by XM Satellite Radio

in the lineup or icon of the broadcast sta-

tion in the future may not be supported by

the navigation system, and may cause the

unit to display incorrect icons.

CAUTION

Rear View is to use the navigation system as an

aid to keep an eye on the trailers, or while back-

ing up. Do not use this function for entertainment

purposes.

Before Using the System

En 23

Chapter

Before Using the System

About XM NavTraffic Service

and Pioneer Navigation

pXM NavTraffic subscription is required and

is available only in select markets. Check

www.xmnavtraffic.com for service availabil-

ity, pricing information, and other details.

The availability of XM NavTraffic data de-

pends on the ability of the antenna to re-

ceive a signal. The signal may be

unavailable if obstructed (e.g., by buildings,

mountains, trees, bridges, bad weather,

etc.). XM NavTraffic data also may be una-

vailable or not current if the original data

source is not providing data (e.g., sched-

uled or unscheduled downtime) or has not

been updated, or if there is a time lag be-

tween the time when the original data

source is updated and when you receive

the updated XM NavTraffic data.

pDepending on the amount of data being

transmitted in your area, it may take several

minutes to display all of the available data.

pThe information content depends on the in-

formation provided by XM NavTraffic Ser-

vice, including data refreshing and

availability timing.

pPioneer does not bear responsibility for the

accuracy of the information transmitted.

pPioneer does not bear responsibility for

changes to information services provided

by XM, such as cancellation of the services

or subscription updates.

pTraffic information is not taken into account

when calculating estimated time of arrival

time or travel time for your destination.

Notes for Hard Disk Drive

Recording equipment and

Recording equipment should be used only for

lawful copying and you are advised to check

carefully what defines lawful copying in the

country in which you are making a copy. Copy-

ing of copyright material such as films or

music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal

exception or consented to by the right owners.

Notes when writing data to the

hard disk drive at low temperature

Writing to the hard disk drive, such as record-

ing music to the music library, may be dis-

abled when the navigation system detects

abnormally low temperatures inside the vehi-

cle. Functionality will become available once

the temperature inside the vehicle returns to

normal. Additionally, if the low temperature

continues for a long time, the system may be

booted up with the preliminary mode because

the system can not recognize the hard disk

drive.

=For details, refer to When the Hard Disk

Drive is Disconnected on page 197

Points about recording

pPioneer does not compensate for the con-

tents that could not be recorded or any loss

of recorded data due to a malfunction or

failure of the navigation system.

pThe data recorded on the navigation system

is not allowed to be used without permis-

sion from its right holder under copyright

law, except for personal entertainment.

pMake sure to check the recording operation

before recording and check the recorded

contents after recording.

pRecording is not guaranteed for all CDs.

Before Using the System

Chapter

Data saved or recorded by the

customer

pThe data saved or recorded onto this navi-

gation system by the customer cannot be

extracted from the navigation system, and

those services cannot be accepted.

pThe data saved or recorded onto this navi-

gation system by the customer cannot be

guaranteed during repair or service. Lost

data that was saved or recorded by the cus-

tomer is not guaranteed.

pDue to copyrights, the music data recorded

into the Music Library cannot be backed up

during repair or service.

Failure to operate

Should the navigation system fail to operate

properly, contact your dealer or nearest

authorized Pioneer service facility.

After-sales service for Pioneer products

Please contact the dealer or distributor from

which you purchased the product for after-

sales service (including warranty conditions)

or any other information. In case the necessary

information is not available, please contact the

companies listed below.

Please do not ship your product to the compa-

nies at the addresses listed below for repair

without making advance contact.

!U.S.A

Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc.

CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION

P.O. Box 1760 Long Beach, CA 90801-1760

800-421-1404

!CANADA

Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.

CUSTOMER SATISFACTION DEPARTMENT

300 Allstate Parkway Markham, Ontario

L3R 0P2

1-877-283-5901

For warranty information, please see the Lim-

ited Warranty sheet included with your pro-

duct.

Visit Our Web site

Visit us at the following site:

http://www.pioneerelectronics.com

In Canada

http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca

1 Register your product. We will keep the details

of your purchase on file to help you refer to

this information in the event of an insurance

claim such as loss or theft.

2 Receive updates on the latest products and

technologies.

3 Download owner’s manuals, order product

catalogues, research new products, and

much more.

4 Receive notices of software upgrades and

software updates.

Before Using the System

En 25

Chapter

Before Using the System

Flow from Startup to

Termination

At first, please confirm the positions of the fol-

lowing features using the “Hardware Manual”.

!MAP button

!MENU button

!AV button

!OPEN CLOSE button

1 Start the engine to boot up the system.

After a short pause, the navigation splash

screen comes on for a few seconds.

#When you use the navigation system for the

first time, [Regional Settings] screen appears.

On [Regional Settings] screen, you can change

the language or time. (The settings can also be

changed afterward.)

=For details, refer to Customizing the Regional

Settings on page 88

2 Check the details of the caution mes-

sage and touch [OK].

You can operate the navigation system by

touching keys displayed on the screen. The

map of your surroundings is displayed. If the

route is already set, the screen changes to

route guidance mode.

=For details, refer to Switching the view mode

on page 38

=For details, refer to Setting the time differ-

ence on page 89

pTo protect the LCD screen from damage, be

sure to touch the touch panel keys with a

finger. (The stylus is supplied for special ca-

librations. Do not use the stylus for normal

operations.)

3 Press MENU button.

This displays the navigation menu.

4 Assign a destination by using the touch

panel key and beginning route guidance,

or operating the Audio source.

pTouch panel keys that are not available at

this time are inactive.

=For more details about “Specifying the ad-

dress and searching for the destination”, refer

to Calculating your destination by using Ad-

dress Search on page 28

=For more details about “Other search meth-

ods”, refer to Chapter 6

=For more details about “How to use audio

source”, refer to Using the AV Source (Built-in

DVD Drive and Radio) on page 97

5 Turn off the vehicle engine to termi-

nate the system.

The navigation system is also turned off.

pUntil your vehicle reaches the vicinity of the

destination, the set route will not be deleted

even if the engine is turned off.

How to Use Navigation

Menu Screens

The basic navigation is performed by using

menus.

The navigation menu is divided into four

menus: [Destination], [Information], [Map],

and [Settings].

Displaying the Navigation menu

1 Press MENU button.

2 To change to the menu you want to

use, touch the name of the menu displayed

at the top of the screen.

3 If you want to return to the map, press

MENU button.

Basic Operation

Chapter

Navigation menu overview

[Destination] menu

You can search your destination in this menu.

You can also check or cancel your set route

from this menu.

=For more details about “Specifying the ad-

dress and searching for the destination”, refer

to Calculating your destination by using Ad-

dress Search on the next page

=For more details about “Other search meth-

ods”, refer to Chapter 6

[Information] menu

Use this menu to check traffic information

using the GEX-P10XMT*1.

If you are using a cellular phone featuring

Bluetooth technology by connecting the Blue-

tooth unit (ND-BT1)*2 (sold separately) to the

navigation system, you can configure Blue-

tooth settings or check the outgoing/incoming

call history. You can also register information

for emergencies.

p[Traffic On Route], [Traffic Events], [Traf-

fic Flow], [Stock Info], [Set My Favorites],

and [My Favorites] can be active only

when the GEX-P10XMT*1 is connected to

the navigation system.

p[Phone Menu] is active only when the

Bluetooth unit (ND-BT1)*2 is connected to

the navigation system.

GEX-P10XMT*1:

XM Digital Satellite Data & Audio Receiver

(sold separately). Traffic information only avail-

able for cities where information is provided

by XM NavTraffic service. Active subscription

to XM NavTraffic is required to receive traffic

information on the navigation system.

=For details, refer to Using XM NavTraffic Infor-

mation on page 65

=For details, refer to Emergency Info on

page 72

ND-BT1*2 :

Sold separately. Use for hands-free phoning

and business card transfer via Bluetooth tech-

nology.

[Map] menu

You can change [View Mode], or set the

items to be displayed during the navigation

function.

p[View Mode] can be selected only when

the vehicle position is at the current posi-

tion. If you want to select [View Mode]

while scrolling the map, press MAP button

to center the current position back on the

vehicle position.

[Settings] menu

Customize the navigation functions so they

can be used easily.

=For details, refer to Chapter 11

Buttons you can use

Basic Operation

En 27

Chapter

Basic Operation

The availability of a specific button or function

is indicated by its appearance. Depending on

the status of your vehicle, some buttons will

be available, while others will not be.

Active touch panel key: The button is operable.

Inactive touch panel key: The function is not

available (e.g., operation is prohibited while

driving).

Basic Navigation

CAUTION

For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these

basic navigation functions while your vehicle is in

motion. To enable these functions, you must stop

in a safe place and apply the parking brake (=

Refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22).

Basic flow of operation

1 Park your vehicle in a safe place, and

apply the parking brake.

2 Press MENU button to display the navi-

gation menu.

3 Select the method of searching for your

destination.

4 Enter the information about your desti-

nation to calculate route.

5 Confirm the location on the map.

6 Check and decide the route.

7 Your navigation system sets the route

to your destination, and the map of your

surroundings appears.

8 After releasing the parking brake, drive

in accordance with the navigation informa-

tion, subject to the important safety in-

structions noted on Important Safety

Information on page 21 and Additional

Safety Information on page 22.

Calculating your destination by

using Address Search

The most frequently used function is [Address

Search], in which the address is specified and

the destination is searched. This section de-

scribes how to use [Address Search] and the

basics of using the navigation system.

1 Press MENU button to display the navi-

gation menu.

2 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu.

3 Touch [Address Search].

Select the method for searching the destina-

tion.

Basic Operation

Chapter

4 Touch [State code key] to select the

state, province, or territory.

If the destination is in another state, this

changes the state setting.

pOnce the state has been selected, you only

have to change states when your destina-

tion is outside of the state that you se-

lected.

State code key Selected state

The input text is deleted one letter at a time

from the end of the text. Continuing to touch

the button deletes all of the text.

[Back]:

Returns you to the previous screen.

5 Input the house number and touch

[OK].

Touch the characters you want to input.

pYou can also input a prefix to the house

number.

pTouching [OK] with no input allows you to

specify and search for the name of the

street, city, or area first.

6 Input the street name.

When the options are narrowed down to six or

less, a list of the matching streets automati-

cally appears.

When you enter the same characters that

were entered previously, the system automati-

cally displays the characters that follow the en-

tered characters. (Auto fill-in function)

pWhen entering the characters, the system

will automatically search the database for

all possible options. If there is only one let-

ter that could possibly follow your entry,

that letter will automatically be entered.

pA list appears if multiple options exist. Se-

lect the desired one from the list and pro-

ceed to the next step. In rare cases, you

may need to input the city name to deter-

mine the city.

#Operation of state selection screen

23 4

1[A-B]to[U-Z]:

Use to jump to the first state, province, or

territory that starts with that letter.

Use to see the next page or previous page

of the list.

3State list:

Press one of these items to set it as search

area.

4[Back]:

Returns previous screen.

#Operation of street name or city name

input screen (e.g. QWERTY keyboard)

a47

91 3 6

1State code key :

Basic Operation

En 29

Chapter

Basic Operation

Jump to the state selection screen. (Se-

lected state code is displayed.)

2[OK]:

Confirms the characters displayed in 4,

and proceeds to the next step.

3[List]:

Lists candidates based on yellow characters

in 4. Touch the desired item item in the list

to proceed to the next step.

4Text box:

Displays the characters that are entered.

5Keyboard:

Use to enter the text.

6[Back]:

Returns previous screen.

Deletes the input text one letter at a time

from the end of the text. Continuing to

touch the button deletes all of the text.

8[City]:

Touch if you want to specify the destination

city or area first. (This is available only when

4is blank.)

9[Sym.], [0-9]:

Input text with marks such as [&] or [+]or

numbers.

Touch to toggle the selection.

a[Street]:

Touch if you want to return the street input

mode. (This is available only when 4is

blank.)

b[Center]:

This can be selected when you enter a city

or area name first. Touch this button to dis-

play the central point of the entered city or

area. Touching [OK] searches the route to

the central point.

Proceed to Step 9.

pYou can customize the keyboard type to

be displayed on the screen.

=For details, refer to Customizing the

keyboard layout on page 89

#Auto fill-in function

The previously entered characters are stored for

each country and each The previously entered

characters are stored for each state and each

search function. The next time a character is en-

tered, suggested characters will be shown. For ex-

ample, if [E 220TH ST] has been entered in the

past, when you input just the letter [E], [E 220TH

ST] will be filled in automatically. The manually

input characters are displayed in yellow, and the

suggested characters are displayed in white, so

you can distinguish them. To confirm the filled-in

characters, touch [OK].

7 Touch the street from the list.

If the selected street has only one matching lo-

cation, “Route confirmation screen”appears.

Proceed to Step 9.

8 Touch the city or area where your desti-

nation is located.

When a route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

=For details, refer to Checking and modifying

the route on page 32

When a route is already set, “Location confir-

mation screen”is shown.

Basic Operation

Chapter

=For details, refer to Checking the location

on the map on this page

pIf there is no matching location, the naviga-

tion system displays “The address does

not exit. Do you want to continue ?”.

When you touch [Yes], a place near the spe-

cified location appears. In this case, pay at-

tention to the displayed location may not be

suitable for your intention. If you want to try

again, touch [No] to return to the previous

screen.

pIf you did not input the house number in

Step 5, the house number input screen ap-

pear after this step. You should input the

house number now (perform Step 5).

Route calculation starts.

When the route calculation is completed,

“Route confirmation screen”appears.

#Operation of street list screen

1Number of possible choices

Touching or on the scroll bar scrolls

through the list and allows you to view the

remaining items.

If all of characters cannot be displayed with-

in the displayed area, touching to the

right of the item allows you to see remain-

ing characters.

Touching displays a map of the place

you have selected. (Possibilities for place

names may appear with the list screen.)

You can also set a destination by touching

to the right of the list. Touch [OK] to set

the location indicated by the scroll cursor

as your destination.

5[Back]:

Returns previous screen.

#Checking the location on the map

Location confirmation screen

1Calculating the route to the destination

Route calculation starts. When the route

calculation is completed, “Route confirma-

tion screen”appears.

pIf you press MAP button or MENU but-

ton during route calculation, the calcu-

lation is canceled and the map screen

appears.

2Scrolling the map

The map display changes to the scroll

mode. You can fine-tune the location in the

scroll mode, and then you can set the loca-

tion as your destination or do various opera-

tions by using the shortcut menu.

=For details, refer to Shortcut menu on

page 45

3Setting the location as a waypoint

The location indicated by the scroll cursor

will be set as a waypoint.

Basic Operation

En 31

Chapter

Basic Operation

=For details, refer to Editing Waypoints on

page 36

9 Touch [OK] to decide your route.

Checking and modifying the route

You can check the route details. You can also

recalculate the route in different conditions.

Route confirmation screen

3 2 1

1Route calculation condition

Shows the route has been calculated under

those conditions.

!shows that fastest route is prioritized.

!shows that shortest route is priori-

tized.

!shows that using highways and main

roads are prioritized.

!shows whether the suggested

route includes freeways.

!shows whether the suggested

route includes toll roads. The current

setting appears.

!shows whether the suggested

route includes ferries. The current set-

ting appears.

!shows whether the suggested

route includes learning routes. The cur-

rent setting appears.

In addition, if the calculated route has unin-

tended results, the following icons will be

shown.

!shows that freeways could not be

avoided.

!shows that toll roads could not be

avoided when the setting [Avoid Toll

Road]is[On].

!shows that ferries could not be

avoided when the setting [Avoid Ferry]

is [On].

!shows for routes that contain streets

or bridges that are subject to traffic reg-

ulations during a certain time when the

setting [Time restrictions]is[On].

2Distance to the destination

3Travel time to destination

4Set the displayed route

Sets the displayed route as your route, and

starts the route guidance.

=For details, refer to When the route guidance

starts on the next page

5Display multiple routes

You can select a desired route from multiple

route options. Calculated routes are shown in

different colors.

Touching to switch to another route.

Touching [OK] returns to the previous display.

If you set waypoints, you cannot use the multi-

ple route option.

pThere can be cases that the same route

is displayed even when multiple routes

are searched.

pIn multiple route calculations, both

routes that use and avoid the freeways

are calculated independently of the set-

ting for [Avoid Freeway].

6Change the route calculation condition

Modify each calculation condition, and recal-

culate the route.

=For details, refer to Modifying the Route Cal-

culation Conditions on page 34

7View the route profile

Basic Operation

Chapter

You can check the streets that you will travel

to reach the destination.

=For details, refer to Checking the passing

streets with a list on page 35

8Check the shape of route

You can check the overall shape of your route

and the location of destination on the map.

=For details, refer to Checking the entire route

overview on the map on page 36

9Adding and edit waypoint

You can add, remove, or sort waypoints.

=For details, refer to Editing Waypoints on

page 36

When the route guidance starts

Touching [OK]in“Route confirmation screen”

starts the route guidance on the displayed

route. Your navigation system gives you the fol-

lowing information with the timing adjusted to

the speed of your vehicle:

—Distance to the next turning point

—Direction of travel

—Road number of the freeway

—Arrival of waypoint (If waypoints are set)

—Arrival of your destination

pTouching or allows you to turn the

voice guidance on or off.

pTouching allows you to hear the in-

formation again.

pIf you stop at a gas station or a restaurant

during the route guidance, your navigation

system remembers your destination and

route information. When you start the en-

gine and get back on the road, the route

guidance resumes.

pIf you deviate from the route with guidance

set to [Route View]or[Guide Mode] and

enter a street not recorded on the hard disk

drive, the screen changes to [Map Mode].

When you return to the route, the screen re-

turns to the original view and resumes

route guidance.

Basic items on the screen

This section describes only the basic items

that are displayed on the Map Mode screen.

=For more details about “Details of the map

screen”, refer to How to Use the Map on page

2 3 1 4

1Current location

2Distance to the destination

3Estimated time of arrival (default)

4ON/OFF key for voice guidance

Canceling the Route Guidance

If you no longer need to travel to your destina-

tion or if you want to change your destination,

follow the steps below to cancel the route gui-

dance.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Cancel Route].

A message confirming whether to cancel the

current route appears.

2 Touch [Yes].

The current route is deleted, and a map of

your surroundings reappears.

On this screen, you can also select the follow-

ing items:

[Skip]:

Skip the route to the selected waypoint, and re-

calculate the route. (The skipped waypoint will

not be deleted.)

[No]:

Returns to the previous display without delet-

ing the route.

Basic Operation

En 33

Chapter

Basic Operation

Modifying the Route

Calculation Conditions

You can modify the conditions for route calcu-

lation and recalculate the current route.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

p[Route Overview] is displayed only when

the route is set.

2 Touch [Options].

3 Touch the desired items to change the

route calculation conditions and then

touch [OK].

The route is recalculated, and “Route confir-

mation screen”appears.

When a single route is calculated, the system

searches for the route that meets these condi-

tions as closely as possible.

pA single route is calculated in the following

cases:

—When a waypoint is set

—When a route is set through voice recogni-

tion

—When auto reroute is carried out

Items that users can operate

Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show that

these are default or factory settings.

Route Condition

This setting controls how the route should be

calculated by taking into account the time or

the distance or the main road.

Determine which condition takes priority for

route calculation.

[Fast]*:

Calculate a route with the shortest travel time

to your destination as a priority.

[Short]:

Calculate a route with the shortest distance to

your destination as a priority.

[Main Road]:

Calculate a route that passes major arterial

road as a priority.

Avoid Toll Road

This setting controls whether toll roads (in-

cluding toll areas) should be taken into ac-

count.

[Off]*:

Calculate a route that may include toll roads

(including toll areas).

[On]:

Calculate a route that avoids toll roads (includ-

ing toll areas).

pThe system may calculate a route that in-

cludes toll road even if [On] is selected.

Avoid Ferry

This setting controls whether ferry crossings

should be taken into account.

[Off]*:

Calculate a route that may include ferries.

[On]:

Calculate a route that avoids ferries.

pThe system may calculate a route that in-

cludes ferry way even if [On] is selected.

Avoid Freeway

This setting controls whether freeways may be

included in the route calculation.

[Off]*:

Basic Operation

Chapter

Calculate a route that may include freeways.

[On]:

Calculate a route that avoids freeways.

pThe system may calculate a route that in-

cludes freeway even if [On] is selected.

Time restrictions

This setting controls whether streets or

bridges have traffic restrictions during a cer-

tain time should be taken into account.

pIf you want to set your route to avoid

opened bridges, select [On].

[On]*:

Calculate a route while avoiding streets or

bridges with traffic restrictions during a cer-

tain time.

[Off]:

Calculate a route while ignoring traffic restric-

tions.

pThe system may calculate a route that in-

cludes streets or bridges that are subject to

traffic restrictions during a certain time

even if [On] is selected.

CAUTION

If the time difference is not set correctly, the navi-

gation system cannot consider traffic regulations

correctly. Set the time difference correctly (=

Refer to Setting the time difference on page 89).

Learning Route

The system learns the travel history of your ve-

hicle for each road.

This setting controls whether or not the travel

history should be taken into account.

[On]*:

Calculate the route with the travel history

taken into account.

[Off]:

Calculate the route without the travel history

taken into account.

[Clear]:

Clear the current travel history.

Checking the Current Route

You can check information about the route be-

tween your current location and your destina-

tion.

You can select two methods:

!Checking the passing streets with a list

!Checking the entire route overview on the

map

Checking the passing streets

with a list

You can check the route details.

pThis function is not available if your vehicle

has deviated from the route.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

“Route confirmation screen”appears.

p[Route Overview] is displayed only when

the route is set.

2 Touch [Profile].

3 Touch or to scroll the list.

Scroll the list as necessary.

Names of the streets you are driving through

Turning direction Driving distance

4 Touch [Back].

You can return to the previous display.

Basic Operation

En 35

Chapter

Basic Operation

pWhen a long distance route is calculated,

your navigation system may not be able to

list all roads. (In this case, the remaining

roads will be shown in the list as you drive

on.)

Checking the entire route

overview on the map

You can check the entire shape of the current

route.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

“Route confirmation screen”appears.

p[Route Overview] is displayed only when

the route is set.

2 Touch [Detail].

3 Touch the screen and place the scroll

cursor on the point where you want to

view the detail or the entire picture. Or

zoom in or zoom out the map scale.

The map around the scroll cursor is zoomed in

or out so you can view the detail or the entire

picture.

4 Touch [Back].

The screen returns to the previous display.

pYou can also check the overview by using

the shortcut menu if [Whole Route Over-

view] is selected on [Short-Cut

Selection].

Editing Waypoints

You can select waypoints (locations you want

to visit on the way to your destination) and you

can recalculate the route to pass through

these locations.

Adding a waypoint

Up to 5 waypoints can be selected, and se-

lected points can be sorted automatically or

manually.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

2 Touch [Waypoints].

The waypoint menu screen appears.

3 Touch [Add].

The “Select Search Method”screen appears.

After searching for a point, display it on a

map, then touch [OK] to add to the waypoints.

(You can add up to 5 waypoints in total.)

4 Touch [OK].

A route is recalculated, and “Route confirma-

tion screen”appears.

=For details, refer to Checking and modifying

the route on page 32

pIf you set waypoints in the route to your des-

tination, the route up to the next waypoint

will appear in light green. The rest of the

route will appear in light blue.

Basic Operation

Chapter

Deleting a waypoint

You can delete waypoints from the route and

then recalculate the route. (You can delete

waypoints successively.)

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

2 Touch [Waypoints].

The waypoint menu screen appears.

3 Touch [Delete], then touch the way-

point you want to delete.

The touched waypoint will be deleted from the

list.

4 Touch [OK].

The route is recalculated, and “Route confir-

mation screen”appears.

=For details, refer to Checking and modifying

the route on page 32

Sorting waypoints

You can sort waypoints and recalculate the

route.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Route Overview].

2 Touch [Waypoints].

The waypoint menu screen appears.

3 Touch [Sort], then touch [Automatic] or

[Manual].

[Automatic]:

You can sort the destination and waypoints

automatically. The system will show the near-

est waypoint (distance in a straight line) from

the current location as waypoint 1, and sort

the other points (including your destination) in

order of distance from the waypoint 1.

[Manual]:

You can manually sort destination and way-

points. Touch the destination and waypoints

on the left side of the screen in the order you

want to visit. The touched destination and way-

points are displayed on the right side of the

screen. Touch [OK] to complete the sorting

and the previous screen appears.

4 Touch [OK].

The route is calculated again, and “Route con-

firmation screen”appears.

=For details, refer to Checking and modifying

the route on page 32

Skipping a waypoint

If points are set, the next waypoint along the

route can be skipped.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Cancel Route].

2 Touch [Skip].

A new route to your destination through all re-

maining waypoints, except for the skipped

waypoint, is calculated.

“Route confirmation screen”appears.

=For details, refer to Checking and modifying

the route on page 32

Basic Operation

En 37

Chapter

Basic Operation

How to Use the Map

Most of the information provided by your navi-

gation system can be seen on the map. You

need to get to know how the information ap-

pears on the map.

Switching the view mode

There are six types of map display and two ad-

ditional view modes.

!Map Mode

!Guide Mode (during route guidance only)

!Route View (during route guidance only)

!Driver’s View

!2D Twin Map View

!3D Twin Map View

!Vehicle Dynamics

!Rear View (Only possible when

[Camera Input] is set to [On].)

1 Press MAP button to display a map of

the area around your current position.

2 Press MAP button again.

3 Touch the mode name to select the

mode you want to display.

pYou can display the view mode screen by

touching [Map] in the navigation menu,

and touching [View Mode].

How to view the map of the

current location

pThis example shows a case where [Second

Maneuver Arrow] is set to [View].

Map Mode

Displays the standard map.

Guide Mode

Overlays two arrows onto the standard map

([Map Mode]).

Route View

Displays the name of the street you will travel

along next and an arrow indicating the direc-

tion of travel.

How to Read the Map Display

Chapter

Driver’s View

Shows a map from the driver’s viewpoint.

About the 3D POI

Depending on the data, the POI may appear in

graphical 3D or plate format with POI mark in

the left screen of [Driver’s View].

pThe displayed POI in the left screen has no

relation with the setting of [Overlay POI].

2D Twin Map View

You can split the screen in half. The right

screen and the left screen can display a map

in different scales. The 2D map appears on

the left screen.

8477

3D Twin Map View

You can split the screen in half. The right

screen and the left screen can display a map

in different scales. The 3D map appears on

the left screen.

8477

pSelects whether to display or hide the 3D

Landmark on the map.

=For details, refer to 3D Landmark on page

Vehicle Dynamics Display

Indicates the status of your vehicle.

CAUTION

In Vehicle Dynamics Display mode, the speed-

ometer display may show a different speed than

your vehicle’s actual speedometer, because your

unit measures speed in a different way.

pYou can change the items indicated on the

left and right meters.

=For details, refer to Setting the Vehicle

Dynamics Display on page 76

How to Read the Map Display

En 39

Chapter

How to Read the Map Display

Rear View

Rear view image is displayed on the left-hand

side of the screen, while the map of your sur-

roundings is indicated on the right.

pIf [Camera Input] is set to [Off], the rear

view image is not displayed. Please set it to

[On].

=For details, refer to Setting for rear view

camera on page 149

pWhen using a camera set to turn On/Off in

conjunction with the reverse signal, no

camera images will be displayed in rear

view mode while you are moving forward.

pIf the camera is set always On, it can dis-

play images in rear view mode when the ve-

hicle is moving forward. In that case, you

should ask the camera maker or dealer

whether the camera’s functions or lifetime

would be affected.

pRear View can be displayed at all times

(e.g. when monitoring an attached trailer)

as a split screen where map information is

partially displayed. Please beware that in

this setting, camera image is not resized to

fit to screen, and that a portion of camera

image may not be viewable.

Enlarged map of the intersection

This screen is displayed only when [Close Up

View]in[Map] menu is [2D]or[3D].

Enlarged map of the intersection (2D)

Enlarged map of the intersection (3D)

Display during freeway driving

In certain locations of the freeway, lane infor-

mation is available, indicating the recom-

mended lane to be in to easily maneuver the

next guidance.

How to Read the Map Display

Chapter

While driving on the freeway, freeway exit

numbers and freeway signs may be displayed

when in the vicinity of interchanges and exits.

pIf the data for these items is not contained

in the hard disk drive, the information is

not available even if there are the signs on

the actual road.

City Map

When [City Map]in[Map] menu is [On], in

certain metropolitan city areas, a more de-

tailed [City Map] is available at the 0.05 mile

(50 m) map scale or lower. (The screen

changes automatically when you enter certain

metropolitan city area.)

1ak

pThe detailed city map may not appear for

the following reasons:

—The data for that city area is not con-

tained in the hard disk drive.

—When you are driving on a freeway.

Display items

pInformation with the mark (*) appears only

when the route is set.

pDepending on the conditions and settings,

some items may not be displayed.

Current location

The current location of your vehicle. The tip of

the triangular mark indicates your heading

and the display moves automatically as you

drive.

pThe head of the triangular mark is the cur-

rent vehicle position.

Destination*

The checkered flag indicates your destination.

Guidance point*

The next guidance point (next turning point,

etc.) is shown by a yellow flag.

Up to the next three guidance points are dis-

played.

Waypoint*

The checkered flag and number (1 to 5) indi-

cates your waypoint.

1Name of the street to be used (or next gui-

dance point)*

2Distance to the guidance point*

Touching allows you to hear the infor-

mation again.

3Distance to the destination (or distance to

waypoint)*

The distance on this button shows the dis-

tance to the destination or to each waypoint. If

waypoints are set, the distance to the destina-

tion and the next waypoint change with each

touch.

pWhen the vehicle position is on the

route, the distance to the destination (or

waypoint) appears. When the vehicle po-

sition is not on the route, the linear dis-

tance to the destination (or waypoint)

appears.

4Street name (or city name) that your vehi-

cle is traveling along

5Compass

The red arrow indicates north. If the scale is

less than 25 mile (50 km), touching the map

changes the direction that it is displayed in

(north up/ heading up). When the scale of the

map is greater than 25 mile (50 km), it is fixed

to “North up”.

!Heading up:

The map display always shows the vehi-

cle’s direction as proceeding toward the

top of the screen.

How to Read the Map Display

En 41

Chapter

How to Read the Map Display

!North up:

The map display always has north at the

top of the screen.

6Zoom in/Zoom out

Touch to change the map’s scale.

=For details, refer to Changing the scale of

the map on the next page

7Map scale

The scale of the map is indicated by distance.

8VOICE icon

Touch to change to the voice recognition

mode.

pThis is displayed only when the micro-

phone for voice recognition is con-

nected.

=For details, refer to Chapter 18

9Traffic status

This appears when an XM satellite radio tuner

(GEX-P10XMT, sold separately) is connected

and traffic information is received.

TRFC —No problem.

ANTENNA —Improper antenna connection.

UPDATING —Updating encryption code.

=For details, refer to Checking the Reception

Status of the XM Tuner on page 72

aCurrent time

bEstimated time of arrival (or travel time to

your destination)*

The display alternates by pressing it.

pThe estimated time of arrival is an ideal

value calculated based on the value set

for [Average Speed] and the actual

driving speed. The estimated time of ar-

rival is only a reference value, and does

not guarantee arrival at that time.

=For details, refer to Changing the vir-

tual speed of the vehicle on page 90

cTracking dot

The tracking dot shows the route your vehicle

has traveled by white dots.

=For more details about “Select the tracking

setting”, refer to Setting the Item on the Map

Screen on page 46

dMap of your surroundings (Side map)

Touching the screen changes the map to the

Scroll mode.

=For details, refer to Scroll the map to the lo-

cation you want to see on the next page

eDistance to a turning point*

Displayed on the enlarged intersection map.

The green bar gets shorter as your vehicle ap-

proaches a turning point.

fNext direction of travel*

When you approach an intersection, it ap-

pears green. The screen displays the distance

to the next guidance point.

gDirection line*

The direction towards your destination (or

scroll cursor) is indicated with a straight line.

hLane information*

Lane information is displayed the first time

there is a voice guidance on your route. The

white arrow on the green background indi-

cates the recommended lane. If the next tra-

veling direction screen is displayed when you

approach a interchange, junction, or exit, the

lane information disappears.

iFreeway signs*

Show the road number and give directional in-

formation.

jFreeway exit information*

Displays the freeway exit.

kBluetooth Connected icon

This icon shows whether the cellular phone

featuring Bluetooth technology is connected

or not. You can select between display and

non-display.

: Connected

: Disconnected

pThis is available only when the Blue-

tooth unit (sold separately) is con-

nected.

=For more details about “Selecting dis-

play or non-display for the Bluetooth

Connected icon”, refer to Setting the

Item on the Map Screen on page 46

lMute Voice Guidance icon

Touch to turn on or off the mute setting of

Voice Guidance. You can select between dis-

play and non-display.

How to Read the Map Display

Chapter

=For more details about “Selecting display or

non-display for the Mute Voice Guidance

icon”, refer to Setting the Item on the Map

Screen on page 46

mSecond Maneuver Arrow*

Indicates the turning direction after next. You

can select between display and non-display.

=For more details about “Selecting display or

non-display for Second Maneuver Arrow”,

refer to Setting the Item on the Map Screen on

page 46

nPOI icon

The POI icon may appear on the enlarged

map of the intersection (when available data

exists).

oSuggested lane information*

The traveling direction screen is displayed

when you approach a interchange, junction,

or exit. The suggested lane is indicated with a

green arrow.

Roads without turn-by-turn

instructions

Routable roads (the route displayed and high-

lighted in purple) have only basic data and

can only be used to plot a navigable route.

Pioneer Navigation will only display a navig-

able route on the map (only the arrival gui-

dance for the destination or a waypoint is

available). Please review and obey all local traf-

fic rules along the highlighted route. (For your

safety.)

No turn-by-turn directions will be displayed on

these roads.

When your vehicle reaches to the entrance of

this road, the icon will be displayed beside

the direction arrow, indicating that the gui-

dance is not available with this type of road.

The icon will be indicated for roads that

have available guidance.

The Close-up of intersection function, Auto Re-

route function, Changing the view to [Guide

Mode], or [Route View] are not available.

Changing the scale of the map

Touching or allows you to change the

map scale. Touch and holding or allows

you to change the scale in smaller step within

a range of 25 yards to 1000 miles (25 meters to

2000 kilometers). When the view mode is set

to Map Mode or Guide Mode,“Direct scale

key”is displayed. Touching “Direct scale key”

changes the map to the selected scale di-

rectly.

Direct scale key

pThe icon of the entry in “Address Book”and

the traffic information icon are displayed

when the map scale is 10 miles (20 km) or

lower.

pTraffic lines are displayed when the map

scale is 2.5 miles (5 km) or lower.

pPOI icons are displayed when the map

scale is 0.75 mile (1 km) or lower.

Scroll the map to the location

you want to see

Touching anywhere on the map changes the

map to “Scroll mode”and the map begins

scrolling in the direction you touched. The

scrolling stops when you release your finger

from the screen. Pressing MAP button returns

you to the map of your surroundings.

pTouch the area close to the center of the

screen to scroll slowly; touch near the sides

of the screen to scroll quickly.

How to Read the Map Display

En 43

Chapter

How to Read the Map Display

1Scroll cursor

The position of scroll cursor shows the loca-

tion selected on the current map.

pWhen the scale is 0.25 mile (200 m) or

lower, the road appears light blue in the

vicinity of the scroll cursor.

2Direction line

This is the line connecting between the cur-

rent location and the scroll cursor.

The direction towards the scroll cursor is indi-

cated with a straight line.

3Distance from the current location

This shows the distance in a straight line be-

tween the location indicated by the scroll cur-

sor and your current location.

4Street name, city name, area name and

other information for this location

(The information displayed varies according to

the scale.)

Touching on the right displays hidden text.

5Current location key

Touching returns you to the map of your

current location.

Viewing the information of a

specified location

An icon appears at registered places (home lo-

cation, specific places, Address Book entries)

and places where there is a POI icon or traffic

information icon. Place the scroll cursor over

the icon to view detailed information.

1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cur-

sor to the icon you want to view.

2 Touch .

Information for a specified location appears.

The information shown varies according to the

location. (There may be no information for that

location.)

=For more details about “Registering places”,

refer to Registering Locations Overview on

page 58

=For more details about “Displaying facilities

(POI) icon on the map”, refer to Displaying POI

on the Map on page 49

=For more details about “Icons for traffic in-

formation”, refer to Traffic event icon and line

on page 66

pappears when the Bluetooth unit

(sold separately) is connected to the naviga-

tion system together with the cellular

phone. By touching , you can make a

phone call to the displayed phone number.

=For details, refer to Dialing from the map

on page 83

3 Touch [Back].

Returns to the previous display.

4 Touch .

Returns to the map of your surroundings.

pYou can also return to the map of your sur-

roundings by pressing MAP button.

How to Read the Map Display

Chapter

Shortcut menu

Shortcuts allow you to perform various tasks,

such as route calculation for the location indi-

cated by the scroll cursor or registering a loca-

tion in [Address Book], faster than using the

navigation menu.

You can customize the shortcuts displayed on

screen. The shortcuts described here are pre-

pared as the default setting.

=For more details about “Changing a short-

cut”, refer to Selecting the Shortcut on page 48

pWhen the Bluetooth unit (sold separately)

is connected to the navigation system, you

can use shortcuts related to phone func-

tions.

pItems marked with an asterisk (*) cannot

be removed from Shortcut menu.

%When the map is displayed, touch .

Shortcut menu

:Route Options*

Displayed when the map is not scrolled. This

item can be selected only during route gui-

dance.

You can modify the conditions for route calcu-

lation and recalculate the current route.

=For details, refer to Modifying the Route Cal-

culation Conditions on page 34

:Destination*

Displayed when the map is scrolled. Set the

route to the place specified with the scroll cur-

sor.

:Registration

by the scroll cursor to the Address Book.

=For details, refer to Registering a Location

into “Address Book”on page 59

:Vicinity Search

Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of

the scroll cursor.

=For details, refer to Finding a POI in the Vici-

nity on page 53

:Overlay POI

Displays icons for surrounding facilities (POI)

on the map.

=For details, refer to Displaying POI on the

Map on page 49

:Volume

Displays [Volume].

=For more details about “Volume”, refer to

Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone on

page 88

:Phone Book

Displays [Phone Book].

=For details, refer to Calling a number in the

phone book on page 82

=For details, refer to Editing the entry in

“Phone Book”on page 84

:Menu Close

Hides the Shortcut menu.

How to Read the Map Display

En 45

Chapter

How to Read the Map Display

CAUTION

For safety reasons, these functions are not avail-

able while your vehicle is in motion. To enable

these functions, you must stop in a safe place

and put on the parking brake before setting your

route (Refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22).

Entering the Map Menu

1 Press MENU button to display the navi-

gation menu.

2 Touch [Map] to display the Map menu.

3 Change the setting.

=For more details about “Adjusting each

item”, refer to Chapter 5

pThis section describes the details of the set-

ting for each item. Settings marked with an

asterisk (*) show that these are default or

factory settings.

Setting the Item on the

Map Screen

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Displayed Info].

The Displayed Info screen appears.

On this screen, you can operate the following

items.

2 To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Close Up View

You can select the method to display the close

up view of the intersection.

!2D*:

Displays the close up view with the 2D map.

!3D:

Displays the close up view with [Driver’s

View].

![Off]:

Does not display the close up view.

City Map

You can select whether to display the city map

when in certain metropolitan city areas.

![On]*:

Automatically switches to the city map

when in a city map area.

![Off]:

Does not show the city map.

pEven if you switch [City Map]to[On],

city map cannot display in areas where

there is no city map data.

Tracking Display

You can trace locations that you have already

passed with white dots on the route.

!On (Always):

Displays tracking for all journeys.

!On (This journey):

Displays tracking dots but erases them

when the navigation system is turned off

(when turning off the engine of your vehi-

cle).

![Off]:

Does not display tracking dots.

Show Mute Button

Selects whether to display or hide the voice

guidance mute key on the map.

Modifying Map Configurations

Chapter

!View*:

Displays the voice guidance mute key on

the map.

!Hide:

Hides the voice guidance mute key on the

map.

Show Traffic Incident

Selects whether to display or hide the traffic

notification icons on the map when incidents

occur on your route.

=For details, refer to Checking traffic informa-

tion manually on page 68

!View*:

Displays the icons on the map.

!Hide:

Hides the icons on the map.

pThe notification icons will not be avail-

able when your vehicle deviates from

the route.

Second Maneuver Arrow

Selects whether to display or hide the second

turn ahead of the vehicle on the map (except

for [Route View]).

=For details, refer to How to view the map of

the current location on page 38

!View*:

Displays the second turn ahead of the vehi-

cle on the map.

!Hide:

Hides the second turn ahead of the vehicle

on the map.

Bluetooth Connected

Selects whether to display or hide the icon for

current status of the phone connection via

Bluetooth wireless technology.

!View*:

Displays the Bluetooth Connected icon on

the map.

!Hide:

Hides the Bluetooth Connected icon on

the map.

=For more details about “Bluetooth Con-

nected icon”, refer to How to view the map

of the current location on page 38

Address Book Icon

You can select whether to display the Address

Book Icon on the map.

![On]*:

Displays the Address Book Icon on the

map.

![Off]:

Hides the Address Book Icon on the map.

pEven if [Address Book Icon] is set to

[Off], the alarm sounds when you ap-

proach the registered location and the

set image pops up. To turn off the sound

output and image pop up, select

[No Sound] and [No Picture] for the

entry.

=For details, refer to Editing the entry in

“Address Book”on page 60

3D Landmark

You can select whether to display the 3D Land-

mark on the map.

p3D Landmark only appears when the view

mode is [3D Twin Map View] and the map

scale is set to 0.25 mile (200 m) or lower.

![On]*:

Displays the 3D Landmark on the map.

![Off]:

Hides the 3D Landmark on the map.

Modifying Map Configurations

En 47

Chapter

Modifying Map Configurations

Selecting the Shortcut

Select shortcuts to display on the map screen.

In the list displayed on screen, the items with

red checks are displayed on the map screen.

Touch the shortcut you want to display and

then touch [OK] when a red check appears.

You can select up to five shortcuts.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Short-Cut Selection].

The Short-Cut Selection screen appears.

On this screen, you can operate the following

items.

2 Touch the item that you want to set in

the shortcut menu.

An item with a red check mark is displayed in

the shortcut menu.

:Registration*

cated by the scroll cursor to the Address book.

=For details, refer to Registering a Location

into “Address Book”on page 59

:Vicinity Search*

Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of

the scroll cursor.

=For details, refer to Finding a POI in the Vici-

nity on page 53

:Overlay POI*

Displays icon for surrounding facilities (POI)

on the map.

=For details, refer to Displaying POI on the

Map on the next page

:Volume*

Displays [Volume].

=For more details about “Volume”, refer to

Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone on

page 88

:Phone Book*

Displays [Phone Book].

=For details, refer to Calling a number in the

phone book on page 82

=For details, refer to Editing the entry in

“Phone Book”on page 84

:Dial Favorite 1 to Dial Favorite 5

Make a call to the phone number registered in

[Dial Favorites].

=For details, refer to Registering a phone

number in “Dial Favorites”on page 84

:Whole Route Overview

Displays the entire route (currently set).

=For details, refer to Checking the entire route

overview on the map on page 36

:Stock Info

Displays stock prices.

=For details, refer to Displaying stock prices

on page 70

:Set My Favorites

Displays the screen of storing browsable item

for XM tuner.

=For details, refer to Storing browsable infor-

mation on page 70

:My Favorites

Displays information on your favorite browsa-

ble item for XM tuner.

=For details, refer to Displaying favorite brow-

sable Information on page 71

:Traffic On Route

Displays a list of traffic information on the

route.

=For details, refer to Confirming traffic infor-

mation on the map on page 66

:Traffic Events

Displays a list of traffic events information.

=For details, refer to Checking all traffic infor-

mation on page 65

:Day/Night Display

Switches Day/Night Display setting.

=For details, refer to Setting the Map Color

Change between Day and Night on page 50

:Address Book Icon Display

Switches Address Book Icon Display setting.

=For details, refer to Setting the Item on the

Map Screen on page 46

3 To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Modifying Map Configurations

Chapter

Displaying POI on the Map

Displays icons for the surrounding facilities

(POI) on the map.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Overlay POI].

2 Touch [Display] to turn it [On].

pIf you do not want to display the POI icon

on the map, touch [Display] to turn it [Off].

(Even if [Display] is turned [Off], the POI

selection setting is retained.)

3 Touch the category you want to dis-

play.

4 Touch [Select Detail].

[Select All]:

Selects all detailed categories that are in-

cluded in that category. (E.g. all categories of

restaurants including Japanese and fast food.)

[Deselect All]:

Deselects the selected category.

5 Touch the desired detailed category.

pYou can select up to 100 items from the de-

tailed category.

Categories that are already set will have a red

check mark.

6 Touch [OK].

Returns previous screen.

7 To finish the selection, touch [OK].

=For details, refer to Viewing the information

of a specified location on page 44

Viewing the Map Color Legend

You can browse the type of the roads and

areas displayed on the map.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu,

then touch [Map Legend].

2 Touch the type which you want to see.

3 Touch or to switch to the next page

or previous page.

On this screen, you can operate the following

items.

[Day]:

You can check the color of the Day screen.

[Night]:

You can check the color of the Night screen.

pTo return the previous screen, touch

[Back].

Changing the View Mode

for the Navigation Map

You can change the map display mode.

pYou cannot perform this operation in

“Scroll mode”.

Modifying Map Configurations

En 49

Chapter

Modifying Map Configurations

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu,

then touch [View Mode].

2 Touch the type that you want to set.

=For details, refer to How to Use the Map on

page 38

Setting the Map Color Change

between Day and Night

To improve the visibility of the map during the

evening, you can set the timing for changing

the combination of the map color.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.

2 Touch [Day/Night Display] to change

the setting.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

[Automatic]*:

You can change the colors of a map between

daytime and nighttime according to whether

the vehicle lights are On or Off.

[Day]:

The map is always displayed with daytime col-

ors.

pTo use this function with [Automatic], the

Orange/white lead of the navigation system

must be connected correctly.

pYou can also change the brightness of the

screen between daytime and nighttime with

[Dimmer].

=For details, refer to Operating the picture

adjustment on page 153

Changing the Setting of

Navigation Interruption

Screen

Set whether to automatically switch to the na-

vigation screen from the AV screen when your

vehicle approaches a guidance point such as

an intersection while displaying a screen other

than navigation.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.

2 Touch [AV Guide Mode] to change the

setting.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

[On]*:

Switches from the audio operation screen to

the navigation screen.

[Off]:

Does not switch the screen.

Changing the Map Color

You can set the map color to bluish or reddish.

1 Touch [Map] in the navigation menu.

2 Touch [Road Color] to change the set-

ting.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

[Blue]:

Changes to blue based map colors.

[Red]*:

Changes to red based map colors.

pCheck the color change with [Map

Legend].

Modifying Map Configurations

Chapter

CAUTION

For safety reasons, these route-setting functions

are not available while your vehicle is in motion.

To enable these functions, you must stop in a

safe place and put on the parking brake before

setting your route (Refer to To ensure safe driving

on page 22).

pSome information on traffic regulations de-

pends on the time when the route calcula-

tion is performed. Thus, the information

may not correspond with a certain traffic

regulation when your vehicle actually

passes the location. Also, the information

on the traffic regulations provided will be

for a passenger vehicle, and not for a truck

or other delivery vehicles. Always follow the

actual traffic regulations when driving.

Searching for Points of

Interest (POI) Statewide

Information about various facilities (Points Of

Interest - POI), such as gas stations, amuse-

ment parks, or restaurants, is available. By en-

tering the POI Name, you can search for a

POI.

pYou can also narrow down the search

range by initially specifying the name of the

city where your destination is located and

also by initially specifying the category.

pUse the functions [POI Search] and [Vici-

nity Search] in different situations. In [POI

Search], the distance is not limited within

the selected state or province, but in [Vici-

nity Search], the distance for the search is

limited to within a 16 km (10 miles) radius.

The following three methods are available for

searching facilities by POI:

!Searching for POIs by specifying a category

first

!Searching for POIs by specifying a city name

first

!Searching for a POI directly from the name of

the facilities

Searching for a POI directly

from the name of the facilities

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [POI Search].

2 Touch the state code key of the destina-

tion and select the state or province (or ter-

ritory).

=For more details about “Selecting the state

or province where you want to search”, refer to

Calculating your destination by using Address

Search on page 28

3 Input the name of the facilities.

[City]:

Touch to specify the destination city or area,

and then input the city name. (This is available

only when [Name] is blank.)

[Category]:

Touch to specify the POI category. (This is

available only when [Name] and [City] are

blank.)

[List]:

Lists candidates based on the yellow charac-

ters in the text box (suggested characters in

white are invalid). Touch the desired facility in

the list to proceed to the next step.

pWhen the options are narrowed down to six

or less, a list of the matching facilities auto-

matically appears. When you enter the

same characters that were entered pre-

viously, the system automatically displays

the character string that follows the entered

characters. (Auto fill-in function)

=For details, refer to Auto fill-in function

on page 30

pIf less than six POIs in a detailed category

are available, the screen for inputting the

POI name is skipped.

Setting a Route to Your Destination

En 51

Chapter

Setting a Route to Your Destination

Please proceed to Step 4.

4 Touch .

Touching sorts the items in the list in

the order of distance.

Sorts the items in the list in the alphabetical

order.

pYou can use this sort function only when

there are 2 000 or less candidates.

5 Touch the desired POI for your destina-

tion.

pIcons are helpful for quickly telling the cate-

gory of facilities with the same name.

When the route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

=For details, refer to Checking and modifying

the route on page 32

When the route is already set, “Location confir-

mation screen”is shown.

=For details, refer to Checking the location

on the map on page 31

pTouching displays a map of the sur-

roundings of the selected POI.

pIf the selected POI is the name of a chain of

outlets and consequently the same store

name applies to different locations (the

number of outlets appears next to the

chain’s name), touch the name of the POI

to display a list of those POIs with city

name and street name, touch to set the POI

as your destination.

Searching for POIs by

specifying a category first

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [POI Search].

2 Touch the state code key of the destina-

tion and select the state or province (or ter-

ritory).

=For more details about “Selecting the state

or province where you want to search”, refer to

Calculating your destination by using Address

Search on page 28

3 Touch [Category].

Category

Previously set categories will have a red check

mark. When only a few types of the detailed

categories are selected, blue check marks will

appear.

[OK]:

Start search with the selected category.

[Back]:

Returns to the previous screen.

[Set]:

Displays the screen for registering POI short-

cuts.

=For details, refer to Registering/deleting POI

Shortcuts on page 56

Setting a Route to Your Destination

En 53

Chapter

Setting a Route to Your Destination

pIf you touch one of the POI shortcuts (e.g.

) before selecting a category on the

list, you can start searching for facilities di-

rectly by the category registered on the POI

shortcut.

pIf you want to search for facilities by using

both marked category and POI shortcuts,

select some categories in the list and then

touch the POI shortcut to start searching.

3 Touch [Select Detail].

[Select All]:

Selects all detailed categories that are in-

cluded in that category. (E.g. all categories of

restaurants including Japanese and fast food.)

[Deselect All]:

Deselects the selected categories.

4 Touch the desired detailed category.

Previously set categories will have a red check

mark.

5 Touch [Back].

Returns to the previous screen.

6 Repeat Step 2 to 5 to select a category.

You can select up to 100 items from the de-

tailed categories.

7 Touch [OK].

The POI in the selected category and subcate-

gory are searched.

Names of POIs and their distance from your

current location appear. They are listed in

order from nearest to farthest. To the left of

each item is an icon indicating the category.

Distance to the facility

8 Touch the desired POI to set your desti-

nation.

When the route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

=For details, refer to Checking and modifying

the route on page 32

When the route is already set, “Location confir-

mation screen”is shown.

=For details, refer to Calculating your destina-

tion by using Address Search on page 28

pWhen you touch , the POIs around the

specified location are shown on a map.

Searching for the facilities

around the scroll cursor

Searching range is approximately 10 miles

(16 km) square from the scroll cursor.

pThis can be used when Vicinity Search is

selected in Short-Cut Selection.

=For more details about “Changing a

shortcut”, refer to Selecting the Shortcut on

page 48

1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cur-

sor to the place where you want to search

for POI.

2 Touch .

The shortcut menu appears.

Setting a Route to Your Destination

Chapter

3 Touch .

For more details about “following operations”,

refer to Step 2 of Searching for the facilities

around the current position on page 53

pThe distance indicated in the search result

is the distance from the scroll cursor to the

facility.

pThe bottom icon is for shortcuts to your fa-

vorite categories. Touching the shortcuts

icon displays a list of the facilities in a cate-

gory.

=For details, refer to Registering/deleting

POI Shortcuts on the next page

p[Vicinity Search] in the navigation menu

searches your surroundings. On the other

hand, in the case of in the Shortcut

menu (=Refer to Shortcut menu on page

45), the area around the scroll cursor after

the map is scrolled will be searched.

Searching for Your

Destination by Specifying

the Telephone Number

If you know the telephone number of your des-

tination, you can quickly search for your desti-

nation by specifying the telephone number.

pYou can also search for the phone number

[Phone #]on[Address Book].

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Telephone Search].

The telephone number entry screen appears.

2 Input a telephone number.

When the route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

=For details, refer to Checking and modifying

the route on page 32

When the route is already set, “Location confir-

mation screen”is shown.

=For details, refer to Calculating your destina-

tion by using Address Search on page 28

pIf there is more than one place for the num-

ber input, a list of those places is displayed.

Touch the item you want in the list.

Route Calculation to Your

Home Location or to Your

Favorite Location

If your home location is registered, the route

home can be calculated by touching a single

key from the navigation menu. Also, you can

as your favorite location, and the route is cal-

culated in a similar way.

=For details, refer to Registering your home

and your favorite location on page 58

%Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Return Home] or

[Go to].

When the route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

=For details, refer to Checking and modifying

the route on page 32

When the route is already set, “Location confir-

mation screen”is shown.

=For details, refer to Calculating your destina-

tion by using Address Search on page 28

Setting a Route to Your Destination

En 55

Chapter

Setting a Route to Your Destination

Selecting Destination from

“Destination History”and

“Address Book”

Any place that has been searched before is

stored in Destination History. Places that you

have registered manually, such as your home,

are stored in Address Book. Simply select the

place you want to go to from the list and a

route to that place will be calculated.

=For more details about “Operation of the

Address Book”, refer to Viewing “Address

Book”on page 60

=For more details about “Information on Des-

tination History”, refer to Operating “Destina-

tion History”on page 64

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Address Book] or

[Destination History].

2 Touch your destination name.

When a route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

=For details, refer to Checking and modifying

the route on page 32

When a route is already set, “Location confir-

mation screen”is shown.

=For details, refer to Checking the location

on the map on page 31

pYou can also see the destination by touch-

ing on the right of the list.

Registering/deleting POI

Shortcuts

You can register up to six shortcuts as your fa-

vorite POI. You can also change or delete the

registered shortcuts.

pYou can register a POI shortcut by touching

on the Shortcut-menu. The steps for re-

gistration and deletion are almost the same

as described below.

Registering a POI shortcut

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].

2 Touch [Set].

Displays a list of already registered POI short-

cuts.

3 Touch [Add].

Displays a POI category list.

4 Touch a category.

5 Touch the POI selection method.

[Select All]:

Setting a Route to Your Destination

Chapter

Selects all detailed categories that are in-

cluded in that category. (E.g. all categories of

restaurants including Japanese and fast food.)

[Select Detail]:

Selects one of the detailed categories. Touch-

ing a category adds that category to the short-

cuts.

Deleting a POI shortcut

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Vicinity Search].

2 Touch [Set].

3 Touch [Delete].

Displays a list of already registered POI short-

cuts.

4 Touch the category to be deleted.

A red check appears on the selected shortcut.

[All], [None]:

A red check will appear or disappear on all re-

gistered categories.

5 Touch [Delete].

Deletes the selected shortcut from the list.

Setting a Route to Your Destination

En 57

Chapter

Setting a Route to Your Destination

CAUTION

For safety reasons, these functions are not avail-

able while your vehicle is in motion. To enable

these functions, you must stop in a safe place

and put on the parking brake before setting your

route (Refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22).

Registering Locations

Overview

Registering places you visit frequently saves

time and effort. Also, routes to registered loca-

tions can be calculated easily by touching the

corresponding touch panel key. This registered

location information can also be modified. The

registered location appears on the map as an

icon.

The registered locations are categorized

into the following three types:

!:Home location:

your home location is registered, the route

to your home can be set by simply touching

[Return Home]inDestination menu. Only

one location can be registered.

!:Favorite location:

(for example, your office) here. Once your

favorite location is registered, a route to

your favorite location can be set by simply

touching [Go to]inDestination menu.

Only one location can be registered.

!: (default): Address Book entry:

Once locations are registered, you can set

the route by selecting an item from Ad-

dress Book.

pThe items in Address Book are automati-

cally updated in alphabetic order. However,

“Home location”and “Favorite location”

always appear at the top (if you registered

them).

pSelects whether to display or hide all of the

registered location icons on the map.

=For details, refer to Setting the Item on

the Map Screen on page 46

Registering your home and

your favorite location

You can register one home location and one

favorite location. You can change the regis-

tered information later. You might find it useful

to register your workplace or a relative’s home

as your favorite location.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Defined Locations].

2 Touch [Go to].

When registering your home location, touch

[Home].

3 Search for a location to register.

You can select a method of location search.

=For more details about “Address Search”,

refer to Calculating your destination by using

Address Search on page 28

=For more details about “Information on

searching locations to register”, refer to Chap-

ter 6

pIf you select [Map Search], move the scroll

cursor to the place you want to set and

touch [OK].

4 Point the scroll cursor to the location

you want to register and touch [OK].

The location is registered, and the Edit regis-

tered information screen appears.

=For details, refer to Editing the entry in “Ad-

dress Book”on page 60

5 Touch [OK].

Completes the registration.

Registering and Editing Locations

Chapter

Registering a Location into

“Address Book”

Address Book can store up to 400 registered

locations. These can include your home loca-

tion, favorite places, and destinations you

have already registered.

Registering a location by scroll

mode

You can perform the following operation when

[Registration] is selected in [Short-Cut Selec-

tion].

1 Scroll to the location you want to regis-

ter.

2 Display the shortcut menu, and touch

The location is registered, and the Edit regis-

tered information screen appears.

=For details, refer to Editing the entry in “Ad-

dress Book”on the next page

3 Touch [OK].

Completes the registration.

Registering a location by

“Address Book”

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Address Book].

2 Touch [Add].

3 Select the search method, search the lo-

cation, and display the map.

4 When the map of the location you

want to register is displayed, touch [OK].

The location is registered, and the Edit regis-

tered information screen appears.

=For details, refer to Editing the entry in “Ad-

dress Book”on the next page

5 Touch [OK].

Completes the registration.

Registering and Editing Locations

En 59

Chapter

Registering and Editing Locations

Viewing “Address Book”

%Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Address Book].

1Home location:

The item displayed with the icon is the

home location. Touch to calculate the route.

=For details, refer to Registering your home

and your favorite location on page 58

2Favorite location:

The item displayed with the icon is the

favorite location. Touch to calculate the

route.

=For details, refer to Registering your home

and your favorite location on page 58

3Address Book entry:

Touch to calculate the route.

A map of that location can be displayed.

=For details, refer to Checking the loca-

tion on the map on page 31

The information related to that place can be

edited.

=For details, refer to Editing the entry in

“Address Book”on this page

Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.

This is the default sorting order.

pActive if there are items in the list and

current sort is not alphabetically.

Sorts the items in the list in order of the dis-

tance from the vehicle position.

pActive if there are items in the list and

current sort is not by distance form cur-

rent position.

Sorts the items in the list in order of the re-

cently used items.

pActive if there are items in the list and

current sort is not by last used.

9[Add]:

The screen for selecting the method for re-

gistering the location in Address Book ap-

pears.

=For details, refer to Registering a Location

into “Address Book”on the previous page

a[Delete]:

Deletes the registered locations.

=For details, refer to Deleting the entry in

“Address Book”on page 63

b[Back]:

Returns previous screen.

Editing the entry in “Address Book”

In the Address Book menu, touching on

the right-hand side of the location displays the

Edit registered information screen.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Address Book].

2 Touch on the right-hand side of the

location that you want to edit the informa-

tion for.

1Name

You can enter the desired name.

2Pronunciation

You can enter the desired pronunciation in-

dependently from the name. The registered

pronunciation is used for voice recognition.

pIf nothing is entered in the text box, you

cannot use that item as a voice com-

mand.

Registering and Editing Locations

Chapter

pDepending on which language is being

switched to, you may not be able to use

the registered pronunciation without

modification.

=For details, refer to Available Voice Com-

mands on page 159

3Phone #

The phone number of the registered loca-

tion. You can dial this number by using 8.

pYou can search by registered telephone

number.

4Icon

The symbol displayed on the map and Ad-

dress Book.

pSelects whether to display or hide all of

the registered location icons on the

map.

=For details, refer to Setting the Item

on the Map Screen on page 46

5Picture

As you approach the location, the regis-

tered image appears.

You can register the picture stored in the

navigation system. You can also import and

by using a CD-ROM.

6Sound

The selected sound is played when you ap-

proach the location.

7Modify Location

You can change the registered location by

scrolling the map.

Only when the Bluetooth unit (sold sepa-

rately) is connected to the navigation sys-

tem and a cellular phone featuring

Bluetooth technology is also connected,

you can make a phone call to the registered

phone number 3by touching .

=For details, refer to Dialing the entry in

the Address Book on page 82

When you approach a registered location

while traveling

When a location with a registered sound effect

and image comes within an approx. 0.19 mile

(300 m) radius from the vehicle position, the

sound effect plays and the image appears.

Changing a name

No sounds can be output during .

1 Touch [Name], then touch [Yes].

The message confirming whether or not to

is displayed.

When not registering a name as a voice com-

mand, select [No].

2 Enter a new name, then touch [OK].

The current name appears in the text box. De-

lete the current name, and enter a new name

between 1 and 23 characters long.

pTouch [Small] to enter lowercase letters.

Touch [Caps.] to enter uppercase letters.

Touch to toggle the selection.

3 If the pronunciation is suitable, touch

[Yes].

The details you set are registered, and the Ad-

dress Book menu appears.

Alternative options:

[No]:

Completes the registration without editing the

pronunciation.

[Repeat]:

Registering and Editing Locations

En 61

Chapter

Registering and Editing Locations

You can reconfirm the pronunciation of the

name you entered.

pIf the pronunciation is not the desired one,

edit the characters so that the pronuncia-

tion matches your desired pronunciation.

pWhen you confirm the pronunciation, is

shown on the left side of the location name

displayed in “Address Book menu”. This

icon indicates that this name can be used

as a voice command during voice opera-

tion.

pYou cannot change the name of your home.

Changing a pronunciation

No sounds can be output during .

1 Touch [Pronunciation].

2 Enter a new pronunciation, then touch

[OK].

The current pronunciation appears in the text

box (if already set). Delete the current pronun-

ciation, and enter a new pronunciation be-

tween 1 and 23 characters long.

3 If the pronunciation is suitable, touch

[Yes].

The details you set are registered, and the Ad-

dress Book menu appears.

Alternative options:

[No]:

Cancels the editing.

[Repeat]:

You can reconfirm the pronunciation of the

name you entered.

pIf the pronunciation is not the desired one,

edit the characters so that the pronuncia-

tion matches your desired pronunciation.

pWhen you confirm the pronunciation, is

shown on the left side of the location name

displayed in the Address Book menu. This

mark indicates that this name can be used

as a voice command during voice opera-

tion.

pYou cannot change the pronunciation of

your home.

pIf nothing is entered in the text box, you

cannot use that item as the voice com-

mands.

Entering or changing a phone number

1 Touch [Phone #].

2 Input a phone number, then touch

[OK].

The Address Information menu appears.

pTo change a registered phone number, de-

lete the existing number and then enter a

new one.

Selecting an icon to appear on the map

pSelects whether to display or hide all of the

registered location icons on the map.

=For details, refer to Setting the Item on the

Map Screen on page 46

1 Touch [Icon].

2 Touch the icon that you want to appear

on the map.

The Address Information menu appears.

pYou cannot change the icon of your home

and your favorite location.

pIf you set (dot), the registered name of

that entry can be displayed on the map. The

registered name does not appear if [Ad-

dress Book Icon Display] is set to [Off].

Registering and Editing Locations

Chapter

Customizing the picture

Be sure to read “Limitations for importing pic-

tures”before creating a CD-R (-RW).

=For details, refer to Limitations for importing

pictures on page 94

You can customize a picture for the Address

Book entry. Some pictures are already stored

in the hard disk drive, and you can also import

JPEG format pictures, such as a picture from

your digital camera, by using a CD-R (-RW).

You can use pictures by burning them onto a

CD-R (-RW) with your PC and inserting it into

the navigation system.

Here, a method for changing the picture is de-

scribed with an example of loading a picture

stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the navigation

system.

1 Check that no disc is inserted, and in-

sert your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loading

slot.

2 Touch [Picture], and then touch [Import

from Disc].

The list of the pictures stored in the CD-R (-

RW) is displayed.

pTouching an option other than [Import

from Disc] allows you to select an image

stored on the hard disk drive.

3 Touch a picture you want to set.

pTo cancel displaying the picture, select

[No Picture].

4 Touch [Yes].

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

[No]:

Select when you want to change to another

picture.

Return to Step 3.

Selecting sound

No sounds can be output during .

1 Touch [Sound].

2 Select the desired sound.

pTo turn off the sound, select [No Sound].

3 Touch [Sound] to hear the sound.

4 Touch [Set].

Changing the position of locations

1 Touch [Modify Location].

The map of the selected area and its surround-

ings appears.

2 Touch the screen to change its position,

then touch [OK].

Deleting the entry in “Address

Book”

Items registered in Address Book can be de-

leted. All entries of the data in Address Book

can be deleted at once.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Address Book].

2 Touch [Delete].

“Delete from Address Book”screen appears.

3 Select the location you want to delete.

A check mark appears by the selected loca-

tion.

Registering and Editing Locations

En 63

Chapter

Registering and Editing Locations

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

[All]:

Selects all entries.

[None]:

Displayed when all locations are selected.

Cancels all selected locations.

4 Touch [Delete].

5 Select [Yes].

The data you selected is deleted.

Alternative option:

[No]:

Cancels the deletion and returns to Step 4.

pBecause deleted data cannot be restored,

take extra care not to delete by mistake.

Operating “Destination History”

The points to which a route has been calcu-

lated in the past are automatically saved in

Destination History.

pIf no location is stored in Destination His-

tory, you cannot select [Destination His-

tory]. (If you perform a route calculation,

you can select [Destination History].)

%Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Destination History].

1Destination history:

Touch to calculate the route.

2[Delete]:

Deletes the selected history.

3[Back]:

Returns to the previous screen.

Deleting the entry in

“Destination History”

Items in Destination History can be deleted.

All entries in Destination History can be de-

leted at once.

1 Touch [Destination] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Destination History].

2 Touch [Delete].

“Delete from History”screen appears.

3 Select the location you want to delete.

A check mark appears by the selected loca-

tion.

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

[All]:

Selects all entries.

[None]:

Displayed when all locations are selected.

Cancels all selected locations.

4 Touch [Delete].

5 Select [Yes].

The data you selected is deleted.

Alternative option:

[No]:

Cancels the deletion and returns to Step 4.

pBecause deleted data cannot be restored,

take extra care not to delete by mistake.

Registering and Editing Locations

Chapter

Using XM NavTraffic

Information

If you have a GEX-P10XMT XM Digital Satellite

Data & Audio Receiver (sold separately) at-

tached to the navigation system and have an

active subscription to XM NavTraffic service,

you can view current traffic conditions and in-

formation on your navigation display. When

the unit receives updated traffic information,

the navigation system will overlay the traffic in-

formation on your map and also display de-

tailed text information when available. When

you are traveling along a route and there is

traffic information on your current route, the

system will detect it and ask you if you would

like to be rerouted, or suggest another route

automatically.

pThe system acquires the traffic information

up to 100 miles in radius from the vehicle

position. (If there is a lot of traffic informa-

tion around your vehicle, the radius will be

shorter than 100 miles.)

pThe navigation system provides the follow-

ing functions by using the information

from XM NavTraffic:

—Displaying a list of traffic information

—Displaying traffic information on a map

—Suggesting a route to avoid traffic con-

gestion by using traffic information

pThe term “traffic congestion”in this section

indicates the following types of traffic infor-

mation: stop and go, stopped traffic,

closed/blocked roads. This information is

always taken into consideration when

checking your route, and the information

related with these events cannot be turned

off. If you select other traffic information in

[Traffic Settings], the information can be

displayed in a list or on a map.

=For details, refer to Selecting traffic informa-

tion to display on page 69

Viewing traffic list

Traffic Information is displayed on screen in a

list. This allows you to check how many traffic

incidents have occurred, their location and

their distance from your current position.

Checking all traffic information

Traffic information except traffic flow informa-

tion is displayed onscreen in a list.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Traffic Events].

The list with received traffic information is

shown.

2 Touch or to view the incident list.

Places (street names) where incidents have

occurred are displayed in the list.

31245

1Street or place

2Direction

3Incident

4Distance to the location

5The incident numbers currently dis-

played and the total number of inci-

dents

pThe incidents that have already been

read will be displayed in white. Unread

incidents will be in yellow.

6Sort key

You can sort the traffic information in alpha-

betical order.

You can sort the traffic information by dis-

tance from your current position.

For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-

fic Events], the list will be sorted according

to the linear distance from the vehicle posi-

tion to the traffic information.

Using Traffic Information

En 65

Chapter

Using Traffic Information

For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-

fic On Route], the list will be sorted accord-

ing to the distance from the vehicle position

to the traffic information.

You can sort the traffic information accord-

ing to the incident.

The list will be sorted in the order of closed/

blocked roads, traffic congestion, acci-

dents, road works and others.

When new traffic information is received,

current information is changed or old infor-

mation has been removed, the list is up-

dated to reflect the new situation.

Touching allows you to check the loca-

tion on a map. (Traffic information without

positional information cannot be checked

on a map.)

3 Select an incident you want to view in

detail.

The details of the selected incident are dis-

played.

pTouching an incident you want to see allows

you to view the detailed information of the

incident. If the information cannot be dis-

played on one screen, touch or to view

the remaining information.

4 Touch [Back] to return to the list with

traffic information.

A list with traffic information appears again.

Checking traffic information on the

route

All traffic information on the current route (in-

cluding traffic flow information) is displayed

onscreen in a list.

%Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Traffic On Route].

The currently set traffic information on the

route appears on the screen.

pThe method for checking the content dis-

played on the screen is the same for

“Checking all traffic information”.

Checking traffic flow information on

the list

The traffic flow information can also be dis-

played as an onscreen list.

%Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Traffic Flow].

The list with the traffic flow information is

shown.

(mph):

You can sort the traffic information by the aver-

age speed.

pThe other methods for checking the traffic

flow information displayed on screen is the

same for “Checking all traffic information”.

Confirming traffic information

on the map

pA line displayed only when the map scale is

2.5 miles (5 km) or lower.

pIcon appears only when the scale on the

map is 10 miles (20 km) or lower. If the

scale is changed, the icons are resized ac-

cording to the selected scale.

Traffic event icon and line

The traffic event information displayed on the

map is as follows.

Traffic event icon

with yellow line:

Stop and go traffic

with red line:

Stopped traffic

Using Traffic Information

Chapter

with black line:

Closed/blocked roads

etc.:

For the meaning of the icon, see [Traffic Set-

tings] in the Information menu.

=For details, refer to Selecting traffic informa-

tion to display on page 69

If you want to check the traffic information de-

tails on the map, move the scroll cursor onto

an icon such as and touch . This allows

you to view place names and other detail infor-

mation.

Traffic flow information icon and line

Red, yellow, or green blinking lines may ap-

pear on either side of a road. In addition to

these blinking lines, a round icon with a num-

ber may appear on the map. The number in

the icon indicates the actual average speed of

that specific area. These colors indicate the

average speed at which traffic is flowing along

these streets. Here is a guide to the colors and

the average speed they indicate:

Traffic flow icon

Red: average speed in this area is between

5 mph to 15 mph (8 km/h to 24 km/h)

Yellow: average speed in this area is between

20 mph to 40 mph (32 km/h to 64 km/h)

Green: average speed in this area is 45 mph

(72 km/h) or faster (An icon without a number

indicates the average speed of the road is

more than 45 mph (72 km/h))

pThe traffic flow line can be used only when

[Traffic Settings] is selected.

=For details, refer to Selecting traffic informa-

tion to display on page 69

If you want to check the traffic information de-

tails at the map, move the scroll cursor onto

an icon such as and touch X. This allows

you to view place names and other detail infor-

mation.

Setting an alternative route to

avoid traffic congestion

The navigation system checks at certain time

intervals whether or not there is the traffic in-

formation on your route. If the navigation sys-

tem detects any traffic congestion on your

current route, the system tries to find a better

route in the background.

pFollowing types of traffic incidents on the

route will be checked: stop and go, stopped

traffic, and closed/blocked roads.

pTraffic flow information is taken into ac-

count only when [Traffic Flow]in[Traffic

Settings] is checked.

Checking for traffic congestion

automatically

If there is information about traffic congestion

on your current route and if an alternative

route can be found, the navigation system will

recommend a new alternative route automati-

cally. In such a case, the following screen will

appear.

pThere is no action if the system cannot find

any traffic congestion information on your

route or the system cannot find an alterna-

tive.

Difference in distance and travel time be-

tween the existing route and new route.

Distance from the current position of your ve-

hicle to the point of entry into the new route.

Using Traffic Information

En 67

Chapter

Using Traffic Information

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

New:

The recommended route is displayed on the

screen.

Current:

The current route is displayed on the screen.

OK:

The displayed route is set.

pWhen no selection is made, the screen re-

turns to previous screen.

Checking traffic information manually

Touching notification icon on the map screen

allows you to check traffic information on your

route while icon is displayed. Only if there is

any traffic information on your route, notifica-

tion icon is displayed on the navigation map

screen.

pThe notification icon will not be available

when your vehicle deviate from the route.

pTraffic flow information is taken into ac-

count only when [Traffic Flow]in[Traffic

Settings] is checked.

1 Set [Show Traffic Incident] to [View].

=For details, refer to Setting the Item on the

Map Screen on page 46

2 Press MAP button to display the current

location.

The icon appears when the system acquires

traffic information on the current route.

3 Touch the icon while the icon is dis-

played.

Notification icon

The displayed icon indicates the type of the

traffic information.

4 Touch [Detour] to search for an alterna-

tive route.

p[Detour] will be enable only when the sys-

tem can find “traffic congestion”.

After touching [Detour], the route is recalcu-

lated taking all traffic congestion on your cur-

rent route into account.

p“Notification icon”shows the nearest traffic

information on the route. However, if you

touch [Detour], the route is recalculated by

taking into account not only this informa-

tion, but also all traffic congestion informa-

tion on the route.

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

[List]:

Only three proximate traffic events on your

route are listed in this traffic list.

[Back]:

The message disappears, and the map display

reappears.

For the subsequent operations, see “Checking

for traffic congestion automatically”.

=For details, refer to Checking for traffic con-

gestion automatically on the previous page

Using Traffic Information

Chapter

Selecting traffic information to

display

There are different types of traffic information

that can be received via the XM NavTraffic ser-

vice, and you can select which types will be in-

corporated and displayed on your navigation

system.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Traffic Settings].

2 Touch [Displayed traffic information].

The names of the displayed traffic information

items and a list of icons appears on the

screen.

3 Touch the traffic information item to

display.

A red check appears next to the selected traf-

fic information.

p[Traffic Flow] includes not only whether or

not to display the icon on the map, but also

whether or not to take the flow information

into account when rerouting.

pTouching [All (None)] selects or deselects

all traffic information.

4 Touch [OK].

The selected traffic information icon is added

to the screen.

pThe following types of traffic congestion

cannot be deselected and are always dis-

played and taken into consideration: stop

and go, stopped traffic, and closed/blocked

roads.

5 Touch [OK].

Using Traffic Information

En 69

Chapter

Using Traffic Information

Using the XM Tuner to View

Stock, Sports, and Other

Information

When an XM tuner (GEX-P10XMT) is con-

nected, you can receive stock prices, sports,

and other information, and display it onscreen.

You may also register favorite information on

the navigation system.

Displaying stock prices

Can display the prices of up to 12 stocks.

%Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Stock Info].

The screen displays a list of stock prices.

pAlthough the stock price information dis-

played onscreen is updated every 30 sec-

onds (approx.), these prices are not real-

time values.

Registering stocks to be displayed

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Stock Info].

2 Touch [Add].

3 Input the Ticker text for the stocks you

want to display, then touch [OK].

[0-9], [Punc.], [Oper], [Sym.]:

You can switch the upper line to input the

number and marks.

Touch to toggle the selection.

pThe method for inputting the text is almost

same as for inputting street names.

=For more details about “Text input meth-

od”, refer to Operation of state selection

screen on page 29

pIf the input ticker symbol does not match in

full the actual ticker symbol for the stock,

you may not be able to find it.

Deleting stocks to be displayed onscreen

Can display the prices of up to 12 stocks. If 12

stocks are already registered, delete as many

entries as necessary to add new stocks.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Stock Info].

2 Touch [Delete].

3 Touch the ticker of the stock you want

to delete.

A red check appears next to the ticker you

touched.

pTo delete all registered stocks, touch [All].

Red checks will appear next to all tickers.

4 Touch [Delete].

A message will appear asking you to confirm

the deletion.

5 Touch [Yes].

Storing browsable information

XM special contents can be stored as [My Fa-

vorites] so that it can be accessed without

searching every time an update is needed.

pThe displayed items depend on the infor-

mation that is sent from each station.

p[My Favorites] can store up to 50 items.

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

Chapter

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Set My Favorites].

The screen will display a list of categories. The

information appearing onscreen is automati-

cally updated at regular intervals.

2 Touch a category you want to browse

from the list.

3 Touch an item you wish to store.

If an item is divided into more detail cate-

gories, select the one from the list to narrow

down the category. After narrowing down, the

message confirming whether or not to register

the item.

4 Touch [OK].

If the storing step is successful, the confirma-

tion screen will appear.

Touch [OK] to complete the storing and return

to the previous screen.

Displaying favorite browsable

Information

You can check and delete the browsable infor-

mation you registered.

1 Store the desired item (topic).

=For details, refer to Storing browsable infor-

mation on the previous page

2 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [My Favorites].

A list of registered items (topics) appears on

the screen.

3 Touch an item to display the contents.

Deleting favorite browsable information

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [My Favorites].

2 Touch [Delete].

3 Touch the items you want to delete.

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

En 71

Chapter

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

A red check appears next to the items you

touched.

pTo delete all favorite contents, touch [All].

Red checks will appear next to all items.

4 Touch [Delete].

5 A message will appear asking you to

confirm the deletion. Touch [Yes].

Checking the Reception

Status of the XM Tuner

The current XM tuner’s (GEX-P10XMT) recep-

tion status and signal strength appear on

screen. (The information that is transmitted

via XM DATA cable is displayed in this screen.)

%Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [XM Status].

1Status

Depending on the XM tuner’s (GEX-

P10XMT) reception status, any one of the

following may appear.

No problem.

Updating

Updating encryption code.

Check antenna

Improper antenna connection.

Not Connected

2Signal Strength

Depending on the signal strength, any one

of the following may appear.

Very Strong

Strong

Marginal

Weak

No signal

3Radio ID

The radio ID appears.

pIf you have subscribed to either XM

audio only or XM NavTraffic stand alone,

you will see [Updating]in[Status]. This

is because the GEX-P10XMT is con-

stantly checking to see if you have

decided to add the other service while

your navigation system is turned on. If

you subscribe to both services, the ap-

propriate status will be shown in

[Status].

Emergency Info

The Emergency Info screen provides impor-

tant emergency information pertaining to your

vehicle, insurance, and current location. Such

emergency information could be useful in the

event of an accident or vehicle breakdown.

The accuracy of the personal information is

dependent on the accuracy of the information

entered into the navigation system by the user.

WARNING

The Emergency Info screen is only intended to

provide information to a driver that may be useful

during an emergency situation, and does not re-

place the need to call for emergency assistance,

when necessary.

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

Chapter

Checking the information

registered as Emergency Info

%Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Emergency Info].

The information registered as Emergency

Info appears on the screen.

1You are currently at:

Your current position is indicated by the

street name, latitude, and longitude.

2Personal Information:

Your VIN number, insurance policy number,

and the telephone number of your insur-

ance company can be displayed once en-

tered by the user.

3Emergency TOW service phone:

The phone number of the subscribing

Emergency TOW service can be displayed

once entered by the user. The default or fac-

tory setting is the phone number of the

Emergency Roadside Assistance service

provided by Signature’s Nationwide Auto

Club, Inc.

1 year of free Emergency Roadside As-

sistance service

1 year of free Emergency Roadside Assis-

tance service is available to all registered

owners and provided by Signature’s Nation-

wide Auto Club, Inc. The first year of Emer-

gency Roadside Assistance service is paid

for by Pioneer only if your navigation system

is registered with Pioneer and you sign up

on-line with Signature’s Nationwide Auto

Club, Inc. at the time you register your navi-

gation system with Pioneer. If you have not

signed up for this service with Signature’s

Nationwide Auto Club, Inc., or if your free

one-year period has expired, you are subject

to charges by Signature’s Nationwide Auto

Club, Inc. You are also subject to charges

by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club, Inc.

for roadside services not included in the

Emergency Roadside Assistance service.

The terms and conditions regarding the

Emergency Roadside Assistance service

provided by Signature’s Nationwide Auto

Club, Inc. are determined solely and exclu-

sively by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club,

Inc. Please contact Signature’s Nationwide

Auto Club, Inc. for more information. The

telephone number that appears here by de-

fault is the toll free number for this service.

For additional details on registering for this

service, please check your product registra-

tion card included with this product. If you

are not interested in the free Roadside As-

sistance service, this number can be edited

and replaced by your own roadside assis-

tance telephone number.

pThe police number is shown as 911 and

cannot be changed.

4Locate Car Service

=For details, refer to Searching for car ser-

vice in an emergency on the next page

5Dial each number

=For details, refer to Dialing the corre-

sponding number in emergency on the next

page

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

En 73

Chapter

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

Dialing the corresponding number in

emergency

CAUTION

This function can be valid only when all following

conditions are satisfied:

!The Bluetooth unit (sold separately) is con-

nected with navigation system.

!The communication for Hands-free phoning is

activate between the cellular phone featuring

Bluetooth technology and the navigation sys-

tem.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Emergency Info].

2 Touch .

A list of telephone numbers appears onsc-

reen.

3 Touch the phone number you want to

dial.

The signal is transmitted to the selected

phone number.

Touching terminates the call.

pTouch [Back] to return to the previous

screen.

Searching for car service in an

emergency

In an emergency, you can search the Emer-

gency Info for Auto Services in the vicinity of

your current position and set the current

route.

WARNING

The Emergency Info screen is only intended to

provide information to a driver that may be useful

during an emergency situation and if they are in

a safe location. If not, or in all major accidents,

call 911.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Emergency Info].

2 Touch [Locate Car Service].

A list of auto services appears onscreen.

3 Touch the Category of the auto service

you want to use.

pThe Auto Service categories that can be se-

lected in the Emergency Info are:

[Automotive] and [Car Dealer].

4 Touch the selection method.

[Select All]:

Selects all detailed categories included in that

category. A red check appears next to the se-

lected category.

[Deselect All]:

Cancels the selected detailed categories.

[Select Detail]:

Selects a detailed category from the list.

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

Chapter

pIf you want to search with more detailed ca-

tegories, touch [Select Detail]. When the

subcategory list appears, touch the item

and touch [Back]. When only a few types of

the detailed categories are selected, blue

check marks will appear.

5 Repeat Step 3 and 4, select a category,

and touch [OK].

The POI in the selected category and detailed

category is searched.

6 Touch the name of the facility to set the

route you want.

When the route is not set, route calculation

starts immediately.

=For details, refer to Checking and modifying

the route on page 32

When the route is already set, “Location confir-

mation screen”is shown.

=For details, refer to Checking the location

on the map on page 31

Registering user information

Enter the information written on the vehicle in-

spection certificate or insurance certificate.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Emergency Info].

2 Touch [Setup].

3 Touch the desired item to register your

information.

pIf information is already registered, that in-

formation will appear.

4 Input the number you wish to register,

then touch [OK].

Completes the registration.

[Edit VIN]

(You can enter between 1 and 17 digits.)

[Edit Policy Number]

[Edit Insurance Phone]

number.

[Edit TOW Service Phone]

pTouch [Default] to restore the default TOW

service phone number.

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

En 75

Chapter

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

Setting the Vehicle Dynamics

Display

You can change the contents of the meters on

the left and right of the Vehicle Dynamics Dis-

play.

Until the sensor’s initial learning is complete,

only the voltage and clock are available.

pThe speed displayed is a guideline and may

not correspond to the actual speed.

1 Switch to the Vehicle Dynamics Display.

=For more details about “Changing the map

display mode”, refer to Switching the view

mode on page 38

2 Touch the left or right meter.

Touch panel keys are displayed.

3 Touch the items you want to display.

You can select the following items:

[Voltage]:

Displays the power supply and voltage sup-

plied from the battery to this system.

[Acceleration]:

Acceleration in a forward direction is dis-

played. The +sign indicates acceleration while

the -sign indicates deceleration.

[Side Acceleration]:

Acceleration in a side direction such as when

turning, is displayed. The +sign indicates a

right turn, while the -sign indicates a left turn.

[Angular Velocity]:

Displays the vehicle’s turning angle over one

second (how far it has turned in a second).

[Slope]:

Displays the vehicle’s vertical movement. +

side represents the rising angle, and -side the

falling angle.

[Direction]:

Displays the direction your vehicle is traveling

in.

[Clock]:

Current time is displayed.

[Adjust Look]:

Touch [Adjust Look] to display a screen for se-

lecting the panel pattern. Touch one of the pat-

terns from among those displayed on screen

to change the panel to the selected pattern.

pIf you touch [Peak Hold Reset], the maxi-

mum and minimum (green line) values indi-

cated in [Acceleration] and [Side

Acceleration] are reset.

pYou cannot change the speedometer at the

center.

pSelecting Demo Mode in the Settings

menu enables you to perform a demonstra-

tion with random values.

Using XM Tuner and Other Information

Chapter

Hands-free Phoning Overview

CAUTION

For your safety, avoid talking on the phone as

much as possible while driving.

If your cellular phone features Bluetooth®

technology, this navigation system can be con-

nected to your cellular phone wirelessly. Using

this hands-free function, you can operate the

navigation system to make or receive phone

calls. You can also transfer the phone book

data stored in your cellular phone to the navi-

gation system. This section describes how to

set up a Bluetooth connection and how to op-

erate a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth

technology on the navigation system.

The following description assumes that the de-

vice name of the cellular phone to be con-

nected using Bluetooth wireless technology is

set to [My mobile phone].

Preparing communication devices

To use the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth

wireless technology on the navigation system,

the Bluetooth unit (ND-BT1) (sold separately)

is required.

Precautions for using a cellular phone

featuring Bluetooth technology

By connecting the Bluetooth unit (sold sepa-

rately), you can use the functions described in

this manual, including hands-free phoning or

phone book transfer. To use these functions,

the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless

technology that you want to connect must

have a supported profile that is the same as

the profile for the Bluetooth unit. For the sup-

ported profile, refer to the owner’s manual of

the Bluetooth unit.

pPlease read “Notes for hands-free phoning”

for your reference.

=For details, refer to Notes for hands-free

phoning on page 86

pWhen the power of the navigation system

turns off, the Bluetooth connection is also

disconnected. When the system restarts,

the system automatically attempts to re-

connect the Previously connected cellular

phone. Even when the connection is cut for

some reason, the system automatically re-

connects the specified cellular phone (ex-

cept when the connection is cut by the

cellular phone operation).

You can open [Phone Menu] directly by press-

ing and holding MENU button.

pYou can check the signal strength for con-

nection between your cellular phone and

Bluetooth unit (sold separately) with [Con-

nection Status]in[Hardware] Menu.

=For more details about “[Connection

Status]”, refer to Checking the connections

of leads and installation positions on page

pYou can set the voice volume and ring vo-

lume with [Volume]in[Settings] Menu.

=For more details about “Volume”, refer

to Setting the Volume for Guidance and

Phone on page 88

=For more details about “[Volume]”, refer

to Setting the Volume for Guidance and

Phone on page 88

pYou can set to mute peripheral sounds dur-

ing hands-free phoning.

=For more details about “[Mute Set]”,

refer to Switching the muting/attenuation

timing on page 150

While your cellular phone featuring Bluetooth

wireless technology is connected, is dis-

played on the map.

Using Hands-free Phoning

En 77

Chapter

Using Hands-free Phoning

pIf you operate using “CD-SR1”Steering Re-

mote Control (sold separately), the follow-

ing buttons can be used for operation:

VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button:

Same function as on the screen.

(Except for [Received Calls] and [Emergency

Info].)

VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button:

Same function as or on the screen.

PHONE MENU button:

Open [Phone Menu] directly.

Setting up for hands-free phoning

Before you can use the hands-free phoning

function, you will need to set up the navigation

system for using that function. This entails re-

gistering your cellular phone with the naviga-

tion system and establishing a Bluetooth

wireless connection between the navigation

system and your cellular phone.

Registering your cellular phone

You need to register your cellular phone featur-

ing Bluetooth wireless technology when you

connect it for the first time. A total of five

phones can be registered. Two registration

methods are available:

!Registration from the navigation system

!Registration from the cellular phone

pOnce you have registered a phone, you can

select that cellular phone from the list to

connect it without registration.

pIf you try to register more than five cellular

phones, the system will ask you to select

one of the registered cellular phones to

overwrite.

=For details, refer to Connecting a regis-

tered cellular phone on the next page

pThe default device name displayed on the

cellular phone is [PIONEER HDD NAVI].

The default password is [1111].

Operating from the navigation system

1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology on your cellular phone.

For some cellular phones, no specific action is

necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology. For details, refer to the instruction

manual of your cellular phone.

2 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

3 Touch [Phone Settings].

The phone settings screen appears.

4 Touch [Registration].

5 Touch [Navi].

The system searches for cellular phones with

Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the

connection and displays them in the list.

6 Wait until your cellular phone appears

in the list.

pIf you cannot find the cellular phone you

want to connect, check that the cellular

phone is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless

technology connection.

7 Select the cellular phone you want to

8 Enter the password of the navigation

system to register it using your cellular

phone.

After the registration is completed, the follow-

ing screen appears.

Using Hands-free Phoning

Chapter

pIf registration fails, repeat the procedure

from the beginning. If a connection still

cannot be established, try connecting using

your cellular phone.

Operating from your cellular phone

1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology on your cellular phone.

For some cellular phones, no specific action is

necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology. For details, refer to the instruction

manual of your cellular phone.

2 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

3 Touch [Phone Settings].

The phone settings screen appears.

4 Touch [Registration].

5 Touch [Mobile].

The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth

wireless technology connection.

6 Operate your cellular phone to register

the navigation system.

If your cellular phone asks you to enter a pass-

word, enter the password of the navigation

system.

After the registration is completed, the follow-

ing screen appears.

pIf registration fails repeat the procedure

from the beginning.

Connecting a registered cellular phone

The navigation system automatically connects

the cellular phone selected as a target of con-

nection. However, connect the cellular phone

manually in the following cases:

!Two or more cellular phones are registered,

and you want to manually select the cellu-

lar phone to be used.

!You want to reconnect a disconnected cel-

lular phone.

!Connection cannot be established automa-

tically for some reason.

pUnregistered cellular phones cannot be

connected.

1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology on your cellular phone.

For some cellular phones, no specific action is

necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology. For details, refer to the instruction

manual of your cellular phone.

2 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

3 Touch [Phone Settings].

The phone settings screen appears.

Phone name currently connected or selected

as a target of connection

Using Hands-free Phoning

En 79

Chapter

Using Hands-free Phoning

4 Touch [Connection].

5 Touch the name of the cellular phone

that you want to connect.

When a connection is successfully estab-

lished, a connection complete message ap-

pears, and the system returns to the phone

menu screen.

pTo cancel the connection to your cellular

phone, touch [Cancel].

pIf connection fails, check whether your cel-

lular phone is waiting for a connection.

Then repeat the procedure from step 4.

Editing the device name

You can change the device name to be dis-

played on your cellular phone. (Default is

[PIONEER HDD NAVI].)

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Phone Settings].

The phone settings screen appears.

3 Touch [Device Name].

4 Touch any key to enter the name you

want to set and then touch [OK].

=For details, refer to Calculating your destina-

tion by using Address Search on page 28

pUp to 20 characters can be entered for a de-

vice name.

Editing the password

You can change the password to be used for

authentication on your cellular phone. (De-

fault is [1111].)

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Phone Settings].

The phone settings screen appears.

3 Touch [Password].

4 Touch any key to enter the password

you want to set and then touch [OK].

=For details, refer to Calculating your destina-

tion by using Address Search on page 28

pFour to eight characters can be entered for

a password.

Receiving a phone call

You can use the navigation system to receive a

call hands-free.

The map screen shows the icon while your cel-

lular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless tech-

nology is connected. You can receive a hands-

free call only when the cellular phone is con-

nected.

Connecting icon

Answering an incoming call

The system informs you that it is receiving a

call by displaying a message and producing a

ring sound once.

1 When there is an incoming call, touch

When there is an incoming call, you can reject

the call by touching .

pDuring a call, the is displayed at the

right-hand side of the screen.

Using Hands-free Phoning

Chapter

2 To end the call, touch at the top

right of the screen.

The call ends.

pIf the received voice is too quiet to hear, you

can adjust the volume of the received voice.

=For more details about “Volume”, refer to

Setting the Volume for Guidance and Phone

on page 88

pDepending on the caller ID service, the

phone number of the received call may not

be displayed. [Unknown] appears instead.

pYou may hear a noise when you hang up

the phone.

Making a phone call

You can make a phone call in many different

ways.

Direct dialing

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Dial].

3 Input the phone number, and then

touch to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ing, touch .

4 To end the call, touch at the top

right of the screen.

Dialing from the dialed number

history or the received call history

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Dialed Numbers] or [Received

Calls].

The list of either one appears.

3 Touch a name or telephone number

from the list to make a call.

Date and time of the call dialed or received

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ing, touch .

When you make a call to the phone number in

[Received Calls] without “+”, you can add “+”

in front of that number by touching [+]. To de-

lete “+”, touch [+] again in that time.

Touch to make a call.

4 To end the call, touch at the top

right of the screen.

pUp to 30 entries for each of the dialed num-

ber and received call histories are recorded

automatically. When the number of entries

exceeds 30, the entries will be deleted from

the oldest one.

pYou can clear the dialed number or received

call history.

=For details, refer to Editing the received

call or dialed number history on page 86

Using Hands-free Phoning

En 81

Chapter

Using Hands-free Phoning

Calling a number in the phone book

After finding the list in the Phone Book you

want to call, you can select the number and

make the call.

pBefore using this function, you need to

transfer the phone book stored in your cel-

lular phone to the navigation system.

=For details, refer to Transferring the phone

book on the next page

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Phone Book].

The phone book screen appears.

3 Touch a name from the list to make a

call.

If you touch an alphabet tab, you can jump to

the first page of the contacts whose names

start with that letter.

Touch the entry in the list to make a call. To

cancel the call after the system starts dialing,

touch .

4 To end the call, touch at the top

right of the screen.

Calling a number in “Dial Favorites”

After finding the list in “Dial Favorites”you

want to call, you can select the number and

make the call.

pBefore using this function, you need to set

the phone number from the phone book to

“Dial Favorites”.

=For details, refer to Registering a phone

number in “Dial Favorites”on page 84

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Dial Favorites].

The “Dial Favorites”screen appears.

3 Touch one of [Favorite 1] to [Favorite 5]

to make a call.

Touch the entry to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ing, touch .

4 To end the call, touch at the top

right of the screen.

Dialing the entry in the Address Book

You can make a call to the entry registered in

the address book.

pYou cannot make a call to locations if the

phone number is not registered.

1 Display “Address Book”.

=For more details about “Operation of the

Address Book”, refer to Viewing “Address

Book”on page 60

2 Touch of the entry you want to call.

The detail screen appears.

3 Touch to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ing, touch .

4 To end the call, touch at the top

right of the screen.

Dialing a facility’s phone number

You can make a call to facilities with phone

number data.

Using Hands-free Phoning

Chapter

1 Perform [POI Search] or [Vicinity

Search] and display the detail information.

=For more details about “Operation of [POI

Search]”, refer to Searching for Points of Inter-

est (POI) Statewide on page 51

=For more details about “Operation of [Vici-

nity Search]”, refer to Finding a POI in the Vici-

nity on page 53

2 Touch of the entry you want to call.

The detail screen appears.

3 Touch to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ing, touch .

4 To end the call, touch at the top

right of the screen.

Dialing from the map

You can make a call by selecting the icon of a

registered location or a POI icon from the map

screen.

pYou cannot make a call to locations or POIs

that have no phone number data.

1 Scroll the map, and place the cursor on

an icon on the map.

2 Touch .

The detail screen appears.

3 Touch to make a call.

To cancel the call after the system starts dial-

ing, touch .

4 To end the call, touch at the top

right of the screen.

Transferring the phone book

You can transfer the data from the phone book

stored in your cellular phone to the phone

book stored in the navigation system.

By transferring the phone book to the naviga-

tion system, you can browse the data in the

transferred phone book on the screen of the

navigation system. You can also select the en-

tries in the phone book to make a call from the

navigation system or edit the data on the navi-

gation system.

pDepending on the cellular phone, “Phone

Book”may be called a name such as “Con-

tacts”,“Business card”or something else.

pThe Phone Book can hold a total of 400 en-

tries.

pThe Hands-free phoning connection is dis-

connected to establish the connection for

phone book transfer. When the phone book

is transferred, hands-free phoning is recon-

nected automatically.

pThe phone book of this navigation system

cannot assign the multiple telephone num-

bers for one person’s name.

1 Connect your cellular phone featuring

Bluetooth wireless technology.

=For details, refer to Registering your cellular

phone on page 78

2 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

3 Touch [Read Bus. Card].

If there is a phone book already transferred,

the following screen appears.

Using Hands-free Phoning

En 83

Chapter

Using Hands-free Phoning

[Yes]:

Deletes all phone numbers stored in the

phone book, and then transfers the data.

[No]:

Keeps the current entries and then adds new

data to the phone book. (Duplicate data can-

not be consolidated.)

pIf you want to keep the existing phone book,

select [No].

4 Check that the following screen is dis-

played, and operate your cellular phone to

transfer the phone book entries.

The phone book entries in your cellular phone

are transferred to the navigation system. To

cancel the transfer, touch [Cancel].

pOnly the names and telephone numbers

can be transferred.

pThe transferred data can be edited on the

navigation system.

=For details, refer to Editing the entry in

“Phone Book”on this page

Registering a phone number in

“Dial Favorites”

You can register up to five entries into “Dial Fa-

vorites”from the phone book. Registering the

phone numbers that you frequently use in

“Dial Favorites”will ease the dialing operation.

The entries registered in “Dial Favorites”can

be operated from the shortcut menu. You can

also operate them with Voice Recognition to

make a call.

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Dial Favorites].

3 Touch [Set] on any of [Favorite 1] —[Fa-

vorite 5].

4 Touch the entry you want to register.

The Phone Book Record screen appears.

5 Touch [OK].

The selected entry is registered in the corre-

sponding “Dial Favorites”.

Editing the entry in “Phone Book”

You can edit the imported phone book data or

add new data. You can edit [Name], [Pronun-

ciation], [Phone #], or [Picture]. You can also

delete unnecessary data.

pThe data cannot be transferred back to the

cellular phone.

Editing data or adding new data

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Phone Book].

3 Touch or [Add].

The edit screen appears.

pTo add data by entering it as desired, touch

[Add].

Using Hands-free Phoning

Chapter

4 Select the entry you want to edit.

1Name

Enter the name to be displayed in the

phone book.

For more details about operations, please

read the following page.

=For details, refer to Changing a name on

page 61

pUp to 40 characters can be input for the

name.

2Pronunciation

You can enter the desired pronunciation in-

dependently from the name. The registered

pronunciation is used for voice recognition.

For more details about operations, please

read the following page.

=For details, refer to Changing a pronuncia-

tion on page 62

pUp to 40 characters can be input for the

pronunciation.

pIf nothing is entered in a text box, you

cannot use that item as a voice com-

mand.

pDepending on which language is being

switched to, you may not be able to use

the registered pronunciation without

modification.

=For details, refer to Available Voice

Commands on page 159

3Phone #

Enter the phone number to be displayed in

the phone book. Touch [OK] to complete

the input and return to the previous screen.

pUp to 32 characters can be input for the

phone number.

pThe edited names and phone numbers

are reflected to the dialed number his-

tory and the received call history. How-

ever, they are not reflected to the data

registered in [Dial Favorites].

4Picture

Sets the image to be displayed when a call

is received.

=For details, refer to Customizing the in-

coming call picture for a phone book entry

on this page

Customizing the incoming call

picture for a phone book entry

Be sure to read “Limitations for importing pic-

tures”before creating a CD-R (-RW).

=For details, refer to Limitations for importing

pictures on page 94

You can customize a picture for the phone

book record. Some pictures are already stored

in the hard disk drive, and you can also import

JPEG format pictures, such as a picture from

your digital camera, by using a CD-R (-RW).

You can use pictures by burning them onto a

CD-R (-RW) with your PC and insert that into

the navigation system.

Here, a method for changing the picture is de-

scribed with an example of loading a picture

stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the navigation

system.

1 Check that no disc is inserted, and in-

sert your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loading

slot.

2 Touch [Picture], and then touch [Import

from Disc].

The list of the pictures stored in the CD-R (-

RW) is displayed.

On this screen, you can select the following

item:

[Back to Original]:

The picture originally used when the system

was purchased is selected.

pTouching an option other than [Import

from Disc] allows you to select a back-

ground image stored on the hard disk drive.

Using Hands-free Phoning

En 85

Chapter

Using Hands-free Phoning

3 Touch a picture you want to set.

4 Touch [Yes].

On this screen, you can select the following

items:

[No]:

Select when you want to change to another

picture.

Return to Step 3.

Deleting data

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Phone Book].

3 Touch [Delete].

The “Delete from Phone Book”screen ap-

pears.

4 Touch the entry you want to delete.

A red check mark appears next to the selected

entry. To cancel the selection, touch the entry

again.

5 Touch [Delete].

6 Touch [Yes].

The data is deleted, and the current location

screen appears.

pTo cancel the deletion, touch [No].

Editing the received call or

dialed number history

You can edit the data in the dialed number his-

tory or the received call history. You can edit

them and the edited entries are registered in

the phone book. You can also delete the his-

tory data.

Editing data

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Dialed Numbers] or [Received

Calls].

3 Touch .

The edit screen appears. Steps after this are

the same as for editing the phone book.

=For details, refer to Editing the entry in

“Phone Book”on page 84

pThe phone number cannot be edited if it is

already registered in the phone book.

Deleting data

1 Touch [Information] in the navigation

menu, and then touch [Phone Menu].

2 Touch [Dialed Numbers] or [Received

Calls].

3 Touch [Delete].

4 Touch [Yes].

All history data is deleted, and the current lo-

cation screen appears.

pTo cancel the deletion, touch [No].

Notes for hands-free phoning

General notes

!Connection to all cellular phones featuring

Bluetooth wireless technology is not guar-

anteed.

!The line-of-sight distance between this na-

vigation system and your cellular phone

must be 10 meters or less when sending

and receiving voice and data via Bluetooth

technology. However, the transmission dis-

tance may become shorter than the esti-

mated distance, depending on the

environment in use.

Using Hands-free Phoning

Chapter

!You cannot delete a registered cellular

phone. If you need to delete it, refer to “Re-

turning the Navigation System to the De-

fault or Factory Settings on page 187”clear

[Phone Settings] , and delete it together

with other functions.

!With some cellular phones, the speakers of

the system may not produce a ring sound.

!If private mode is selected on the cellular

phone, hands-free phoning may not be per-

formed.

About registration and connection

!Cellular phone operations varies depending

on the type of your cellular phone. Refer to

the instruction manual that came with your

cellular phone for detailed instructions.

About making and receiving calls

!You may hear a noise in the following situa-

tions:

—When you answer the phone by using

the button on the phone.

—When the person on the other end of

line hangs up the phone.

!If the person on the other end of the phone

call cannot hear the conversation due to an

echo, decrease the volume level for hands-

free phoning. This may reduce the effects

of the echo.

!With some cellular phones, even if you

press accept button on the cellular phone

when a call arrives, hands-free phoning

may not be performed.

!The registered name appears if the phone

number of the received call is already regis-

tered in the phone book. When one phone

number is registered under different

names, the name that comes first alphabe-

tically is displayed.

!If the phone number of the received call is

not registered in the phone book, the

phone number of the received call appears.

About received call history and dialed

number history

!Calls made or editing performed only on

your cellular phone will not be reflected to

the dialed number history or phone book in

the navigation system.

!You cannot make a call to the entry of an

unknown user (no phone number) in the re-

ceived call history.

!If calls are made by operating your cellular

phone, no history data will be recorded in

the navigation system.

About phone book transfer

!With some cellular phones, it may not be

possible to transfer all items in the phone

book at one time. In this case, transfer

items one at a time from your cellular

phone.

!Depending on the cellular phone that is

connected to this navigation system via

Bluetooth technology, this navigation sys-

tem cannot display the phone book cor-

rectly. (Some characters may be garbled or

first name and last name is put in reverse

order.)

!If the phone book in the cellular phone con-

tains image data, the phone book may not

be transferred correctly. (Image data can-

not be transferred from the cellular phone.)

!Depending on the cellular phone, phone

book transfer may not be available.

Using Hands-free Phoning

En 87

Chapter

Using Hands-free Phoning

CAUTION

For safety reasons, these functions are not avail-

able while your vehicle is in motion. To enable

these functions, you must stop in a safe place

and put on the parking brake before setting your

route (Refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22).

Entering the Settings Menu

1 Press MENU button to display the navi-

gation menu.

2 Touch [Settings] to display the Settings

menu.

3 Change the setting.

=For more details about “Adjusting each

item”, refer to Chapter 11

Setting the Volume for

Guidance and Phone

The sound volume for the navigation can be

set. You can separately set the volume of the

route guidance and the beep sound.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Volume].

2 Touch [+] or [-] to set their volume.

On this screen, you can operate the following

items.

[Guidance]

This setting controls the guidance volume of

navigation.

When set to , guidance is output. When set

to , no guidance is output.

[Beep]

This setting controls the beep tone volume for

navigation.

[Phone Ringtone]

This setting controls the incoming ring tone

volume.

[Phone Voice]

This setting controls the incoming voice vo-

lume.

pPhone Ringtone and Phone Voice adjust-

ments are related to the cellular phone fea-

turing Bluetooth technology. No

adjustment is needed when the cellular

phone featuring Bluetooth technology is

not connected.

pVolume of the audio source is adjusted by

VOL (a/b) button of the navigation system.

3 To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Customizing the Regional

Settings

Changing the language for

navigation guidance and menu

You can select the language to be used for the

navigation function. (Once you change the

language, the system restarts.)

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Regional Settings].

2 Touch [Language].

3 Touch the language that you want to

use.

Once you change the language, the system re-

starts.

pTouching [Back] returns you to the previous

display.

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

Chapter

pIf you select [English with TTS], the name

of the next street you will pass is an-

nounced. If you select [English without

TTS], the name of the next street you will

pass is not announced.

Setting the time difference

Adjusts the systems clock. Set the time differ-

ence (+,-) from the time originally set in your

navigation system.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Regional Settings].

2 Touch [Time].

3 To set the time difference, touch [+] or

[-].

Time difference

The time difference between the time origin-

ally set in the navigation system (Pacific Stan-

dard Time) and the current location of your

vehicle is shown. If necessary, adjust the time

difference. Touching [+]or[-] changes the

time difference display in one-hour incre-

ments.

The time difference can be set from -4 to +9

hours.

4 If necessary, set to summer time.

Daylight Saving Time (DST) is off by default.

Touch [Summer Time] to change the time if

you are in the daylight saving period. This

turns the display below summer time [On].

5 To finish the setting, touch [OK].

Customizing the keyboard layout

You can select the type of keyboard to be used

for inputting characters.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Regional Settings].

2 Touch [Keyboard] to select the layout

that you want to use.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

[QWERTY] (default):

[QWERTZ]:

[ABC]:

[AZERTY]:

Changing the unit between km

and miles

This setting controls the unit of distance and

speed displayed on your navigation system.

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

En 89

Chapter

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Regional Settings].

2 Touch [km / mile] to change the setting.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

[mile] (default):

Show distance in miles.

[Mile&Yard]:

Show distance in miles and yards.

[km]:

Show distance in kilometers.

Changing the virtual speed of

the vehicle

When calculating the expected time of arrival

and the number of hours to the destination,

set the average speed for the freeway or ordin-

ary roads using [+] and [-].

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Regional Settings].

2 Touch [Average Speed].

3 Touch [+] or [-] to set the speed.

pThe estimated time of arrival is not necessa-

rily estimated based on this speed value.

Checking the Setting

Related with Hardware

The hardware status, including the driving sta-

tus of a vehicle, positioning status by satellite,

learning status of the 3D sensor, and cable

connection status, can be checked.

Checking the connections of

leads and installation positions

Check that leads are properly connected be-

tween the navigation system and the vehicle.

Please also check whether they are connected

in the correct positions.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Hardware].

2 Touch [Connection Status].

The “Connection Status”screen appears.

1Speed Pulse

The Speed Pulse value detected by the navi-

gation system is shown. [0] is shown while

the vehicle is stationary.

2GPS Antenna

Indicates the connection status of the GPS

antenna, the reception sensitivity, and from

how many satellites the signal is received. If

the signal is received correctly, [OK] is dis-

played. If reception is poor, [NOK] appears.

In such case, please change the installation

position of the GPS antenna.

3Phone Connection Status

Indicates the connection status of the Blue-

tooth unit (sold separately) and the signal

strength between the Bluetooth unit and

the cellular phone. If the Bluetooth unit is

connected correctly, [OK] is displayed.

[NOK] appears when the Bluetooth unit is

not connected or incorrectly connected.

4Installation Position

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

Chapter

The installation position of the navigation

system is shown. That indicates whether

the installation position of the navigation

system is correct or not. If installed cor-

rectly, [OK] appears. When the navigation

system is installed at an extreme angle ex-

ceeding the limitation of the installing

angle, [Incorrect angle] will be displayed.

When the angle of the navigation system

has been changed, [Excessive vibration]

will be displayed.

5Parking Brake

When the parking brake is applied, [On]is

displayed. When the parking brake is re-

leased, [Off] is displayed.

6Power Voltage

The power voltage (reference value) pro-

vided from the vehicle battery to the naviga-

tion system is shown. If the voltage goes

out of the range from 11 V to 15 V, check

that power cable connection is correct.

7Illumination

When the headlights or small lamps of a ve-

hicle are on, [On] is displayed. When the

small lamps of a vehicle are off, [Off] is dis-

played. (If the orange/white lead is not con-

nected, [Off] appears.)

8Back Signal

When the gear lever is shifted to “R”, the

signal switches to [High]or[Low]. (One of

these is displayed depending on the vehi-

cle.)

Checking sensor learning

status and driving status

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Hardware].

2 Touch [3D Calibration Status].

The 3D Calibration Status screen appears.

1Distance

Driving distance is indicated.

2Speed Pulse

Total number of speed pulses is indicated.

3Learning Status

Current driving mode is indicated.

4Degree of learning

Sensor learning situations for distance

(Distance), right turn (Right Turn), left turn

(Left Turn) and 3D detection (3D) are indi-

cated by the length of bars.

pWhen tires have been changed or

chains fitted, turning on the Speed

Pulse allows the system to detect the

fact that the tire diameter has changed,

and automatically replaces the value for

calculating distance.

pIf ND-PG1 is connected, the distance

calculation value cannot be replaced

automatically.

5Speed

The speed detected by the navigation sys-

tem is indicated. (This indication may be

different from the actual speed of your vehi-

cle, so please do not use this instead of the

speedometer.)

6Acceleration or deceleration/Rotational

speed

Acceleration or deceleration velocity of your

vehicle is indicated. Also, rotational speed

when your vehicle turns to left or right is

shown.

7Inclination

Degree of slope of the street is indicated.

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

En 91

Chapter

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

To clear values...

If you want to delete the learned results stored

in [Distance], [Speed Pulse]or[Learning Sta-

tus], touch the relevant result, then touch

[Yes].

pIf you select [Learning Status], you can se-

lect [Reset All]or[Reset Distance Study].

To clear all learning statuses, touch [Reset

All]. To clear only the Distance study, touch

[Reset Distance Study].

pTouch [Reset All] for the following cases:

—After changing the installation position

of the navigation system

—After changing the installation angle of

the navigation system

—After moving the navigation system to

another vehicle

pWhen the distance accuracy is low, touch

[Reset Distance Study].

pTouching [Reset All] returns the installa-

tion angle setting also to the default or fac-

tory setting. Reconfigure the setting.

=For details, refer to Correcting the installa-

tion angle on this page

pThe navigation system can automatically

use its sensor memory based on the outer

dimensions of the tires.

Correcting the installation angle

You can correct the installation angle of the

navigation system. Correcting the installation

angle improves the accuracy of sensor learn-

ing, even if the unit is not facing center. Select

the orientation of the LCD panel from the left,

center, and right.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Hardware].

2 Touch [Installation Angle Setup].

3 Check the direction the LCD panel

faces, and touch the corresponding item.

[Left]:

Select this when the angle is 5° or more to the

left from the center.

[Center] (default):

Select this when the angle is less than 5° to

the left and right from the center.

[Right]:

Select this when the angle is 5° or more to the

right from the center.

pIf [Learning Status]in[3D Calibration

Status]is[Simple Hybrid], the installation

angle can be corrected.

Checking the device and

version information

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Hardware].

2 Touch [Service Info Screen].

3 Check the device and version informa-

tion.

Checking the hard disk

information

You can check the volume of the hard disk,

current used space and remaining space.

pThe hard disk space (%) means free space

of the music library. In some cases, even

when about 10 % of free space is left, no

more music tracks may be recorded due to

system restriction.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Hardware].

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

Chapter

2 Touch [Hard Disk Info].

Hard disk space (%)

Registering the Home Location

and Favorite Location

You can register one home location and one

favorite location. You can change the regis-

tered information later. You might find it useful

to register your workplace or a relative’s home

as your favorite location.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Defined Locations].

2 Touch [Go to].

When registering your home location, touch

[Home].

3 Search for a location to register.

You can select a method of location search.

=For more details about “Address Search”,

refer to Calculating your destination by using

Address Search on page 28

=For more details about “Information on

searching for locations to register”, refer to

Chapter 6

pIf you select [Map Search], move the scroll

cursor to the place you want to set and

touch [OK].

4 Point the scroll cursor to the location

you want to register and touch [OK].

The location is registered, and the Edit regis-

tered information screen appears.

=For details, refer to Editing the entry in “Ad-

dress Book”on page 60

5 Touch [OK].

Completes the registration.

Changing the Background

Picture

Be sure to read “Limitations for importing pic-

tures”before creating a CD-R (-RW) and “Pre-

cautions when changing the Splash Screen”.

=For details, refer to Limitations for importing

pictures on the next page

=For details, refer to Precautions when chan-

ging the Splash Screen on page 95

In the menu operation screen, you can custo-

mize a picture for the background. Some pic-

tures are already stored in the hard disk drive,

and you can also import JPEG format pictures,

such as a picture from your digital camera, by

using a CD-R(-RW). You can use pictures as

background pictures by burning them onto a

CD-R (-RW) with your PC and inserting it into

the navigation system.

The following types of background pictures

can be changed:

!Splash Screen: The screen that appears

when the Navigation system starts up.

!Navigation Background: Background pic-

ture of the navigation menu screen.

!AV Background: Background picture dur-

ing the operation of audio source screen.

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

En 93

Chapter

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

Here, a method for changing the background

picture is described with an example of load-

ing a picture stored on a CD-R (-RW) onto the

navigation system as the background picture.

1 Check that no disc is inserted, and in-

sert your CD-R (-RW) to the disc loading

slot.

2 Touch [Settings] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Background Picture Set-

ting].

The picture selected for each screen is indi-

cated on the right side of [Splash Screen],

[Navigation Background] and [AV Back-

ground] items.

3 Touch [Splash Screen], [Navigation

Background] or [AV Background].

4 Touch [Import from Disc].

The list of the pictures stored in the CD-R (-

RW) is displayed.

On this screen, you can select the following

item:

[Back to Original], [Back to PIONEER Origi-

nal]:

The picture originally used when the system

was purchased is selected.

pTouching an option other than [Import

from Disc] allows you to select a back-

ground image stored on the hard disk drive.

5 Touch a picture you want to set.

6 Touch [OK].

If you touch [OK], the background image

starts changing. After a short while, the confir-

mation screen appears.

pWhen the image has a large file size, it

takes more time to change the Background

Picture. Do not perform other operations

until the message “Updating. Please do

not turn off the power.”disappears.

pIf you want to change to another picture,

touch [Back] to return to Step 4.

pWhen the picture starts to change, do not

turn off the vehicle engine until the mes-

sage appears to indicate that the picture

has finished changing.

Limitations for importing pictures

When you burn a CD-R (-RW), make sure the

total data size of the CD-R (-RW) is greater

than 100 MB by storing dummy data or other

filler information. Otherwise, the disc may not

be recognized by the built-in DVD drive.

pYou cannot use a CD-R (-RW) containing

MP3 files or Audio data (CD-DA part) for

importing pictures.

pWhen storing pictures on a CD-R (-RW),

create a folder named “Pictures”in the CD-

R (-RW), and store the picture files in this

folder. (Up to 200 picture files can be used

in total, including pictures that are already

stored in the hard disk drive and pictures in

the CD-R (-RW).)

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

Chapter

pWhen you burn a CD-R (-RW), limit the

number of folder hierarchy levels to eight.

pYou can only use a CD-R (-RW) finalized

with single-session for importing pictures.

pYou can only use a CD-R (-RW) finalized

with “Mode1”for importing pictures.

pOnly JPEG format (“.jpg”or “.JPG”) pictures

can be used. Progressive format JPEG pic-

tures cannot be used.

pUsing only the standard Latin characters

(alphabets of both cases: A-Z,a-z) and

numbers (0-9) is recommended for the file

name. If you want to use letters with diacri-

tical marks (such as äor è) for file name, fi-

nalize the CD-R(-RW) with Joliet (Unicode)

format.

pPictures up to a maximum of 2 592 x 1 944

pixels can be used. We cannot guarantee

proper operation for a picture bigger than

this size.

pAfter changing a set image that was im-

ported from a CD-R (-RW), you must use

the CD-R (-RW) where the image is re-

corded to restore the previous Splash

Screen.

Precautions when changing the

Splash Screen

The following is the default Splash Screen for

the Navigation System.

[PIONEER Original]

If an image other than the one shown above is

previously set (such as an image from the

dealer or other source) and you change the

Splash Screen once, you must use the CD-R (-

RW) where the image is recorded to restore

the previous Splash Screen.

Using the Demonstration

Guidance

This is a demonstration function for shops.

After a route is set, the simulation of the route

guidance to a destination is automatically dis-

played. Normally, set this to [Off].

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation

menu.

2 Touch [Demo Mode] to change the set-

ting.

Each time you touch the key changes that set-

ting.

[On]:

Repeat demo drive.

[Off] (default):

Demo Mode is set off.

Correcting the Current

Location

Touch the screen to adjust the current position

and direction of the vehicle displayed on the

map.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Modify Current Loca-

tion].

2 Scroll to the position where you want

to set, then touch [OK].

3 Touch the arrow key on the screen to

set the direction, then touch [OK].

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

En 95

Chapter

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

Restoring the Default Setting

Resets various settings registered to the navi-

gation system and restores to the default or

factory settings.

1 Touch [Settings] in the navigation

menu, then touch [Restore Factory Set-

tings].

2 Touch [Yes] to clear the current setting.

pTouch [No] to cancel clear the current set-

ting.

=For details, refer to Returning the Naviga-

tion System to the Default or Factory Set-

tings on page 187

Modifying the General Settings for Navigation Functions

Chapter

You can play or use the following sources with

the navigation system.

!DVD-Video

!CD

!MP3 disc

!Radio (FM)

!Radio (AM)

!Music Library

=For more details about “About the music li-

brary”, refer to Chapter 13

This chapter describes how to use the AV

source and the basic operation of the AV

source.

Basic Operation

Switching the Audio operation

screen

%Press AV button to switch Audio opera-

tion screen.

1Touch panel keys

pTouch [Hide] to hide the touch panel

keys. If you touch the screen, the touch

panel keys are displayed again.

Selecting a source

Select a source on “AV Source Menu”

1 Press AV button to switch Audio opera-

tion screen.

2 Touch the source icon.

Source icon

3 Touch the desired source.

pTouch [OFF] to turn the source off.

pTouch [REAR SCREEN] to select the source

for “Rear display”.

=For details, refer to Selecting the video for

“Rear display”on page 153

Select a source by using AV button

You can press AV button to switch the source.

1 Press AV button to switch Audio opera-

tion screen.

2 Press AV button to select the desired

source.

Press AV button repeatedly to switch between

the following sources:

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

En 97

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

[CD/ROM (MP3)/DVD] (built-in DVD drive) —

[LIBRARY] (Music library) —[FM] (FM tuner)

—[AM] (AM tuner) —[XM] (XM tuner) —

[SIRIUS] (SIRIUS tuner) —[iPod] (iPod) —

[M-CD] (multi-CD) —[TV] (television) —

[AV INPUT] (video input) —[AUX] (auxiliary

equipment) —[EXT 1] (external unit 1) —

[EXT 2] (external unit 2)

pIn the following cases, the sound source

cannot to be used:

—When a unit corresponding to each

source is not connected to the naviga-

tion system.

—When no disc is set in the navigation

system.

—When no magazine is set in the multi-

CD player.

—When [AUX Input] is set to [Off].

=For details, refer to Switching the aux-

iliary setting on page 150

—When [AV Input] is not set to [Video].

=For details, refer to Setting the video

input on page 150

pThe term “external unit”refers to future

Pioneer devices that are not currently

planned for, or devices that allow control of

basic functions although they are not fully

controlled by the navigation system. Two ex-

ternal units can be controlled by this navi-

gation system. When two external units are

connected, the navigation system allocates

them to external unit 1 or external unit 2.

pWhen [Auto ANT] mode is set to[Radio],

the vehicle’s antenna can be stowed or

turned off by following the instructions

below.

—Change the source from radio (AM or

FM) to another source.

—Turn the source off.

—Turn off the ignition switch (ACC OFF).

If [Auto ANT] mode is set to [Power], the

vehicle’s antenna can be stowed or turned

off only when the ACC is set to “OFF”.

=For more details about “[Auto ANT]”,

refer to Switching the auto antenna setting

on page 151

About Steering Remote Control

pWhen using “CD-SR1”Steering Remote

Control (sold separately), the following but-

tons can be used for operation:

PHONE MENU button

Switches to Phone menu when Bluetooth unit

(sold separately) is connected.

VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button

Press to accept the call when there is an in-

coming call.

In other situations, press to start the voice op-

eration.

VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button

Press to reject a call when there is an incom-

ing call.

Press to hang up the phone during talking on

the phone.

In voice operation, return to the previous

screen.

abbutton:

Same function as P.LIST (a/b) button.

cdbutton:

Same function as TRK (c/d) button.

+, –button:

Same function as VOL (b/a) button.

BAND button:

Same function as [Band] touch panel key.

SOURCE button:

Same function as AV button.

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

Chapter

Viewing the audio operation screen and displaying the Audio

Settings menu

Normal screen (e.g. CD)

Touc h

1Information plate

Displays the information (e.g. track title) about

the source being played.

2Touch panel keys

Touch to operate the source being played.

3Detailed information

Displays the detailed information about the

source being played.

4AV Settings key

Displays the AV Settings menu.

5Hide key

Touch [Hide] to hide the touch panel keys and

detailed information. If you touch the screen,

they are displayed again.

6Audio Settings tab

Switches the setting items to those for

Audio Settings.

7System Settings tab

Switches the setting items to those for

System Settings.

8Setting Items

=For details, refer to Customizing the Audio

Setting related with Audio Visual on page

142

Operating a Music CD

You can play a normal music CD using the

built-in DVD drive of the navigation unit. This

section describes that operations.

Selecting [CD] as the source

%Press OPEN CLOSE button and insert a

disc you want to play to disc loading slot.

The source changes and then playback will

start.

pIf the disc is already set, touch the source

icon and then touch [CD].

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 97

pWhen being read in, Checking disc is dis-

played.

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

En 99

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

About auto hard disk recording

The Navigation system can record the tracks

from a music CD into the hard disk drive. In

default setting, the system starts recording

automatically when an unrecorded music CD

is inserted.

If you want to cancel the recording, touch

[Stop].

Stop

=For more details about “Setting the hard

disk recording mode”, refer to Setting the CD

recording mode on page 152

=For details, refer to Music Library Recording

on page 110

=For details, refer to Music Library Play on

page 112

pAlso see at “Handling and Care of the Disc”

in the hardware manual and “Detail Infor-

mation for Playable Media on page 199”for

more cautions about handling each type of

media.

Screen configuration

123

1Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

2Disc title indicator

Shows the title of the disc currently playing.

(when available.)

3Playback method indicator

Shows which playback method has been se-

lected.

4Track number indicator

Shows the number of the track currently play-

ing.

5Track title indicator

Shows the title of the track currently playing.

(when available.)

6Artist name indicator

Shows the name of the artist currently play-

ing. (when available.)

7Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

track.

8Track list

Shows tracks of the CD currently playing.

Title display

Music recognition technology and related

data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is

the industry standard in music recognition

technology and related content delivery. For

more information visit www.gracenote.com.

pTitle information will be displayed when the

information is found in the Gracenote®Da-

tabase on the built-in hard disk drive. If you

insert a CD-TEXT disc*, the system priori-

tizes the title information encoded in CD-

TEXT disc.

*: Some discs have text information en-

coded on the disc during manufacture.

These discs may contain such information

as the CD title, track title, and artist’s

name. These discs are called CD-TEXT

discs.

pWhen multiple options for the title informa-

tion are found or no title information exists,

[-] is displayed.

pThe title information displayed on the CD

playback screen and the recording screen

is synchronized with the one edited in the

music library. Once you edit the title infor-

mation in the music library, the title dis-

played on each screen will change

accordingly.

=For details, refer to Editing a playlist or

tracks on page 117

pUp to 32 characters can be entered. But

the navigation system incorporates propor-

tional font. Therefore, the number of the

characters that you can display varies ac-

cording to the type of character.

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

100

Chapter

pIf the built-in DVD drive does not operate

properly, an error message may be dis-

played.

=For details, refer to Messages for Audio

Functions on page 184

Touch panel key operation

Touch panel keys

1Select a desired track from the list

Touch a desired track to play.

2Playback and Pause

Touching fswitches between “playback”

and “pause”.

3Touch: Skip the track forward or back-

ward

Touching pskips to the start of the next

track.

Touching oonce skips to the start of the

current track. Touching again will skip to the

previous track.

Touch and hold: Fast rewind or forward

Keep touching oor pto perform fast re-

wind or forward.

pYou can also perform these operations

by using TRK (c/d) button.

pFast rewind is canceled when it reaches

the beginning of the first track on the

disc.

4Stop playback

When you stop playback by touching g, that

track number on the disc is memorized, en-

abling playback from that track when you play

the disc again.

pTo play the disc again, touch f.

5Repeat the current track

Each touch of turns the repeat play on

or off.

“Track Repeat”is displayed on the playback

method indicator during track repeat.

pIf you perform track search or fast for-

ward or rewind, repeat play is automati-

cally canceled.

6Play tracks in a random order

Touching turns the random play on or

off.

7Scan tracks of a CD

Touching turns the scan play on or off.

Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of

each track on the CD. When you find the de-

sired track touch to turn scan play off.

pAfter scanning of a CD is finished, nor-

mal playback of the tracks will begin

again.

Operating the CD-ROM

(MP3 disc)

You can play an MP3 disc using the built-in

DVD drive of the navigation unit. This section

describes those operations.

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

En 101

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

Selecting [ROM] as the source

%Press OPEN CLOSE button and insert

the disc that you want to play into disc

loading slot.

The source changes and then playback will

start.

pIf the disc is already set, touch the source

icon and then touch [ROM].

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 97

pWhile loading, Checking disc is displayed.

pAlso see “Handling and Care of the Disc”in

the hardware manual and “Detail Information

for Playable Media on page 199”in this manual

for more cautions about handling each

media.

Screen configuration

1234

1Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

2Playback method indicator

Shows which playback method has been se-

lected.

3Folder indicator

Shows the folder number and folder name

currently playing. When an ID3 tag has been

encoded on the file, the disc title will be

shown instead of the folder name.

4Track indicator

Shows the track number and file name of the

track currently playing. When an ID3 tag has

been encoded on the file, the track title will be

shown instead of the file name.

5Artist name indicator

Shows the artist name currently playing only

when an ID3 tag has been encoded on the

MP3 file.

6Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

track.

7Folder and track list

Shows contents of the folder currently playing

or temporarily displayed.

8Bit rate

Shows the bit rate of the file currently playing.

Touch panel key operation

Touch panel keys

32 5

1789

1Select tracks from the list or viewing con-

tents of the folders

The list lets you see the list of track titles or

folder names on a disc. If you touch a folder

on the list, you can view its contents. If you

touch a track on the list, you can play the se-

lected track.

pTouching or switches to the next or

previous page in the list.

pIf the selected folder does not contain

any track that can be played, the track

list is not displayed.

2Playback and Pause

Touching fswitches between “playback”

and “pause”.

3Touch: Skip forward or backward

Touching pskips to the start of the next

track. Touching oonce skips to the start of

the current track. Touching again will skip to

the previous track.

Touch and hold: Fast rewind or forward

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

102

Chapter

Keep touching oor pto perform fast re-

wind or forward.

pYou can also perform these operations

by using TRK (c/d) button.

pFast rewind is canceled when it reaches

the beginning of the first track on the

disc.

pIn the case of MP3, there is no sound on

fast rewind or forward.

4Stop playback

When you stop playback by touching g, that

track number on the disc is memorized, en-

abling playback from that track when you play

the disc again.

pTo play the disc again, touch f.

5Select upper folder

Touch to move to the upper folder and

play back the first track on that folder. If the

folder contain no MP3 files, the contents of

that folder are shown.

pIf the current folder is the ROOT folder,

can not be used.

6Switch mode between MP3 and music CD

(CD-DA)

When playing discs with MP3 files and audio

data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-

MODE CDs, both types can be played only by

switching mode between MP3 and CD-DA.

Touching [Media] switches between CD-DA

part and MP3 part.

7Display text information on MP3 disc

Text information recorded on an MP3 disc can

be displayed.

The next piece of information is displayed.

!Disc Title (disc title)*

!Track Title (track title)*

!Folder Title (folder name)

!File Name (file name)

!Artist Name (artist name)*

!Genre (genre)*

!Release Year (release year)*

pThe information marked with an asterisk

(*) is displayed only when an ID3 tag

has been encoded on MP3 files on the

disc. If specific information of the ID3

tag has not been encoded on MP3 files

on disc, the corresponding item may be

blank.

8Repeat play

Each touch of changes the settings as

follows:

!Track Repeat —Repeat just the current

track

!Folder Repeat —Repeat the folder cur-

rently playing

pIf you select another track or perform

fast forward/rewind during

Track Repeat, the repeat play is can-

celed.

pIf you select another folder or perform

fast forward/rewind during

Folder Repeat, the repeat play is can-

celed. (You can perform track search

within that folder with Folder repeat.)

pWhen Folder Repeat is selected, it is

not possible to play back a subfolder of

that folder.

9Play tracks in random order

Touching switches between playing

tracks randomly or sequentially within a se-

lected repeat range.

aScan folders and tracks

Touching turns the scan play on or off.

Scan play will be performed for the selected

repeat range.

pIn default, the beginning of the first

track of each folder will be played for

about 10 seconds. When

“Folder Repeat”is selected for repeat

play, the beginning of each track in the

selected folder will play for about 10 sec-

onds. When you find the desired track,

touch to turn scan play off.

pAfter track or folder scanning is fin-

ished, normal playback of the tracks will

begin again.

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

En 103

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

Notes on playing MP3 disc

pWhen playing discs with MP3 files and

audio data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and

MIXED-MODE CDs, both types can be

played only by switching mode between

MP3 and CD-DA. When playing back the

CD-DA part, the operation is the same as

for normal music CDs. Likewise, when play-

ing back the MP3 part, the operation is the

same as for MP3. Refer to the instructions

for each type of media.

pIf you have switched between playback of

MP3 files and audio data (CD-DA), play-

back starts at the first track on the disc.

pPlayback is carried out in order of file num-

ber. Folders are skipped if they contain no

MP3 files. (For example, if folder 01 (ROOT)

contains no MP3 files, playback com-

mences with folder 02.)

pWhen playing back files recorded as VBR

(variable bit rate) files, the play time will not

be correctly displayed if fast forward or re-

verse operations are used.

pIf the built-in DVD drive does not operate

properly, an error message may be dis-

played.

=For details, refer to Messages for Audio

Functions on page 184

Operating the DVD

CAUTION

For safety reasons, video images cannot be

viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view

video images, you must stop in a safe place and

put on the parking brake before setting your route

(Refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22).

You can play a DVD-Video using the built-in

DVD drive of the navigation system. This sec-

tion describes operations for DVD-Video.

Selecting [DVD] as the source

%Press OPEN CLOSE button and insert a

disc you want to play to disc loading slot.

The source changes and then playback will

start.

pIf the disc is already set, touch the source

icon and then touch [DVD].

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 97

pAlso see “Handling and Care of the Disc”in

the hardware manual and “Detail Information

for Playable Media on page 199”in this manual

for more cautions about handling DVD-Video.

Screen configuration

1Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

2Sound output indicator

Shows which sound output setting has been

selected.

3Repeat range indicator

Shows which repeat range has been selected.

4Title number indicator

Shows the title number currently playing.

5Subtitle language indicator

Shows what subtitle language has been se-

lected.

6Chapter number indicator

Shows the chapter currently playing.

7Audio language indicator

Shows what audio language has been se-

lected.

8Viewing angle indicator

Shows what viewing angle has been selected.

9Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

chapter.

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

104

Chapter

Touch panel key operation

Playback screen (page1)

Playback screen (page2)

Menu screen

pWith some discs, the icon 9may be dis-

played, meaning that the operation is not

valid.

1Playback and Pause

Touching fswitches between “playback”

and “pause”.

2Touch: Skip forward or backward

Touching pskips to the start of the next

chapter. Touching oonce skips to the start

of the current chapter. Touching again will

skip to the previous chapter.

Touch and hold: Fast rewind or forward

Keep touching oor pto perform fast re-

wind or forward. If you keep touching oor

pfor five seconds, the icon mor n

changes into or . When this hap-

pens, fast rewind/ fast forward continues even

if you release oor p. To resume playback

at a desired point, touch f,oor p.

pYou can also perform these operations

by using TRK (c/d) button.

3Stop playback

4Display the DVD menu

You can display the menu by touching [Menu]

or [Top Menu] while a disc is playing. Touch-

ing either of these keys again lets you start

playback from the location selected from the

menu. For details, refer to the instructions pro-

vided with the disc.

5Display the DVD menu keypad

6Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion

playback)

Touch and hold to start slow-motion playback.

Touching this during playback pauses the

image and each touch forwards a frame.

To return to normal playback, touch f.

pWith some discs, images may be un-

clear during frame-by-frame playback or

slow motion playback.

pThere is no sound during slow motion

playback.

pReverse slow motion playback is not

possible.

7Switch next page of touch panel keys

8Repeat play

Each touch of the changes the settings

as follows:

!Chapter Repeat —Repeat just the cur-

rent chapter

!Title Repeat —Repeat just the current

title

pIf you perform chapter (title) search, fast

forward/rewind, or slow motion play-

back, the repeat play range changes to

off.

9Change the subtitle language (Multi-sub-

title)

Each time you touch [Subtitle], the DVD

switches between subtitle language.

aChange the viewing angle (Multi-angle)

Each time you touch [Angle], the DVD

switches between viewing angles.

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

En 105

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

pDuring playback of a scene shot from

multiple angles, the angle icon is

displayed. Turn the angle icon display

on or off using “DVD-V Setup”menu.

=For details, refer to Setting angle icon dis-

play on page 147

bChange audio language and audio sys-

tems (Multi-audio)

Each time you touch [Audio], the DVD

switches between audio language and audio

system.

pOnly digital output of DTS audio is pos-

sible. If navigation system’s optical digi-

tal outputs are not connected, DTS

audio can not be output, so select an

audio setting other than DTS.

pDisplay indications such as Dolby D and

5.1ch indicate the audio system re-

corded on the DVD. Depending on the

setting, playback may not be with the

same audio system as that indicated.

cSpecify the chapter you want to play back

or the time to start playback by entering a

number

=For details, refer to Searching for a desired

scene, starting playback from a specified time

on this page

dPerform the operation (such as resuming)

stored in the disc

When using a DVD that has a point recorded

that indicates where to return to, the DVD re-

turns to the specified point and begins play

back from that point.

eSwitch to the previous page of touch

panel keys

fSelect the DVD menu item

gDecide the item

When you select a certain video item, play-

back starts from the selected item. When you

select an item with a submenu, the next menu

screen will appear.

pThe way to display the menu differs de-

pending on the disc. For details, refer to

the instructions provided with disc.

Searching for a desired scene,

starting playback from a

specified time

You can search for a desired scene by specify-

ing a title or a chapter, and the time.

pChapter search and time search are not

possible when disc playback has been

stopped.

1 Touch [10Key Search] and then touch

[Title] (title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time]

(time).

2 Touch the keys to input the desired

number.

For titles, chapters

!To select 3, touch [3].

!To select 10, touch [1] and [0] in order.

!To select 23, touch [2] and [3] in order.

For time (time search)

!To select 21 minutes 03 seconds, touch [2],

[1], [Min], and [3], [Sec] in order.

!To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],

[1], [Min] in order.

pTo cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].

3 While the input number is displayed,

touch [Enter].

This starts playback from the selected scene.

pWith discs featuring a menu, you can also

touch [Menu]or[Top Menu] and then

make selections from the displayed menu.

Entering the numerical commands

You can use this function when you need to

enter a numerical command during DVD play-

back.

1 Touch [10Key Search] and then touch

[10key Mode] (10key mode).

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

106

Chapter

2 Touch 0 —9 to input the desired num-

ber.

3 While the input number is displayed,

touch [Enter].

Operating the Radio (FM)

You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-

tion system. This section describes operations

for Radio (FM).

Selecting [FM] as the source

%Touch the source icon and touch [FM].

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 97

Screen configuration

12 7

1Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

2Band indicator

Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1

to FM3.

3Preset number indicator

Shows the program type of the current station

(when available).

4Frequency indicator

Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned.

5Preset list display

Shows the preset list.

6LOCAL indicator

Shows when local seek tuning is on.

7STEREO indicator

Shows that the frequency selected is being

broadcast in stereo.

Touch panel key operation

%Touch the source icon and then touch

[FM] to select the radio (FM).

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch panel keys

5 3

1Touch: Recall the preset station

Touch and hold: Store the broadcast

station

You can register the frequency currently

being received to the preset list. You can ea-

sily store up to six broadcast frequencies

for later recall with the touch of a key.

pTouch to recall the preset frequency.

pUp to 18 stations, 6 for each of three FM

bands can be stored in memory.

2Touch: Perform manual tuning

To perform manual tuning, touch

or briefly. The frequencies move up

or down one step.

Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning

To perform seek tuning, keep touching

or for about one second

and release. The tuner will scan the fre-

quencies until a broadcast strong enough

for good reception is found.

pYou can cancel seek tuning by touching

either or briefly.

pIf you keep touching or

, you can skip broadcasting fre-

quencies. Seek tuning starts as soon as

you release the keys.

pYou can also perform these operations

by using TRK (c/d) button.

3Tune in strong signals

=For details, refer to Tuning in strong sig-

nals on page 109

4Store the strongest broadcast frequen-

cies

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

En 107

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

=For details, refer to Storing the strongest

broadcast frequencies on the next page

5Select a FM band

Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired

FM band is displayed, FM 1,FM 2 or FM 3.

pThis function is convenient to prepare

different preset lists for each band.

Storing the strongest

broadcast frequencies

“BSM”(best stations memory) lets you auto-

matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-

quencies under preset tuning keys [P1]—[P6]

and once stored there you can tune in to those

frequencies with a touch of the key.

%Touch and hold [BSM].

“BSM”starts. The six strongest broadcast fre-

quencies will be stored under preset tuning

keys [P1]—[P6] in order of their signal

strength.

pTo cancel the storage process, touch [Can-

cel].

pStoring broadcast frequencies with “BSM”

may replace broadcast frequencies you

have saved using [P1]—[P6].

Tuning in strong signals

Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those

radio stations with sufficiently strong signals

for good reception.

1 Touch [Local].

2 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.

pTo turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].

3 Touch [c]or[d] to set the sensitivity.

There are four levels of sensitivity for FM.

Level: 1—2—3—4

The level “4”setting allows reception of only

the strongest stations, while lower settings let

you receive weaker stations.

Operating the Radio (AM)

You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-

tion system. This section describes operations

for Radio (AM).

Selecting [AM] as the source

%Touch the source icon and touch [AM].

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 97

Screen configuration

1235

1Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

2Preset number indicator

Shows what preset has been selected.

3Frequency indicator

Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned.

4Preset list display

Shows the preset list.

5LOCAL indicator

Shows when local seek tuning is on.

Touch panel key operation

%Touch the source icon and then touch

[AM] to select the radio (AM).

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

108

Chapter

Touch panel keys

1Select a desired frequency from the list

Touch to recall the preset frequency.

pTo register the frequency currently being

received to the preset list, touch and

hold the preset list.

Touch and hold: Store broadcast sta-

tions

You can register the frequency currently

being received to the preset list. You can ea-

sily store up to six broadcast frequencies

for later recall with the touch of a key.

pTouch to recall the preset frequency.

pUp to 6 stations can be stored in mem-

ory.

2Touch: Perform manual tuning

To perform manual tuning, touch

or briefly. The frequencies move up

or down one step.

Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning

To perform seek tuning, keep touching

or for about one second

and release. The tuner will scan the fre-

quencies until a broadcast strong enough

for good reception is found.

pYou can cancel seek tuning by touching

either or briefly.

pIf you keep touching or

, you can skip broadcasting fre-

quencies. Seek tuning starts as soon as

you release the keys.

pYou can also perform these operations

by using TRK (c/d) button.

3Tune in strong signals

=For details, refer to Tuning in strong sig-

nals on the previous page

4Store the strongest broadcast frequen-

cies

=For details, refer to Storing the strongest

broadcast frequencies on this page

Storing the strongest broadcast

frequencies

“BSM”(best stations memory) lets you auto-

matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-

quencies under preset tuning keys P1 —P6

and once stored there you can tune in to those

frequencies with the touch of a key.

%Touch and hold [BSM].

“BSM”starts. The six strongest broadcast fre-

quencies will be stored under preset tuning

keys P1 —P6 in order of their signal strength.

pTo cancel the storage process, touch [Can-

cel].

pStoring broadcast frequencies with BSM

may replace broadcast frequencies you

have saved using P1 —P6.

Tuning in strong signals

Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those

radio stations with sufficiently strong signals

for good reception.

1 Touch [Local].

2 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.

pTo turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].

3 Touch cor dto set the sensitivity.

There are two levels of sensitivity for AM.

Level: 1—2

The level “2”setting allows reception of only

the strongest stations, while lower settings let

you receive weaker stations.

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

En 109

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)

You can record tracks from a music CD to the

hard disk in the navigation system. The music

library function enables you to record music

CDs on the hard disk in the navigation system

and play them back with various methods. To

use the music library, start by recording sound

sources from the CD.

Music Library Recording

When you play back a music CD that is not re-

corded on the navigation system, the system

automatically begins recording that CD to the

music library. This section describes cautions

and recording procedure.

pThe music library can record up to 200 gen-

eral music CDs worth of music data. (This

is just an average number and varies de-

pending on the size of music data con-

tained in the CDs.)

Screen configuration

“100%”appears to indicate that the recording

has completed. You can touch [Stop] to switch

the screen and perform another operation.

1Recording mode indicator

Shows the current recording mode.

=For details, refer to Setting the CD recording

mode on page 152

2Recording progress indicator

Shows the progress of the recording. Frac-

tions show number of recorded tracks total

number of tracks in the CD.

3Recording indicator

Shows the recording status. (Red) indi-

cates that recording is in progress. (Blue)

indicates preparing recording.

4Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

5Track indicator

Shows the number and title of the track cur-

rently playing.

6Artist name indicator

Shows the name of the artist currently play-

ing. (when available.)

7Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

track.

8Track list

Shows tracks in the CD.

9Record status of tracks

: Recorded track

(Red): Track being recorded

(Blue): Track is not recorded yet

pTrack selection operation or special play-

back functions such as random play are

disabled until recording finishes. To se-

lect tracks or perform special playback

functions, touch [Stop] to stop record-

ing.

Title display

Music recognition technology and related

data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is

the industry standard in music recognition

technology and related content delivery. For

more information visit www.gracenote.com.

pTitle information will be displayed when the

information is found in the Gracenote®Da-

tabase on the built-in hard disk drive. If you

insert a CD-TEXT disc, the system priori-

tized a title information encoded in CD-

TEXT disc.

pWhen multiple options for the title informa-

tion are found or no title information exists,

[-] is displayed. A title may be displayed if

you update the title information manually

after recording has finished.

=For details, refer to Assigning another

candidate for title information on page 122

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

110

Chapter

pIf no title information exists in the Grace-

note®Database on the built-in hard disk

drive, the date when the track was recorded

is entered automatically. If you want to dis-

play the title information, enter the title

manually after recording has finished.

=For more details about “Changing the

title of the playlist or track”, refer to Editing

a playlist or tracks on page 117

pThe title information displayed on the CD

playback screen and the recording screen

is synchronized with the one edited in the

music library. If you edit the title informa-

tion in the music library, the title displayed

on each screen will change accordingly.

=For details, refer to Editing a playlist or

tracks on page 117

pTitle information can only be edited when

one or more tracks are recorded in the

music library.

pOnce you record a CD-TEXT disc, the title

information encoded in CD-TEXT disc is

also stored into the hard disk drive. (If you

edit the title information with the Music li-

brary, the edited title will be shown.)

Recording all tracks in a CD

When you play back a CD that is not recorded,

it is automatically recorded in the music li-

brary (hard disk drive).

pAll tracks are automatically recorded

(Auto) in the default setting.

=For details, refer to Setting the CD recording

mode on page 152

%Insert the CD that you want to record.

Recording automatically starts.

pTo cancel the recording, touch [Stop].

When recording finishes, the system returns

to the normal playback screen of the CD in the

blank between current track and next track.

pIf the CD is scratched or damaged, no data

can be recorded on that part. In such a

case, the track that falls on that part may be

skipped.

Recording a CD manually

You can record only your favorite tracks in the

CD.

1 [REC Mode] is set to [Manual].

=For details, refer to Setting the CD recording

mode on page 152

pREC Mode cannot be changed during re-

cording.

2 Play back the track you want to record.

3 Touch [REC].

The track being played is recorded.

When recording finishes, the system returns

to the normal playback screen of the CD in the

end of the track.

pTo cancel the recording, touch [Stop].

Recording only the first track of

aCD

You can record only the first track of the CD.

This mode is useful when you want to record

only the first tracks from multiple CD singles

(or EPs) consecutively.

1 [REC Mode] is set to [Single].

=For details, refer to Setting the CD recording

mode on page 152

pREC Mode cannot be changed during re-

cording.

2 Insert the CD you want to record.

Recording automatically starts for the first

track.

When recording finishes, the system returns

to the normal playback screen of the CD in the

end of the track.

pTo cancel the recording, touch [Stop].

Stopping CD recording

You can stop recording while recording a CD.

(Recording can resume depending on the re-

cording mode.)

%Touch [Stop].

When REC Mode is [Auto]or[Single]:

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

En 111

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

Recording is paused, and the system starts

normal CD playback. To resume recording,

touch [REC]. Recording also resumes in the

following cases:

!When you switch to another source, and

then return to the CD source.

!When you turn off the ignition switch of the

vehicle, and then restart the engine.

When REC Mode is [Manual]:

Recording is stopped. Touch [REC] to record

the track being played.

Notes on CD recording

pOperations on the navigation system may

take more time during recording than nor-

mal.

pTracks from a CD are recorded in 4 times

speed. You can listen to that sound during

recording.

pThe data is recorded using a highly efficient

compression method, so the sound may

slightly differ from the original depending

on the sound source. Noise may be heard

in some cases, but this is not an malfunc-

tion.

pRecording is possible only with a CD that

contains 44.1 kHz, 16-bit-stereo PCM digital

audio data.

pRecording (or copying) to the music library

is not possible from recording media (such

as CD-Rs) in which a CD or other data is di-

gitally stored. This is due to the Serial Copy

Management System (SCMS) that was de-

veloped to prevent second-generation or se-

rial copies.

pRecording to the music library is not possi-

ble from media (such as CD-Rs) in which

MP3 files are stored.

pWhen you are recording a CD with no track

intervals (such as a live concert CD), if the

engine stops and the power turns off, the

sound may break in a track when the

music data is played back.

Also see “Notes for Hard Disk Drive”for more

cautions about handling hard disk drive.

=For details, refer to Notes for Hard Disk Drive

on page 24

Music Library Play

You can play back or edit the tracks recorded

in the hard disk drive in the source named

music library (LIBRARY).

Selecting [LIBRARY] as the source

%Touch the source icon and touch

[LIBRARY].

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 97

Screen configuration

Music Library (LIBRARY)

12 34567

1Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

2Group name indicator

Shows the group currently playing.

3Playlist name indicator

Shows the playlist currently playing.

4Track indicator

Shows the number and title of the track cur-

rently playing.

5Playback method indicator

Shows which playback method has been se-

lected.

6Artist name indicator

Shows the name of the artist currently play-

ing. (when available.)

7Play time indicator

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

112

Chapter

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

track.

8Track list and playlist

Shows the track list or the playlist currently

playing or temporary displayed.

The icon on the left indicates that the item

is a “Playlist”, and the icon indicates that

the item is a “Track”.

Title display

Music recognition technology and related

data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is

the industry standard in music recognition

technology and related content delivery. For

more information visit www.gracenote.com.

pIf no title information exists in the Grace-

note®Database on the built-in hard disk

drive, the date when the track was recorded

is entered automatically. If you want to dis-

play the title information, enter the title

manually after recording has finished.

=For details, refer to Changing the title of the

playlist or track on page 119

Relationship of groups, playlists, and

tracks

The music library is organized as follows with

three levels: groups, playlists, and tracks.

There are four types of groups:

!Album group ([Albums]):

Stores the recorded track data in its origi-

nal order. One playlist is automatically cre-

ated when a CD is recorded.

!Artist group ([Artists]):

Stores playlists in which tracks are sorted

by artist names.

!Genre group ([Genres]):

Stores playlists in which tracks are sorted

by genres.

!My Favorite group ([My Favorites]):

Stores playlists registered with your favorite

selection.

!Maximum number you can register

Group Playlist Tracks for a playlist

[Albums] 400 99

[Artists] 400 400

[Genres] 13 400

[My Favorites]5 99

If you try to record one playlist more than

the number listed above, the oldest playlist

will be deleted.

Touch panel key operation

Listening to a track recorded in the

Music Library

%Touch the source icon and then touch

[LIBRARY].

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch panel keys

1Select a desired track from the list

Touch a desired track to play.

pTouching or switches to the next or

previous page in the list.

2Playback and Pause

Touching fswitches between “playback”

and “pause”.

3Touch: Skip the track forward or back-

ward

Touching pskips to the start of the next

track. Touching oonce skips to the start

of the current track. Touching again will

skip to the previous track.

Touch and hold: fast backward or for-

ward

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

En 113

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

pYou can also perform these operations

by using TRK (c/d) button.

4View upper contents

Touching displays the contents of the

upper playlist or group.

pYou cannot touch on the group se-

lection screen.

=For more details about “Relationship of

groups, playlists, and tracks”, refer to

Screen configuration on page 112

5Display group selection screen

You can search a track from categories.

=For more details about “Search for a play-

list”, refer to Searching a track from the play-

list on this page

6Display the details information screen

Displays the information about the track or

playlist displayed in blue on the track list.

On the details information, you can delete

the track or edit the track information.

=For details, refer to Editing a playlist or

tracks on page 117

7Touch and hold: Register the track in

My Mix.

=For details, refer to Registering a track to

“My Mix”playlist in one action on page 116

8Repeat play

Each touch of changes the repeat

range as follows:

!Track Repeat —Repeat just the current

track

!Playlist Repeat —Repeat just the cur-

rent playlist

!No display —Repeat the currently se-

lected group

pRepeat play may stop if you perform an

operation that affects a track outside the

repeating range during track repeat

play.

pIf you perform random play or scan play

during track repeat play, the repeating

range changes to Playlist Repeat.

9Play tracks in random order

The selected tracks in the repeated range

are randomly played.

pRandom play may stop if you perform

an operation that affects a track outside

the repeating range or perform repeat

play or scan play during track repeat

play.

pWhen the range of repeat play is

Track Repeat, if you perform random

play, the repeating range changes to

Playlist Repeat.

Indicator Implication

[Random] only

Tracks of all playlists in the

group are played in random

order.

[Playlist Re-

peat]and[Ran-

dom]

Tracks in the selected play-

list are played in random

order.

aScan play

Scan play will be performed for the selected

repeat range.

pWhen the range of repeat play is

Track Repeat, if you perform scan play,

the repeating range changes to

Playlist Repeat.

pWhen you find the desired track, touch

to turn scan play off.

pAfter track or playlist scanning is fin-

ished, normal playback of the tracks will

begin again.

Indicator Implication

[Scan] only

The beginning of the first

tracks of each playlist in the

group is played for about 10

seconds.

[Playlist Re-

peat]and

[Scan]

The beginning of each track

in the selected playlist is

played for about 10 sec-

onds.

Searching a track from the playlist

Once tracks are recorded, the navigation sys-

tem categorizes them in a “Group”, and sev-

eral types of playlists are automatically

created. A playlist is a list that shows the play-

back order of tracks.

=For more details about “Relationship of

groups, playlists, and tracks”, refer to Screen

configuration on page 112

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

114

Chapter

Searching for an album

Select a playlist formed by an album, and play

it back.

1 Touch [Search].

The group selection screen appears.

2 Touch [Albums].

3 Touch the album name (“Album”play-

list) you want to play back.

The first track in the selected playlist is played

back.

Searching the playlist by artist

Select a playlist formed by an artist, and play it

back.

1 Touch [Search].

The group selection screen appears.

2 Touch [Artists].

“Artist”playlist appears.

3 Touch the artist name (“Artist”playlist)

you want to play back.

The first track in the selected playlist is played

back.

Search a playlist by genre

Select a playlist formed by a genre, and play it

back.

pOnly the genre of a recorded track is dis-

played in a genre playlist.

1 Touch [Search].

The group selection screen appears.

2 Touch [Genres].

“Genre”playlist appears.

3 Touch the genre (“Genre”playlist) you

want to play back.

The first track in the selected playlist is played

back.

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

En 115

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

Creating a playlist with a

customized order

You can register your favorite tracks as a play-

list, and play them back in desired order.

[My Favorites] group has two types of play-

lists.

“My Mix”playlist:

You can register the track being played in one

action.

“My Favorite 1-4”playlist:

You can register tracks from the detailed

screen information.

Registering a track to “My Mix”

playlist in one action

You can register the track being played to the

favorite playlist called “My Mix”.

%Touch and hold [Memo] while playing

back the track you want to register.

The track being played is registered in

“My Mix”playlist.

1 Play back the track you want to regis-

ter.

2 Touch , then touch

[Add to My Favorites].

3 Touch the playlist ([My Favorite 1] to

[My Favorite 4] or [My Mix]) in which you

want to register the track.

4 Touch [Yes].

The track is registered in the selected My Fa-

vorite playlist.

Registering multiple tracks at a time

1 Play back the playlist that contains the

tracks you want to register.

2 Touch to display the list of play-

lists.

3 Touch , then touch

[Add to My Favorites].

The item displayed in blue is the selected play-

list.

4 Touch the playlist ([My Favorite 1] to

[My Favorite 4] or [My Mix]) in which you

want to register the tracks.

5 Touch the tracks you want to register.

When you touch a track, a check mark ap-

pears indicating that it is selected. To deselect

it, touch the track again.

Touch dto proceed to the next operation.

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

116

Chapter

Select All:

Selects all tracks in the playlist.

All Off:

Cancels selection of all tracks in the playlist.

6 Touch [Back].

7 Touch [Yes].

The tracks are registered in the selected

“My Favorite”playlist.

pUp to 99 tracks can be registered in one

“My Favorite”playlist.

Editing a playlist or tracks

You can edit the tracks or playlist recorded in

the Music library.

Only the playlists and tracks in [Albums]

group and [My Favorites] group can be edi-

ted. In [Artist] group, only the pronunciation

of the artist playlist can be edited.

Switching to the edit mode

1 Touch the playlist in [Albums],

[My Favorites], or [Artists].

2 Touch the track you want to edit.

The item displayed in blue is the track cur-

rently playing.

3 Touch .

The system enters the track edit mode.

=For details, refer to Operating the track edit

mode on the next page

4 Touch [Back] to return the previous

screen.

5 Touch to return to the previous

level.

The item displayed in blue is the selected play-

list.

6 Touch .

The system enters the playlist edit mode.

pTo return to the previous screen, touch

[Back].

Operating the playlist edit mode

“Album”playlist:

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

En 117

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

All editing operations are possible. The edited

contents will be reflected to all groups in the

hard disk drive.

45678

“My Mix”playlist, “My Favorite”playlist:

Only 4,6, and 8can be performed.

468

1Enter a desired playlist title

=For details, refer to Changing the title of the

playlist or track on the next page

2Edit the pronunciation that is used as a

voice command for voice recognition

=For details, refer to Changing the pronuncia-

tion of a playlist name or track name on the

3Enter a desired artist name

=For details, refer to Renaming an artist

name in the playlist or track on page 120

4Sort playback order of the playlists

=For details, refer to Sorting the playlists on

page 120

5Delete the playlist

=For details, refer to Deleting a playlist on

page 121

6Delete the selected tracks from that play-

list

=For details, refer to Deleting a track from the

playlist on page 121

7Update title information

=For details, refer to Assigning another candi-

date for title information on page 122

8Add the selected tracks to “My Favorite”

=For details, refer to Registering multiple

tracks at a time on page 116

Operating the track edit mode

“Album”playlist:

All items can be edited except for 5. The edi-

ted contents will be reflected to all groups in

the hard disk drive.

“My Mix”playlist, “My Favorite”playlist:

Only 5,6,8can be performed.

568

1Enter a desired track title

=For details, refer to Changing the title of the

playlist or track on the next page

2Edit the pronunciation that is used as a

voice command for voice recognition

=For details, refer to Changing the pronuncia-

tion of a playlist name or track name on the

3Enter a desired artist name

=For details, refer to Renaming an artist

name in the playlist or track on page 120

4Change genre

=For details, refer to Changing the genre of a

track on page 122

5Change the order to play back tracks

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

118

Chapter

=For details, refer to Sorting the tracks in

“My Mix”(“My Favorite”) playlist on page

121

6Delete the current track

=For details, refer to Deleting the current

track on page 121

7Update track title information

=For details, refer to Assigning another candi-

date for title information on page 122

8Add the track to “My Favorite”

=For details, refer to Register tracks one by

one on page 116

Changing the title of the playlist or track

You can change titles of playlists or tracks. The

titles changed here are displayed on the

screen.

1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track

edit mode.

=For details, refer to Switching to the edit

mode on page 117

2 Touch [Title].

3 Touch [Yes].

The content to be changed in Step 4 can be re-

flected to the voice command.

[No]:

Proceeds to the next step without registering it

as a voice command.

4 Enter a new character string, and then

touch [OK].

pTouch [Small] to enter lowercase letters.

Touch [Caps.] to enter uppercase letters.

Touch to toggle the selection.

The system pronounces the character string

once, and the pronunciation confirmation

message appears.

[No]:

Completes the edit without editing the pronun-

ciation.

[Repeat]:

You can listen to the pronunciation again.

pIf the pronunciation is not the desired one,

edit the characters so that the pronuncia-

tion matches your desired pronunciation.

5 Touch [Yes].

The changed character string is fixed and the

system returns to the previous screen.

Changing the pronunciation of a

playlist name or track name

You can change the pronunciation of a playlist

or track name. The pronunciation is used as a

command for voice recognition.

pOnly pronunciation can be edited for

“Artist”playlist.

pThe navigation system recognizes only the

voice recognition characters registered in

the current language. If you change the in-

terface language, the voice recognition

character registered before you change the

language will not be recognized.

1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track

edit mode.

=For details, refer to Switching to the edit

mode on page 117

2 Touch .

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

En 119

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

3 Enter a new character string, and then

touch [OK].

The system pronounces the character once,

and the pronunciation confirmation message

appears. Touch [Yes] to fix the change.

[No]:

Returns to the detailed information screen.

[Repeat]:

You can listen to the pronunciation again.

pIf the pronunciation is not the desired one,

edit the characters so that the pronuncia-

tion matches your desired pronunciation.

4 Touch [Yes].

The changed character is fixed and the system

returns to the previous screen.

Renaming an artist name in the

playlist or track

You can rename the artist name in the playlist

or track.

1 Enter the playlist edit mode or track

edit mode.

=For details, refer to Switching to the edit

mode on page 117

2 Touch [Artist].

3 Touch [Select from history List].

[Keyboard Input]:

The character input screen appears, and you

can change the artist name with the keyboard.

4 Select an artist name from the list.

The artist name is changed to the one you se-

lected. In the playlist edit mode, touching

[Yes] changes the artist name to the one you

selected.

Sorting the playlists

The playback order of playlists in the group

can be changed.

pIf there is only one playlist, the playback

order cannot be changed.

1 Enter the playlist edit mode.

=For details, refer to Switching to the edit

mode on page 117

2 Touch [Sort Playlists].

3 Touch the playlist that you want to

change the order for.

4 Touch , , ,or to determine the po-

sition you want to put.

Moves playlists by page.

Moves playlists one by one.

5 Touch the selected playlist again.

The position of that playlist is fixed.

6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change the

playback order of other playlists.

7 Touch [ESC].

The new order is fixed, and the system returns

to the normal playback screen.

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

120

Chapter

Sorting the tracks in “My Mix”

(“My Favorite”) playlist

The playback order of tracks in “My Mix”play-

list and “My Favorite”playlist can be chan-

ged.

1 Enter the track edit mode.

=For details, refer to Switching to the edit

mode on page 117

2 Touch [Sort Tracklists].

3 Touch the track that you want to

change.

4 Touch , , ,or to determine the po-

sition you want to put.

5 Touch the selected track again.

The destination is fixed.

6 Repeat Step 3 to Step 5 to change the

playback order of other tracks.

7 Touch [ESC].

The new order is fixed, and the system returns

to the normal playback screen.

Deleting a playlist

You can delete a playlist in [Albums] group.

(You cannot delete playlists in other groups.)

pIf you delete a playlist in [Albums] group,

all tracks in the playlist are deleted from

the hard disk drive. (They are deleted from

[My Favorites] group at the same time.)

pIf you delete the playlist, the system does

not delete the edited title information, such

as album title, artist name, or track name.

1 Enter the playlist edit mode.

=For details, refer to Switching to the edit

mode on page 117

2 Touch [Delete This Playlist].

3 Touch [Yes].

The playlist is deleted.

Deleting a track from the playlist

You can delete tracks from the playlist.

pIf you delete a track in [Albums] group, the

track is deleted from the hard disk drive. (It

is deleted from [My Favorites] group at the

same time.)

pIf you delete the track, the system does not

delete the edited title information.

pIf you delete the tracks in “My Mix”playlist

or “My Favorite”playlist, they are only de-

leted from the playlist, and not from the

hard disk drive.

1 Enter the playlist edit mode.

=For details, refer to Switching to the edit

mode on page 117

2 Touch [Delete Tracks].

3 Touch the tracks you want to delete.

When you touch a track, a check mark ap-

pears indicating that it is selected. To deselect

it, touch the track again.

Touch dto proceed to the next operation.

[Select All]:

Selects all tracks in the playlist.

[All Off]:

Cancels the selection of all tracks in the play-

list.

4 Touch [Back].

5 Touch [Yes].

Deleting the current track

pIf you delete the track, the track is deleted

from the hard disk drive. (It is deleted from

[My Favorites] group at the same time.)

pIf you delete the track, the system does not

delete the edited title information.

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

En 121

Chapter

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

pIf you delete the tracks in “My Mix”playlist

or “My Favorite”playlist, they are only de-

leted from the playlist, and not from the

hard disk drive.

1 Enter the track edit mode.

=For details, refer to Switching to the edit

mode on page 117

2 Touch [Delete This Track].

3 Touch [Yes].

Changing the genre of a track

1 Enter the track edit mode.

=For details, refer to Switching to the edit

mode on page 117

2 Touch [Genres].

3 Select the desired genre from the list.

The genre is changed, and the system returns

to the previous screen.

Assigning another candidate

for title information

If the current title information is not desired

title, you can search for another title informa-

tion from Gracenote®Database in the hard

disk drive manually and assign another candi-

date. If there were multiple options for the title

information, you can select one title from

them.

pMusic recognition technology and related

data are provided by Gracenote®. Grace-

note is the industry standard in music re-

cognition technology and related content

delivery. For more information visit

www.gracenote.com.

pOnce you update the title information, the

information you edit before will be overwrit-

ten by the title information of the Grace-

note®Database.

Gracenote®Database updates are available.

You can download the latest update from

Pioneer website by using your PC. To install the

update, burn the data onto a CD-R(-RW) and

insert it into your navigation system. When you

download the files and install the update, fol-

low the instructions in the website.

1 Select the playlist in [Albums] group,

and enter the playlist edit mode or track

edit mode.

=For details, refer to Switching to the edit

mode on page 117

2 Touch [Update Title].

Information search begins. When the title in-

formation is obtained, the candidates screen

appears.

3 Select the desired album title from the

list.

The title information is updated to the one you

selected.

Using the AV Source (Music Library)

122

Chapter

Operating the XM Satellite

Radio

You can use the navigation system to control

an XM satellite digital tuner, which is sold se-

parately.

For details concerning operation, refer to the

XM tuner’s operation manuals. This section

provides information on XM operations with

the navigation system which differs from that

described in the XM tuner’s operation man-

ual.

Selecting [XM] as the source

%Touch the source icon and touch [XM].

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 97

Screen configuration

GEX-P10XMT, GEX-P920XM

All CH Mode

1234 6

Category Mode

GEX-P910XM, GEX-P900XM

123

About the logo for channel name

Only the logo data that is contained in the na-

vigation system can be displayed for each

channel. The logo of a newly established chan-

nel that is not contained cannot be displayed.

When no logo can be displayed, the following

substitute icon is displayed.

Substitute icon

1Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

2XM band indicator

Shows the XM band which has been selected.

3XM channel number indicator

Shows XM channel number the tuner is cur-

rently tuned to.

4XM station name indicator

Shows XM broadcast station name the tuner

is currently tuned to.

5XM channel select mode indicator

Shows what channel select mode has been

selected. You can select a channel from all

channels in All CH Mode, and select a chan-

nel from selected category in

Category Mode.

=For details, refer to Touch panel key opera-

tion on the next page

6XM channel category

Shows the category of broadcast channel.

7XM station name logo

pThe message “-ON THE AIR-“disap-

pears if the navigation system cannot re-

ceive XM tuner reception for some

reason.

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

En 123

Chapter

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

pIf you use GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM,

the logo for channel name is not avail-

able.

8Detail information

Shows the detailed information of the broad-

cast channel currently being received.

9Category icon

Shows the category icon for the selected

channel.

Touch panel key operation

%Touch the source icon and then touch

[XM] to select the XM.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch panel keys (GEX-P10XMT, GEX-

P920XM)

Page 1 (All CH Mode)

Page 1 (Category Mode)

Page 2

Touch panel keys (GEX-P910XM or GEX-

P900XM)

Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be

used on GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM.

1Touch: Recalling channels from the pre-

set

Touch to recall the preset channel.

pIn All CH Mode, you can also recall the

preset channel by pressing the P.LIST

(a/b) button.

pIn Category Mode, the screen shows

category search.

Touch and hold: Storing broadcast sta-

tions

You can register the channel currently

being broadcast to the preset list.

pUp to 18 stations, 6 for each of three XM

bands can be stored in memory.

pIf you use GEX-P910XM or GEX-P900XM,

the channel number does not appear on

the touch panel key.

2Perform manual tuning

The channels move up or down one at a

time.

pIf you keep touching or

you can skip broadcasting

channels.

pYou can also perform these operations

by using the TRK (c/d) button.

3Switching to the list display*

You can select a desired channel from the

list display.

=For details, refer to Selecting a channel

from the XM channel list display on the next

page

4Switching the XM channel select mode

You can switch the mode between the two

methods for selecting and listing the chan-

nel.

All CH Mode :

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

124

Chapter

You can select a channel from all channels

when you operate.

Category Mode :

You can select a channel within selected ca-

tegory when you operate.

5Select an XM band

Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired

XM band is displayed, XM 1,XM 2 or

XM 3. This is useful for switching the pre-

set.

6Switching the touch panel keys to next

page

7Memorizing the current song*

The song title and artist name being broad-

cast will be memorized in “My Mix”. When a

song that matches the song information

memorized in “My Mix”is broadcast, you

can tune the channel to the one that is

broadcasting that song.

=For details, refer to Memorizing the song

title and the artist name of a song on the

8Setting the notification of the memor-

ized songs*

You can set an alert for the songs memor-

ized in “My Mix”. You can also delete the

memorized song.

=For details, refer to Setting the alert for

each memorized song on the next page

=For details, refer to Deleting the memor-

ized songs on page 127

9Selecting an XM channel directly

You can select an XM channel directly by

entering the desired channel number.

Enter the channel number, touch [Enter],

and then touch [Back].

pTo cancel the input numbers, touch

[Clear].

pThis function in not available with GEX-

P900XM.

aSwitching the touch panel keys to pre-

vious page

bSwitching the channel category

Touch [Up]or[Down] to select the desired

category.

cSwitching the XM information

Each touch of [DISP] changes the display

on the bottom of the detail information as

follows:

GEX-P900XM:

Channel name —Artist name/feature —

Song/program title —Information —Chan-

nel number

GEX-P910XM:

Channel name —Artist name/feature —

Song/program title —Channel category

pThis function is not available with GEX-

P10XMT and GEX-P920XM.

Display the Radio ID

If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-

played.

1 Touch [10Key Direct].

2 Input [000] and then touch [Enter].

If you select another channel, display of the

Radio ID is canceled.

pYou can also display the Radio ID to select

[RADIO ID] from channel category in the

Category Mode.

Selecting a channel from the

XM channel list display

The list content can be switched so you can

search for the track you want to listen to not

only by the channel name but also by the artist

name or song title.

pThe channel list shows all channels during

All CH Mode, and the channels included

in the selected category during

Category Mode. To switch the channel

mode, touch [Mode].

1 Touch [List].

XM channel list appears in the display.

Each touch of [List] changes the settings as

follows:

Detail information display —Ch Name List

(Channel name) —Song Title List (Song title)

—Artist Name List (Artist name)

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

En 125

Chapter

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

2 Touch the desired channel that you

want to listen to.

Touch or to switch to the next page or pre-

vious page.

pDuring Category Mode, touch [Up]or

[Down] to switch to another category.

Using “My Mix”function

“My Mix”function memorizes the song title

and artist name of the song currently being re-

ceived. When the song that matches the mem-

orized song title and artist name is being

broadcast on a station other than the one you

are listening to, you will be alerted, and you

can switch the station to listen to that song.

A track itself is NOT downloaded. ONLY the

song title and the artist name are memorized.

Memorizing the song title and the

artist name of a song

The song title and artist name of the song you

are listening to can be memorized to “My Mix”.

%Touch and hold [Memo].

The song title and artist name of current song

you are listening to are memorized, and a con-

firmation message appears.

pThe song title and artist name of up to 15

songs can be memorized. Trying to save

more than 15 songs will overwrite old ones.

pThe song title or the artist name cannot be

memorized when [————————]is

displayed on the title information.

pThis function invalid for the channel 000.

pThere is a possibility the memorized title is

not displayed correctly.

When the memorized song is broadcast

Alert message is displayed. Touch [Yes]to

switch to that station, and you can listen to

that track.

pIf the memorized song is not selected in

“My Mix”list or [Alert Off] is selected, no

notification will be provided even when that

song is broadcast.

=For details, refer to Setting the alert for

each memorized song on this page

=For details, refer to Switching the alert

setting on this page

pIf there is slight difference between the

memorized title and the title of the song

being broadcast, no notification will be pro-

vided though they are the same song.

pAlert may not be provided depending on

the situation of the navigation system.

Setting the alert for each memorized

song

You can change the setting of the alert when

the track is broadcast again. You can enable

or disable alert for each song.

1 Touch [Memo Edit].

Memorized song list (“My Mix”list) will be dis-

played. If the alert setting for the song is on,

the square on the right is blue. Otherwise, the

square is inactive.

2 Touch the song title that you want to

exclude from the alert target.

The square on the right turn inactive and the

song title is excluded from the alert target.

pIf you touch that again, the square will turn

blue and the song title is included in the

alert target.

Switching the alert setting

You can enable or disable the alert for all

items at once. This function will be useful

when you want to turn the alert off temporarily

without changing the condition of each mem-

orized song.

1 Touch [Memo Edit].

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

126

Chapter

2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].

When the alert setting is [Alert Off],

is displayed on the information plate.

Deleting the memorized songs

You can delete each one of the memorized

songs from the song title list.

1 Touch [Memo Edit].

2 Touch and hold the track you want to

delete.

A message will appear asking you to confirm

the deletion.

pTo delete all songs that are memorized,

touch [Delete All].

3 Touch [Yes].

Using the direct traffic

announcement function

You can listen to the memorized “Instant Traf-

fic & Weather”channel by directly calling it up

with the Tbutton on the navigation unit. (Only

one station can be memorized.)

pThis function is not available with GEX-

P910XM and GEX-P900XM.

Memorize a “Instant Traffic &

Weather”channel

1 Tune into “Instant Traffic & Weather”

channel.

2 Press and hold T button for two sec-

onds or more.

That “Instant Traffic & Weather”channel will

be memorized.

pThe channel 000 and 001 can not be mem-

orized newly (although the channel 001 is

the default).

pEven if you use the SiriusConnect universal

tuner together, only one station can be

memorized. The station memorized after-

ward will overwrite the existing one.

Calling up the memorized “Instant

Traffic & Weather”channel

%Press T button.

pYou can call up a “Instant Traffic & Weather”

channel even from a source other than the

XM source.

pTo cancel the announcement, touch

[TRFC Off] on the screen or press Tbutton

again.

Operating the SIRIUS

Satellite Radio

You can use the navigation system to control a

SiriusConnect universal tuner, which is sold

separately. This section provides information

on SIRIUS operations with the navigation sys-

tem which differs from that described in the

SiriusConnect universal tuner’s operation

manual.

pWhen you use the SiriusConnect universal

tuner (sold separately) with this Navigation

System, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE is

required. For details concerning operation,

refer to the owner’s manual of Pioneer SIR-

IUS BUS INTERFACE and SiriusConnect

universal tuner.

pThe following function is not available if

this navigation system is connected to the

Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE CD-SB10

and the SiriusConnect universal tuner.

—Using Instant Replay function

pThe following functions are not available in

SIR-PNR1.

—Selecting team for game alert

—Displaying game information

—Using the song alert function

—Using the direct traffic announcement

function

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

En 127

Chapter

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

Selecting [SIRIUS] as the source

%Touch the source icon and touch

[SIRIUS].

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 97

Screen configuration

1243

1Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

2SIRIUS band indicator

Shows the SIRIUS band which has been se-

lected.

3SIRIUS channel select mode indicator

Shows what channel select mode has been

selected. You can select a channel from all

channels in All Ch Mode, and select a

channel from the selected category in

Category Mode.

=For details, refer to Touch panel key opera-

tion on this page

4SIRIUS channel number indicator

Shows the SIRIUS channel number that the

tuner is tuned to.

5Detail information

Shows the detail information of the broad-

cast channel currently being received.

pThe message “-ON THE AIR-”disappears if

the navigation system cannot receive SIR-

IUS tuner reception for some reason.

=For details, refer to Troubleshooting on page

174

Touch panel key operation

%Touch the source icon and then touch

[SIRIUS] to select the SIRIUS.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch panel keys

Page 1 (All Ch Mode)

Page 2 (All Ch Mode)

Page 1 (Category Mode)

Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be

used on SIR-PNR1.

1Touch: Recalling channels from the pre-

set

Touch to recall the preset channel.

pIn All Ch Mode, you can also recall the

preset channel by pressing the P.LIST

(a/b) button.

pIn Category Mode, the screen displays

category search.

Touch and hold: Storing broadcast sta-

tions

You can register the channel currently

being broadcast to the preset list.

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

128

Chapter

pUp to 18 stations, 6 for each of three

SIRIUS bands can be stored in memory.

2Perform manual tuning

The channels move up or down one at a

time.

pIf you keep touching or

you can skip broadcasting

channels.

pYou can also perform these operations

by using the TRK (c/d) button.

3Switch the SIRIUS display

Each touch of [DISP] changes the display

information.

Channel number —Channel name —

Channel category —Artist name/feature —

Song/program title —Composer

pTouch and hold to switch ON/OFF the in-

formation scroll.

4Switch the SIRIUS channel select

mode

You can switch the mode between the two

methods for selecting and listing the chan-

nel.

All Ch Mode:

You can select a channel from all channels

when you operate.

Category Mode:

You can select a channel within selected ca-

tegory when you operate.

5Select a SIRIUS band

Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired

SIRIUS band is displayed, SIRIUS 1,

SIRIUS 2,orSIRIUS 3. This is useful for

switching the preset.

6Switch the touch panel keys to next

page

7Select team for game alert*

You can register your favorite team.

=For details, refer to Selecting teams for

Game Alert on this page

=For details, refer to Switching the Game

Alert on or off on the next page

8Display game information*

You can display game information and

changes to the broadcast channel.

=For details, refer to Displaying game infor-

mation (Game Info) on the next page

9Memorize the current song*

The song title and artist name being broad-

cast will be memorized in “My Mix”. When

the song that matches the song informa-

tion memorized in “My Mix”is broadcast,

you can tune the channel to the one that is

broadcasting that song.

=For details, refer to Memorizing the song

title and the artist name of a song on page

131

aSet the notification of the memorized

songs*

You can set the alert for the songs memor-

ized in “My Mix”. You can also delete the

memorized song.

=For details, refer to Setting the alert for

each memorized song on page 131

=For details, refer to Deleting the memor-

ized songs on page 131

bSelect a SIRIUS channel directly

The Channel number input screen appears.

You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by

entering the desired channel number.

While the input number is displayed, touch

[Enter], and then touch [Back].

pTo cancel the input numbers, touch

[Clear].

cSwitch the touch panel keys to previous

page

dSwitch the channel category

Touch [Up]or[Down] to select the desired

category.

Selecting teams for Game Alert

This navigation system can alert you when

games involving your favorite teams are about

to start. To use this function you need to set

the game alert to the teams in advance.

1 Touch [Game Alert].

The League/Team Setting screen appears.

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

En 129

Chapter

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

2 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to select the

league.

3 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to select the

team.

4 Touch [On/Off].

The team displayed as [On] is the alert target.

5 Touch [Alert On].

pWhen the selected team is excluded from

the alert target, the team is displayed as

[Off]. Up to 12 teams can be selected.

When you have already made 12 team se-

lections, Full is displayed and additional

team selection is not possible. In this case,

first delete the team selection and then try

again.

Switching the Game Alert on or off

You can enable or disable the alert for selected

items. This function will be useful when to

turn the alert off temporarily without changing

the setting of each selected team.

1 Touch [Game Alert].

The League/Team Setting screen appears.

2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].

When the alert setting is [Alert Off],

is displayed on the information plate.

When a game involving team is

broadcast

A message is displayed. Touch [Jump]to

switch to that station, and you can view to that

game information. If you touch [Stay], the

channel does not switch.

pAlert may not be provided depending on

the situation of the navigation system.

Displaying game information

(Game Info)

You can display the game information of a

team that you have set an alert for, and change

to the broadcast channel.

pThis function is unavailable if no team is se-

lected in the game alert function.

1 Touch [Game Info].

The game name and the broadcast channel

are also displayed.

2 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to view the

game score information which is regis-

tered.

pThe game score will be updated automati-

cally.

pTouch [Tune To] to switch to the channel

that broadcasts the displayed game.

pIf you have not made any team selections,

Not Set is displayed.

pWhen games involving your favorite teams

are not currently playing, No Game is dis-

played.

Using “My Mix”function

“My Mix”function memorizes the song title

and artist name of the song currently being re-

ceived. When the track that matches the mem-

orized song title and artist name is being

broadcast on a station other than the one you

are listening to, you will be alerted, and you

can switch the station to listen to that song.

pA track itself is NOT downloaded. ONLY the

song title and the artist name are memor-

ized.

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

130

Chapter

Memorizing the song title and the

artist name of a song

The song title and artist name of the current

song you are listening to can be memorized to

“My Mix”.

%Touch and hold [Memo].

The song title and artist name of the song you

are listening to are memorized, and

[Song Saved] is displayed.

pThe song title and artist name of up to 10

tracks can be memorized. If you try to save

more than 10 tracks [FULL] is displayed.

pYou cannot memorize a song that does not

have song title and artist name information.

pThere is a possibility the memorized title is

not displayed correctly.

When the memorized song is broadcast

Alert message is displayed. Touch [Jump]to

switch to that station, and you can listen to

that track. If you touch [Stay], the cannel does

not switch.

pIf the alert for the song is “OFF”or

[Alert Off] is selected, no notification will

be provided even when that song is broad-

cast.

=For details, refer to Setting the alert for

each memorized song on this page

=For details, refer to Switching the alert

setting on this page

pIf there is a slight difference between the

memorized title and the title of the track

being broadcast, no notification will be pro-

vided though they are the same song.

pAlert may not be provided depending on

the situation of the navigation system.

Setting the alert for each memorized

song

You can change the setting of the alert when

the track is broadcast again. You can enable

or disable alert for each song.

1 Touch [Memo Edit].

“My Mix”setting screen will be displayed.

2 Touch [Previous] and [Next] to select

the song title that you want to exclude

from the alert target.

3 Touch [On/Off].

Each touch of [On/Off] turns the alert setting

for the song “On”or “Off”.

Switching the alert setting

You can enable or disable the alert for all

items at the time. This function will be useful

when you want to turn the alert off temporarily

without changing the condition of each mem-

orized song.

1 Touch [Memo Edit].

2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].

When the alert setting is [Alert Off],

is displayed on the information plate.

Deleting the memorized songs

You can delete each one of the memorized

songs.

1 Touch [Memo Edit].

2 Touch [Previous] or [Next] to select the

song title that you want to delete.

3 Touch [Delete This Song] when the

song you want to delete is displayed.

A message will appear asking you to confirm

the deletion.

4 Touch [Yes].

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

En 131

Chapter

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

Using the Traffic & Weather

preset function

You can listen to the memorized Traffic &

Weather channel by directly calling it up with

the Tbutton on the navigation system. (Only

one station can be memorized.)

Memorize a Traffic & Weather channel

1 Tune into the Traffic & Weather chan-

nel.

2 Press and hold T button for two sec-

onds or more.

That Traffic & Weather channel will be memor-

ized.

pEven if you use the XM satellite radio tuner

together, only one station can be memor-

ized. The station memorized afterward will

overwrite the existing one.

Calling up the memorized Traffic &

Weather channel

%Press T button.

pYou can call up a Traffic & Weather channel

even from a source other than the SIRIUS

source.

pTo cancel the announcement, touch

[TRFC Off] on the screen or press Tbutton

again.

Using the AV Source (XM, SIRIUS)

132

Chapter

When Pioneer audio equipment is connected

to the navigation system using IP-BUS or AV-

BUS, such equipment can be operated from

the navigation system. This chapter describes

the operation of the audio source that can be

used when the Pioneer audio equipment is

connected. When reading this chapter, please

also refer to the operation manual of the AV

equipment connected to the navigation sys-

tem.

Operating the Multi-CD Player

You can use the navigation system to control a

multi-CD player, which is sold separately.

pOnly those functions described in this man-

ual are available for multi-CD player. (De-

pending on the multi-CD player, the

function may be invalid.)

Selecting [M-CD] as the source

%Touch the source icon and touch

[M-CD].

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 97

Screen configuration

1523 4

1Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

2Disc number indicator

Shows the disc currently playing.

3Disc title indicator*

Shows the title of the disc currently playing.

4Playback method indicator

Shows which repeat range has been selected.

5Track number indicator

Shows the track currently playing.

6Track title indicator*

Shows the title of the track currently playing.

7Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

track.

8Disc number display

Shows the number of the disc in the multi-CD

player.

pThe titles of the items marked with an aster-

isk (*) will be displayed only when the CD-

TEXT disc is used. When using a normal

music CD, they are displayed as [-].

Touch panel key operation

%Touch the source icon and then touch

[M-CD] to select the multi-CD player.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch panel keys

167

pWhen the multi-CD player has performed

the preparatory operations, Ready is dis-

played.

pIf the multi-CD player does not operate

properly, an error message such as

Error-XX may be displayed. Refer to the

multi-CD player owner’s manual.

pIf there are no discs in the multi-CD player

magazine, No Disc is displayed.

1Change the disc in the magazine

2Playback and Pause

Touching fswitches between “playback”

and “pause”.

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod

, TV)

En 133

Chapter

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod

,TV)

3Touch: Skip forward or backward

Touching pskips to the start of the next

track. Touching oonce skips to the start

of the current track. Touching again will

skip to the previous track.

Touch and hold: fast backward or for-

ward

Keep touching oor pto perform fast

backward or forward.

pYou can also perform these operations

by using TRK (c/d) button.

4Play back the previous disc

The disc before the currently played disc

will be played.

5Play back the next disc

The disc after the currently played disc will

be played.

6Repeat play

Each touch of changes the settings

as follows:

Track Repeat —Repeat just the current

track

Disc Repeat —Repeat the current disc

pIf you select other discs during repeat

play, the repeat play range setting will

be canceled.

pIf you perform track search or fast for-

ward/rewind during Track Repeat, the

repeat play range changes to

Disc Repeat.

7Play tracks in random order

Tracks will play in a random order within

the previously selected repeat ranges.

Indicator Implication

[Random] only

Tracks of all disc in the

magazine are played in

random order.

[Disc Repeat]

and [Random]

Tracks in the selected

disc are played in ran-

dom order.

pIf you perform random play during

[Track Repeat], the repeat play range

changes to [Disc Repeat].

8Scan play

The first 10 seconds of each track of the

current disc (or the first track of each disc)

are played.

Indicator Implication

[Scan] only

The beginning of the

first tracks of each disc

is played for about 10

seconds.

[Disc Repeat]

and [Scan]

The beginning of each

track in the selected

disc is played for about

10 seconds.

pWhen you find the desired track (or disc)

touch to turn scan play off.

pAfter track or disc scanning is finished,

normal playback of the tracks will begin

again.

Operating the iPod®

You can control an iPod by combining the

Pioneer Interface adapter for iPod (sold sepa-

rately) to the navigation system. For details

concerning operation, refer to the owner’s

manual of the Interface adapter for iPod. This

section provides information on iPod opera-

tions with the navigation system that differ

from those described in the owner’s manual

of Interface adapter for iPod.

pWhen you use the iPod (sold separately)

with this Navigation System, Pioneer Inter-

face adapter for iPod is required.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

Selecting [iPod] as the source

%Touch the source icon and touch [iPod].

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 97

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod

, TV)

134

Chapter

Screen configuration

12 345

1Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

2Song number indicator

Shows the number of the song playing in the

selected list.

3Repeat play indicator

Shows whether Repeat is selected for the cur-

rent song or all songs on current list.

4Shuffle play indicator

Shows whether Shuffle play is selected for

songs of albums.

5Album title indicator

Shows the title of the album for the song.

6Artist name indicator

Shows the name of the artist of the current

song.

7Play time indicator

Shows the elapsed playing time of the current

song.

8Song title indicator

Shows the title of the current song.

9Playing Song Information

Shows the information and status of the cur-

rent song.

aSong title, Artist name, and Album title in-

dicator

When playing a song, Song title, Artist name,

and Album title are displayed.

Touch panel key operation

%Touch the source icon and then touch

[iPod] to select the iPod.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch panel keys

1Playback and Pause

Touching fswitches between “playback”

and “pause”.

2Touch: Skip back or forward to another

song

Touching pskips to the start of the next

song. Touching oonce skips to the start

of the current song. Touching again will

skip to the previous song.

Touch and hold: fast forward or rewind

pYou can also perform these operation

with pressing TRK (c/d) button.

3Display the previous screen

Touch on the refine search or other screen

to return to the previous screen.

4Narrow down the songs to play back

You can narrow down the choices of songs

to play from five categories.

=For details, refer to Browsing for a song

on the next page

5Repeat play

Touch repeatedly until the desired re-

peat range appears in the display.

!Repeat One —Repeat just the current

song

!Repeat All —Repeat all songs in the

selected list

6Shuffle play

This function shuffles songs or albums and

plays them in random order.

Each touch of changes the settings

as follows:

!Shuffle Songs —Play back songs in

random order within the selected list

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod

, TV)

En 135

Chapter

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod

,TV)

!Shuffle Albums —Select an album

randomly, and then play back all songs

in that album in order

Browsing for a song

The operations for controlling an iPod with

this navigation system are designed to be

close to iPod operation. This allows you to

search and play songs as you would with an

iPod.

1 Touch [Search].

If you do nothing about 30 seconds after Steps

1 to 4 are finished, the screen returns to the

previous screen.

2 Touch one of the categories in which

you want to search for a song.

!Playlists (playlists)

!Artists (artists)

!Albums (albums)

!Songs (songs)

!Genres (genres)

The search screen is displayed.

The icon on the left indicates that the item

is a “Playlist”, and the icon indicates that

the item is a “Song”.

pIf you select [Songs], proceed to step 4.

pWhen you select [Artists], [Albums]or

[Genres], you can start a playback of all

songs in the selected list. To do this, keep

touching the list title.

3 Touch the title of the list that you want

to play.

Repeat this operation until you find the de-

sired song.

pTo return to the previous screen touch

4 From the song list, touch the song you

want to play.

pTo go to the next page of the list, touch .

pTo return to the previous page of the list,

touch .

Operating the TV tuner

CAUTION

For safety reasons, visual images cannot be

viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view vi-

sual images, you must stop in a safe place and

put on the parking brake before setting your route

(For details, refer to To ensure safe driving on page

22).

You can use the navigation system to control a

TV tuner (e.g. GEX-P6400TV, GEX-P5700TV),

which is sold separately. For details concern-

ing operation, refer to the TV tuner’s operation

manual. This section provides information on

TV operations with the navigation system that

differ from those described in the TV tuner’s

operation manual. When you attempt to watch

visual images while driving, the warning AT-

TENTION! Viewing of front seat video

source while driving is strictly prohibited.

will appear on the screen.

Selecting [TV] as the source

%Touch the source icon and touch [TV].

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 97

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod

, TV)

136

Chapter

Screen configuration

1234

1Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

2Band indicator

Shows which band the TV tuner is tuned to:

TV 1 or TV 2.

3Preset number indicator

Shows which preset has been selected.

4Channel indicator

Shows which channel the TV tuner is tuned

to.

5Preset list display

Shows the preset list.

Touch panel key operation

%Touch the source icon and then touch

[TV] to select the TV tuner.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch panel keys

1Select channels from the list

The list lets you see the list of channels and

select one of them to view.

pTouching or switches to the next or

previous page in the list.

pYou can register your favorite channels

in the list.

=For details, refer to Storing and recalling

broadcast frequencies on this page

2Touch: Perform manual tuning

The channels move up or down one step.

Touch and hold: Perform seek tuning

The tuner will scan the channels until a

broadcast strong enough for good recep-

tion is found.

pIf you keep touching or

you can skip broadcasting

channels. Seek tuning starts as soon as

you release the keys.

pYou can also perform these operations

by using TRK (c/d) button.

3Store the strongest broadcast stations

sequentially

Twelve channels with strong reception sen-

sitivity can be registered automatically in

the preset list.

=For details, refer to Storing the strongest

broadcast stations sequentially on the next

page

4Change band

Touching [Band] switches between “TV 1”

and “TV 2”.

Storing and recalling broadcast

frequencies

If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P1

—P12, you can easily store up to 12 broadcast

stations for later recall with a touch of the key.

%When you find a station that you want

to store in memory keep touching a preset

tuning key P1 —P12.

The selected station is stored in memory. The

next time you touch the same preset tuning

key P1 —P12 the station is recalled from

memory. To switch between P1 —P6 and P7

—P12, touch or . When the touch panel

keys are not displayed, you can display them

by touching the screen.

pUp to 24 stations, 12 for each of two TV

bands can be stored in memory.

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod

, TV)

En 137

Chapter

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod

,TV)

pYou can also press the P.LIST (a/b) button

to recall stations assigned to preset tuning

keys P1 —P12.

Storing the strongest broadcast

stations sequentially

%Touch and hold [BSSM].

BSSM starts. The 12 strongest broadcast sta-

tions will be stored under preset tuning keys

P1 —P12 in order from the lowest channel

up.

pTo cancel the storage process, touch [Can-

cel].

pStoring broadcast stations with [BSSM]

may replace current broadcast stations

stored in preset memory.

Using the AV Source (M-CD, iPod

, TV)

138

Chapter

Operating the AV Input source

CAUTION

For safety reasons, visual images cannot be

viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view vi-

sual images, you must stop in a safe place and

put on the parking brake before setting your route

(For details, refer to To ensure safe driving on page

22).

Selecting [AV INPUT] as the source

1 [AV Input] is set to [Video].

=For details, refer to Setting the video input

on page 150

2 Touch the source icon and touch

[AV INPUT].

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 97

Operating the External Unit

The term “external unit”refers to future

Pioneer devices that are not currently planned

for, or devices that allow control of basic func-

tions although they are not fully controlled by

the navigation system. Two external units can

be controlled by this navigation system. When

two external units are connected, the naviga-

tion system allocates them to external unit 1

or external unit 2.

For details concerning operation, refer to the

external unit’s operation manual. This section

provides information on external unit opera-

tions with the navigation system that differ

from those described in the external unit’s op-

eration manual.

pOperation varies depending on the external

unit connected. (In some cases, the exter-

nal unit may not respond.)

Selecting [EXT 1]or[EXT 2]as

the source

%Touch the source icon and touch [EXT 1]

or [EXT 2].

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 97

Screen configuration

132

1Source icon

Shows which source has been selected.

2External unit indicator

Displays any connected external units.

3Auto/Manual mode indicator

Shows the current mode.

=For details, refer to Switching the automatic

and manual function on the next page

Touch panel key operation

%Touch the source icon and then touch

[EXT 1] or [EXT 2] to select the external

unit.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Touch panel keys

1Send an a,b,c,ordcommand

Touch to operate the external unit.

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

En 139

Chapter

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

pOperation varies depending on the exter-

nal unit connected. (In some cases,

some functions may not be used until

you touch and hold the key.)

2Send a band command

Touch to send a band command to the ex-

ternal unit.

pOperation varies depending on the exter-

nal unit connected. (In some cases, the

external unit may not respond.)

3Send a 1key to 6key command

=For details, refer to Operate the external

unit by using 1key —6key on this page

4Operate the external unit by using

Function 1 to Function 4 key and

Auto/Manual key

=For details, refer to Operate the external

unit by using Function 1 —Function 4 on

this page

=For details, refer to Switching the auto-

matic and manual function on this page

Operate the external unit by

using 1key —6key

The external unit can be operated by transmit-

ting the operating commands set to 1key —6

key.

1 Touch [1] —[6].

2 Touch desired key to operate the exter-

nal unit.

pTo return to the previous screen, touch

[Back].

pOperation varies depending on the external

unit connected. (In some cases, some func-

tions may not be used until you touch and

hold the key.)

Operate the external unit by

using Function 1 —Function 4

The external unit can be operated by transmit-

ting the operating commands set to

Function 1 —Function 4.

pThe operating commands set to Function 1

—Function 4 vary depending on the exter-

nal unit.

1 Touch [Function].

2 Touch [Function 1, 2, 3 or 4].

The operation command is transmitted to the

external unit.

pSome functions may not be used until you

touch and hold the key.

pTo return to the previous screen, touch

[Back].

Switching the automatic and

manual function

You can turn automatic and manual function

on or off.

You can switch between Auto and Manual

functions of the external unit connected.

Initially, this function is set to Auto.

pOperating commands set for Auto and

Manual operations vary depending on the

external unit connected.

1 Touch [Function].

2 Touch [Auto/Manual].

Touching [Auto/Manual] switches between

[Auto] and [Manual].

pOperation varies depending on the external

unit connected. (In some cases, the exter-

nal unit may not respond.)

pTo return to the previous screen, touch

[Back].

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

140

Chapter

Operating the AUX input

source (AUX)

An IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as CD-

RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separately) lets you con-

nect your navigation system to auxiliary equip-

ment featuring RCA output. For more details,

refer to the IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector own-

er’s manual.

Selecting [AUX] as the source

1 [AUX Input] is set to [On].

=For details, refer to Switching the auxiliary

setting on page 150

2 Touch the source icon and touch [AUX].

=For details, refer to Selecting a source on

page 97

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

En 141

Chapter

Using the AV Source (AV, EXT, AUX)

Various settings are available with the audio

source according to your audiovisual needs.

This chapter describes the methods of chan-

ging the various settings and setting the LCD

panel.

AV Setting Overview

The audio visual setting is divided into

[Audio Settings] and [System Settings].

Audio Settings screen

System Settings screen

=For more details about “[Audio Settings]”,

refer to this page to page 146.

=For more details about “[System Settings]”,

refer to page 146 to page 152.

pWhen Preout (the subwoofer controller set-

ting in System Settings menu) is Full, the

Non Fading will be displayed instead of

Sub Woofer.

=For details, refer to Setting the rear output

and subwoofer controller on page 152

When selecting the FM tuner as the source,

you cannot select [Source Level].

How to Operate the Audio

Settings screen

1 Press AV button.

The Navigation screen changes to the Audio

source screen (of any source).

2 Touch [AV Settings].

The AV Settings screen appears.

3 Touch the item you want to change.

4 Change Setting.

(E.g. Equalizer screen)

pTouch [ESC] to return to the selected source

screen currently.

pTouch [Back] to return to the AV Settings

screen.

Customizing the Audio

Settings Items

Using the equalizer

The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization

to match vehicle interior acoustic characteris-

tics as desired.

Recalling equalizer curves

There are six stored equalizer curves which

you can easily recall. Here is a list of the equal-

izer curves:

Equalizer curve

Super Bass

Super Bass is a curve in which only low-range is

boosted.

Powerful (Default)

Powerful is a curve in which low-range and high-

range sounds are boosted.

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

142

Chapter

Natural

Natural is a curve in which low-range and high-range

sounds are slightly boosted.

Vocal

Vocal is a curve in which the mid-range sounds, such

as the human vocal range, are boosted.

Flat

Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.

Custom1

Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-

ate. A separate custom curve can be created. Cus-

tom1 and Custom2 are adjusted equalizer curves that

you create. Adjustments can be made with a 3-band

parametric equalizer.

Custom2

Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-

ate. If you select this curve, the effect is reflected all

audio source.

1 Touch [Equalizer] in Audio Settings

menu.

2 Touch desired equalizer.

pWhen Flat is selected, no supplement or

correction is made to the sound. This is

useful to check the effect of the equalizer

curves by switching alternatively between

Flat and a set equalizer curve.

Adjusting equalizer curves

You can adjust the currently selected equalizer

curve setting as desired.

!A separate Custom1 curve can be created

for each source. If you make adjustments

when a curve Super Bass,Powerful,

Natural,Vocal,Flat,orCustom1 is se-

lected, the equalizer curve settings will be

memorized in Custom1.

!ACustom2 curve can be created common

to all sources. If you make adjustments

when Custom2 curve is selected, the

Custom2 curve will be updated.

pThe adjusted Custom1 curve is memorized

for each of the source selected, but one

curve is shared for the following sources.

!AM and FM

!EXT 1 and EXT 2

!AUX and AV INPUT

In the built-in DVD drive, different curves

can be memorized for a DVD-Video and a

CD (CD-DA or MP3).

You can adjust the center frequency, level

and the Q (curve characteristics) of each

band (Low/Mid/High).

!Band:

You can select the band you want to ad-

just.

!Frequency:

You can select which frequency to be

set as the center frequency.

!Level:

You can adjust the decibel (dB) level of

the selected band.

!Q:

You can select the details of the curve

characteristics. (The following figure

shows the characteristic image.)

1 Touch [Equalizer] in Audio Settings

menu.

2 Touch [Customize].

The details setting screen appears.

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

En 143

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

3 Touch cor dto select the equalizer

band to adjust.

Each time you touch cor dselects equalizer

bands in the following order:

Low —Mid —High

4 Touch cor dto select the desired cen-

ter frequency.

Low:40—80 —100 —160 (Hz)

Mid: 200 —500 —1K —2K (Hz)

High: 3.15K —8K —10K —12.5K (Hz)

5 Touch cor dto adjust the level of the

equalizer band.

Each time you touch cor dincreases or de-

creases the level of the equalization band.

+12dB to –12dB is displayed as the level is in-

creased or decreased.

6 Touch cor dto select the desired [Q].

Touch cor duntil the desired the curve char-

acteristics appears in the display.

Wide2 —Wide1 —Narrow1 —Narrow2

pTo adjust other bands, repeat step 3 to step

Setting the simulated sound stage

You can select the desired effect from various

simulated sound stages, such as Music Studio

or Dynamic Theater. You can also adjust a lis-

tener positioning effect.

Setting a stage that fits your image

1 Touch [Staging] in Audio Settings

menu.

2 Touch desired stage setting.

p[Living Room] setting that emphasizes

mid-range sound hardly has any effect near

the maximum volume level.

pWhen you set staging to an option other

than [Off], the high pass filter (HPF) setting

turns [Off].

=For details, refer to Using the high pass filter

on page 146

Adjusting a position effect

You can select a listener position that you

want to make as the center of sound effects.

1 Touch [Staging] in Audio Settings

menu.

2 Touch [Position].

3 Touch desired position.

Using balance adjustment

You can select a fader/balance setting that

provides an ideal listening environment in all

occupied seats.

1 Touch [FAD/BAL] in Audio Settings

menu.

The FAD/BAL screen appears. When Rear SP

(the subwoofer controller setting in

System Settings menu) is Sub.W,Balance

will be displayed instead of FAD/BAL.

=For details, refer to Setting the rear output

and subwoofer controller on page 152

2 Touch aor bto adjust front/rear

speaker balance.

Each time you touch aor bmoves the front/

rear speaker balance towards the front or the

rear.

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

144

Chapter

Front: 15 to Rear: 15 is displayed as the front/

rear speaker balance moves from front to rear.

When the rear output setting is Rear SP

Sub.W, you cannot adjust front/rear speaker

balance.

=For details, refer to Setting the rear output

and subwoofer controller on page 152

3 Touch cor dto adjust left/right speak-

er balance.

Each time you touch cor dmoves the left/

right speaker balance towards the left or the

right.

Left: 9 to Right: 9 is displayed as the left/right

speaker balance moves from left to right.

Using subwoofer output

This navigation system is equipped with a sub-

woofer output which can be turned on or off.

pWhen the subwoofer output is on, you can

adjust the cut-off frequency, the output

level, and the phase of the subwoofer.

1 Touch [Sub Woofer] in Audio Settings

menu.

When Preout (the subwoofer controller set-

ting in System Settings menu) is Full, you

cannot select [Sub Woofer].

=For details, refer to Setting the rear output

and subwoofer controller on page 152

2 Touch [On] to turn subwoofer output

on.

To turn subwoofer output off, touch [Off].

3 Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select

the phase of subwoofer output.

pIf subwoofer output sound is not clear with

[Normal], change it to [Reverse].

4 Touch cor dto select cut-off fre-

quency.

Each time you touch cor dselects cut-off fre-

quencies in the following order:

50 —80 —125 (Hz)

Only frequencies lower than those in the se-

lected range are output from the subwoofer.

5 Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the output

level of the subwoofer.

+6 to -6 is displayed as the level is increased

or decreased.

Using non fading output

When the non fading output setting is on, the

audio signal does not pass through navigation

system’s low pass filter (for the subwoofer),

but is output through the RCA output.

1 Touch [Non Fading] in Audio Settings

menu.

Only when Preout (the subwoofer controller

setting in System Settings menu) is Full, you

can select [Non Fading].

=For details, refer to Setting the rear output

and subwoofer controller on page 152

2 Touch [On] to turn non fading output

on.

To turn non fading output off, touch [Off].

3 Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the output

level of the non fading.

+6 to -6 is displayed as the level is increased

or decreased.

Adjusting loudness

Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the

low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.

1 Touch [Loudness] in Audio Settings

menu.

2 Touch [On] to turn loudness on.

To turn loudness off, touch [Off].

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

En 145

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

3 Touch cor dto select a desired level.

Each time you touch cor dselects level in

the following order:

Low —Mid —High

Using the high pass filter

When you do not want low sounds from the

subwoofer output frequency range to play

from the front or rear speakers, turn HPF (high

pass filter) on. Only frequencies higher than

those in the selected range are output from

the front or rear speakers.

1 Touch [HPF] in Audio Settings menu.

2 Touch [On] to turn high pass filter on.

To turn high pass filter off, touch [Off].

3 Touch cor dto select cut-off fre-

quency.

Each time you touch cor dselects cut-off fre-

quencies in the following order:

50 —80 —125 (Hz)

When Preout (the subwoofer controller set-

ting in System Settings menu) is Sub.W,HPF

function is effective for front speakers only.

If you change the acoustic field after you set it

once, the high pass filter (HPF) setting turns Off.

Adjusting source levels

Source Level (source level adjustment) lets

you adjust the volume level of each source to

prevent radical changes in volume when

switching between sources.

pSettings are based on the FM tuner volume

level, which remains unchanged.

1 Compare the FM tuner volume level

with the level of the source you wish to ad-

just.

2 Touch [Source Level] in Audio Settings

menu.

3 Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the source vo-

lume.

+8 to -8 is displayed as the source volume is

increased or decreased.

Sources are set to same source level adjust-

ment volume automatically.

!CD and ROM (MP3)

!XM and SIRIUS

!EXT 1 and EXT 2

!AUX and AV INPUT

Customizing the System

Settings Items

System Settings lets you perform system set

up of different settings for navigation system.

How to view and operate the

System Settings

1 Press AV button.

The Navigation screen changes to the Audio

source screen (of any source).

2 Touch [AV Settings].

The AV Settings screen appears.

3 Touch [System Settings].

4 Touch the item you want to change.

The setting change screen appears, or the set-

ting changes by toggling it.

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

146

Chapter

pTouch or to move to the

next or previous page.

5 Change Setting.

pTouch [ESC] to return to the selected source

screen.

pTo return to the previous screen, touch

[Back].

Setting up the built-in DVD drive

You can change the preference for playing a

DVD on the built-in DVD drive.

You can use this menu to change audio, subti-

tle, parental lock, and other DVD settings.

Some changes or settings which you have set

here may be invalid depending on the features

of the DVD disc. For details, see the disc’s in-

structions.

pYou can enter this menu while [DVD] is se-

lected as audio source.

pIf you can enter this menu during DVD

playback, playback will be stopped and re-

turn to the first chapter.

Setting the language

You can set each desired language for subtitle,

audio and menu. If the selected language is

recorded on the DVD, subtitles, audio, and

menu are displayed in that language.

1 Switch the audio source to [DVD].

2 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in

System Settings menu.

3 Touch [Subtitle Language],

[Audio Language] or [Menu Language].

Each language menu is displayed and the cur-

rently set language is selected.

4 Touch the desired language.

When you select [Others], a language code

input display is shown. Input the four digit

code of the desired language then touch

[Enter].

=For details, refer to Language Code Chart for

DVD on page 155

pIf the selected language is not recorded on

the disc, the default language specified on

the disc is output and displayed.

pYou can also switch the subtitle and audio

language by touching [Subtitle]or[Audio]

during playback.

=For more details about “Changing the subti-

tle language during playback (Multi-subtitle)”,

refer to Touch panel key operation on page 105

=For more details about “Changing audio

language during playback (Multi-audio)”, refer

to Touch panel key operation on page 105

Setting assist subtitles on or off

Assist subtitles offer explanations for the au-

rally impaired. However, they are only dis-

played if they are recorded on the DVD.

You can turn assist subtitles on or off as de-

sired.

1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in

System Settings menu.

2 Touch [Assist Subtitle].

Touching [Assist Subtitle] switches between

[On] and [Off].

Setting angle icon display

You can set to display the angle icon on

scenes where the angle can be switched.

1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in

System Settings menu.

2 Touch [Multi Angle].

Touching [Multi Angle] switches between

[On] and [Off].

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

En 147

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

Setting the aspect ratio

There are two kinds of display. A wide screen

display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect)

of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect

of 4:3. If you use a regular rear display has a

TV aspect of 4:3, you can set the aspect ratio

suitable for your rear display. (We recommend

use this function only when you want to fit it to

rear display.)

pWhen using a regular display, select either

Letter Box or Panscan. Selecting 16:9 may

result in an unnatural picture.

1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in

System Settings menu.

2 Touch [TV Aspect].

Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the set-

tings as follows:

!16:9 —Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis-

played as it is (initial setting)

!Letter Box —The picture is in the shape of

a letter box with black bands at the top and

bottom of the screen

!Panscan —The picture is cut short at the

right and left of the screen

pWhen playing discs that do not have a pan-

scan system, the disc is played back with

[Letter Box] even if you select [Panscan]

setting. Confirm whether the disc package

bears the

16 : 9 LB

mark.

Setting the parental lock

Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental

lock to set restrictions so that children cannot

watch a violent and adult oriented scenes. You

can set the parental lock level in steps as de-

sired.

pWhen you set a parental lock level and then

play a disc featuring parental lock, code

number input indications may be dis-

played. In this case, playback will begin

when the correct code number is input.

Setting the code number and level

When you first use this function, register your

code number. If you do not register a code

number, parental lock will not operate.

1 Touch [DVD-V Setup] in

System Settings menu.

2 Touch [Parental Level].

3 Touch [0] —[9] to input a four digit

code number.

4 While the input number is displayed,

touch [Enter].

The code number is registered, and you can

now set the level.

5 Touch any of [1] —[8] to select the de-

sired level.

The parental lock level is set.

!Level 8 —Playback of the entire disc is

possible (initial setting)

!Level 7 —Level 2 —Playback of discs for

children and non-adult oriented discs is

possible

!Level 1 —Only playback of discs for chil-

dren is possible

pIf you want to change the parental level,

enter the registered code number.

Proceed to Step 3.

pWe recommend that you keep a record of

your code number in case you forget it.

pThe parental lock level is recorded on the

disc. You can confirm it by looking at the

disc package, the included literature or the

disc itself. With discs that do not feature a

recorded parental lock level, you cannot

use parental lock.

pWith some discs, parental lock operates to

skip certain scenes only, after which normal

playback resumes. For details, refer to the

disc’s instructions.

pIf you forget the registered code number,

touch [Clear] 10 times on the screen in the

Step 3. The registered code number is can-

celed, letting you register a new one.

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

148

Chapter

Changing the wide screen mode

CAUTION

For safety reasons, these functions are not avail-

able while your vehicle is in motion. To enable

these functions, you must stop in a safe place

and put on the parking brake before setting your

route (Refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22).

%Touch [Wide Mode] in System Settings

menu.

The Wide Mode screen appears.

On the Wide Mode screen, you can select the

following items:

Full,Just,Cinema,Zoom,orNormal

Normal (normal)

A 4:3 picture is displayed normally, giving you

no sense of disparity since its proportions are

the same as that of the normal picture.

Full (full)

A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal di-

rection only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 TV pic-

ture (normal picture) without any omissions.

Just (just)

The picture is enlarged slightly at the center

and the amount of enlargement increases hor-

izontally toward the ends of the picture, en-

abling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without

sensing any disparity even on a wide screen.

Cinema (cinema)

A picture is enlarged by the same proportion

as Full or Zoom in the horizontal direction

and by an intermediate proportion between

Full and Zoom in the vertical direction; ideal

for a cinema-sized picture (wide screen pic-

ture) where captions lie outside the frame.

Zoom (zoom)

A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same propor-

tion both vertically and horizontally; ideal for a

cinema-sized picture (wide screen picture).

pDifferent settings can be memorized for

each video source.

pWhen video is viewed in a wide screen

mode that does not match its original as-

pect ratio, it may appear differently.

pRemember that use of this system for com-

mercial or public viewing purposes may

constitute an infringement on the author’s

rights protected by the Copyright Law.

pVideo may appear grainy when viewed in

Cinema or Zoom mode.

pThe navigation map and the rear view cam-

era picture is always Full.

Setting for rear view camera

The following two functions are available. The

rear view camera feature requires a separately

sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC2). (For de-

tails, consult your dealer.)

Camera for backing up

The navigation system features a function that

automatically switches to the full-screen rear

camera image installed on your vehicle. When

the shift lever is in the REVERSE (R) position,

the screen automatically switches to full-

screen rear view camera.

Camera for Rear view mode

[Rear View] can be displayed at all times (e.g.

when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a

split screen where map information is partially

displayed. Please be aware that in this setting,

camera image is not resized to fit, and that a

portion of what is seen by the camera is not

viewable.

CAUTION

Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which

outputs mirror reversed images, otherwise screen

image may appear reversed.

pImmediately confirm whether the display

changes to a rear view camera image when

the shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R)

from another position.

pWhen the screen changes to full-screen

rear view camera image during normal

driving, switch to the opposite setting in

[Polarity].

pInitially, this function is set to [Off].

1 Touch [Camera Input] in

System Settings menu.

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

En 149

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

2 Touch [On] to turn rear view camera

setting on.

pUnless this setting is [On], you cannot

switch to Rear View mode.

3 Touch [Polarity] to select an appropriate

setting for polarity.

Each time you touch [Polarity] switches be-

tween the following polarity:

!Battery —When the polarity of the con-

nected lead is positive while the shift lever

is in the REVERSE (R) position

!GND —When the polarity of the connected

lead is negative while the shift lever is in

the REVERSE (R) position

Setting the video input

You can switch the setting according to the

connected component.

pSelect [Video] to watch video of a con-

nected component as AV INPUT source.

%Touch [AV Input] in System Settings

menu.

Each touch of [AV Input] changes the set-

tings as follows:

!Off —No video component is connected

!Video —External video component

!EXT —Pioneer external unit connected

with an RCA video cable

pWhen a Pioneer external unit is connected

with an IP-BUS cable, select [EXT]. When

the audio source is [EXT], the “Video

image”of the Pioneer external unit can be

displayed.

Switching the auxiliary setting

It is possible to use auxiliary equipment with

the navigation system as the one of sources.

Activate the auxiliary setting when using aux-

iliary equipment connected to the navigation

system.

%Touch [AUX Input] in System Settings

menu.

Touching [AUX Input] switches between [On]

and [Off].

=For details, refer to Selecting [AUX] as the

source on page 141

Switching the muting/

attenuation timing

You can mute the audio source volume or at-

tenuate the output signal. This setting is inva-

lid for the mute signal has been received from

the MUTE lead connected to the navigation

unit. (Even if this setting is [Off], the naviga-

tion system will mute or attenuate the audio

source volume when the signal is output via

MUTE lead.)

%Touch [Mute Set] in System Settings

menu.

Each touch of [Mute Set] changes the set-

tings as follows:

!Guide/Tel/VR —The volume is muted or at-

tenuated according to the following condi-

tions

—When the navigation outputs the gui-

dance voice.

—When you use a cellular phone via Blue-

tooth technology (dialing, talking, in-

coming call).

—When the voice recognition mode is ac-

tivated.

!Tel/VR —The volume is muted or attenu-

ated according to the following conditions

—When you use a cellular phone via Blue-

tooth technology (dialing, talking, in-

coming call).

—When the voice recognition mode is ac-

tivated.

!Off —The volume does not change

pOperation returns to normal when the cor-

respond action is ended.

pThe navigation voice guidance itself cannot

be attenuated or muted. If you want to mute

the navigation guidance voice temporarily,

use on the navigation map screen.

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

150

Chapter

Switching the muting/

attenuation level

You can select the muting/attenuation level of

[Mute Set]. This setting is also effective for a

mute signal that has been received from the

MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit.

pThis menu is not available in the following

cases:

—Audio source is [OFF]

—During muting/attenuation

—[5.1Ch Setup]is[On]

%Touch [Mute Level] in System Settings

menu.

Each touch of [Mute Level] changes the set-

tings as follows:

!All —The volume becomes 0

!–20dB —The volume becomes 1/10

!–10dB —The volume becomes 1/3

pWhen you select [All], [Mute] is displayed

and no audio adjustments are possible dur-

ing the sound is turned off.

pWhen you select [–20dB]or[–10dB], no

audio adjustments, except volume control,

are possible during the sound is attenu-

ated.

pOperation returns to normal when the cor-

respond action is ended.

pEven when a mute signal has been received

from MUTE lead connected to the naviga-

tion unit, navigation voice guidance cannot

be attenuated or muted. If you want to mute

the navigation guidance voice temporarily,

use on the navigation map screen.

Changing the voice output of

the navigation guidance

You can set the speaker to output the naviga-

tion guidance and phone voice, etc.

%Touch [Guide/Tel SP] in System Settings

menu.

Each touch of [Guide/Tel SP] changes the set-

tings as follows:

!Left SP —Uses only the front left speaker

!Right SP —Uses only the front right speak-

!L+R SP —Uses both the front right and left

speakers

Switching the auto antenna

setting

If the blue lead of the navigation system is

connected to the antenna control terminal of

the vehicle, select either of the following set-

tings.

!Radio —The antenna extends or turns on

only when the audio source is FM or AM.

The antenna is stored or turned off when

the source is switched to another.

!Power —The antenna extends or turns on

when the ignition switch is turns on. The

antenna is stored or turned off when the

ignition switch is turned off.

%Touch [Auto ANT] in System Settings

menu.

Touching [Auto ANT] switches between

[Radio] and [Power].

pRegardless of whether [Radio]or[Power]

is selected, turning off the ignition switch

will cause the antenna to automatically re-

tract or turn off.

Setting the clock display on the

video image

You can select whether to display the clock on

the video image screen without touch panel

keys, such as DVD-Video, AV INPUT, or TV

tuner.

%Touch [Clock DISP] in System Settings

menu.

Touching [Clock DISP] switches between

[All SCRN] and [Audio SCRN].

!All SCRN —The clock is overlaid on the

“Video image”

!Audio SCRN —The clock is not overlaid on

the “Video image”

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

En 151

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

Setting the CD recording mode

You can set whether to start recording tracks

automatically when you play a CD, or to manu-

ally trigger recording.

%Touch [REC Mode] in System Settings

menu.

Each touch of [REC Mode] changes the set-

tings as follows:

!Auto —Records the tracks automatically

when a CD is played

!Manual —Lets you select the tracks you

want to record manually, and records them

!Single —Automatically records only the

first track of the CD

Setting the rear output and

subwoofer controller

The navigation system’s rear output can be

used for full-range speaker or subwoofer con-

nection. If you switch Rear SP setting to

Sub.W, you can connect a rear speaker lead

directly to a subwoofer without using an auxili-

ary amp.

Initially, the navigation system is set for rear

fullrange speaker connection. When rear out-

put is connected to full-range speakers (when

Rear SP setting is Full), you can connect the

RCA subwoofer output (SUBWOOFER OUT-

PUT or NON-FADING OUTPUT) to a subwoofer.

In this case, you can select whether to use the

subwoofer controller’s (low pass filter, phase)

built-in amp of the navigation system or the

auxiliary amp or subwoofer.

pIf you change the subwoofer controller

[Rear SP]or[Preout], [Sub Woofer]or

[Non Fading]inAudio Settings menu re-

turn to the factory settings.

pBoth rear speaker leads output and RCA

rear output are switched simultaneously in

this setting.

pRear SP can be set only when the source is

[OFF].

1 Touch [Rear SP] in System Settings

menu.

2 Touch [Full] or [Sub.W] to switch the

rear output setting.

pWhen no subwoofer is connected to the

rear output, select Full. When a subwoofer

is connected to the rear speaker leads di-

rectly, select Sub.W.

3 Touch [Preout] to switch the subwoofer

output or non fading output.

pWhen [Rear SP] setting is Sub.W,[Preout]

is invalid.

pEven if you change this setting, there is no

output unless you turn [Non Fading]or

[Sub Woofer]inAudio Settings menu

[On].

=For details, refer to Using non fading output

on page 145

=For details, refer to Using subwoofer output

on page 145

Switching the 5.1ch setting

When the navigation system is combined with

the multi-channel processor system (sold se-

parately), you can use the multi-channel

sound.

Enter the following setting when combining

the multi-channel processor system.

CAUTION

DO NOT enter this setting before you connect the

multi-channel processor system. (If this setting is

entered, the RCA (“SUBWOOFER OUTPUT or

NON-FADING OUTPUT”) will output maximum vo-

lume for the multi-channel processor system.)

Pioneer is not responsible for any damage to the

speaker equipment caused by ignoring this warn-

ing.

pThis setting is possible only when the opti-

cal cable connection box (supplied with the

Multi-channel processor) is connected to

the navigation system.

1 Touch the source icon and then touch

[OFF] to turn source off.

When the source icon is not displayed, you

can display it by touching the screen.

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

152

Chapter

2 Touch [5.1Ch Setup] in the System Set-

tings menu.

If you touch [5.1Ch Setup], it will be turned

[On]. If you touch [5.1Ch Setup] again to turn

[Off] the setting, [5.1Ch Setup] will disappear.

If you want to turn it [On] again, you have to

repeat the procedure from the Step1.

Other Functions

Selecting the video for “Rear

display”

You can choose either to show the same

image as the front screen or to show the se-

lected source on the “Rear display”.

1 Press AV button to switch Audio opera-

tion screen.

2 Touch the source icon and then touch

[REAR SCREEN].

Each touch of [REAR SCREEN] changes the

settings as follows:

!MIRROR —The video on the front screen of

the navigation unit is output to the “Rear

display”

!DVD —The video and sound of the DVDs

are output to the “Rear display”

!AV —The video and sound of AV INPUT

are output to the “Rear display”

pWhen MIRROR is selected, the following re-

strictions are applied to “Rear display”.

—When the TV tuner is connected with

AV-BUS, its “Video image”cannot be

output. (Connect the TV tuner’s rear out-

put to “Rear display”directly.)

—When selecting [Rear View] in the map

display, nothing is displayed.

—All sounds cannot be output for “Rear

display”.

—There is no picture on “Rear display”

while [Picture Adjust] for

[Back-Camera] is carried out.

—The map screen navigation images out-

put to the “Rear display”differ from

standard NTSC format images. There-

fore, their quality will be inferior to the

images that appear on the front screen.

pWhen DVD is selected, the following re-

strictions are applied to “Rear display”.

—When a CD or MP3 disc is set in the

built-in DVD drive, nothing is output.

pWhen AV is selected, the following restric-

tions are applied to “Rear display”.

—The “Video image”and sound are output

only when AV INPUT has both video and

sound.

—The “Video image”and sound are output

only when the appropriate setting on

[AV Input]is[Video].

Operating the picture adjustment

CAUTION

For safety reasons, these functions are not avail-

able while your vehicle is in motion. To enable

these functions, you must stop in a safe place

and put on the parking brake before setting your

route (Refer to To ensure safe driving on page 22).

You can adjust the picture for each source and

rear view camera.

1 Press V button to display Picture Adjust

screen.

!Brightness —Adjusts the black intensity

!Contrast —Adjusts the contrast

!Color —Adjusts the color saturation

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

En 153

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

!Hue —Adjusts the tone of color (red is em-

phasized or green is emphasized)

!Dimmer —Adjusts the brightness of dis-

play

![Back-Camera]—Shows the picture ad-

justment display for the rear view camera

pTouching [Source] while adjusting the rear

view camera image returns you to the pre-

vious screen.

pThe adjustments of Brightness,Contrast

and Dimmer are stored separately when

your vehicle’s headlights are off (daytime)

and when your vehicle’s headlights are on

(nighttime). These are switched automati-

cally depending on the vehicle’s headlights

are on or off.

pYou cannot adjust Color and Hue for the

source without a video and navigation map

display.

pThe setting contents can be memorized se-

parately for the following screen and the

“Video image”.

—AM/FM/M-CD/iPod/AUX/XM/SIRIUS

screen

—LIBRARY (Music Library) screen

—Built-in DVD drive

—TV image

—AV INPUT and EXT 1,EXT 2

—Rear view camera image

—Navigation map and menu screen

pThe picture adjustment may not be avail-

able with some rear view cameras.

pBecause of the LCD screen characteristics,

you may not be able to adjust the screen at

low temperatures.

2 Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the desired

item.

Each time you touch [+]or[-] increases or de-

creases the level of the desired item.

3 Touch [ESC] to return to the previous

screen.

Switching the backlight on or off

By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,

you can turn off the screen display and the

voice guidance.

%Press and hold V button.

The backlight turns off, and the screen turns

off.

pPress Vbutton once again to turn on the

backlight, and the screen is displayed.

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

154

Chapter

Language Code Chart for DVD

Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Language (code), input code

Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619

English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721

French (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813

Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814

German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Rumanian (ro), 1815

Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823

Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901

Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904

Portuguese (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sango (sg), 1907

Swedish (sv), 1922 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908

Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Shinghalese (si), 1909

Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911

Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912

Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913

Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914

Afrikaans (af), 0106 Georgian (ka), 1101 Somali (so), 1915

Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Albanian (sq), 1917

Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918

Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati (ss), 1919

Aymara (ay), 0125 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920

Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921

Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923

Belorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Tamil (ta), 2001

Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 Telugu (te), 2005

Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 Tajik (tg), 2007

Bislama (bi), 0209 Laotian (lo), 1215 Thai (th), 2008

Bengali, Bangla (bn), 0214 Lithusnian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009

Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian, Lettish (lv), 1222 Turkmen (tk), 2011

Breton (br), 0218 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Tagalog (tl), 2012

Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014

Corsican (co), 0315 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Tongan (to), 2015

Czach (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Turkish (tr), 2018

Welsh (cy), 0325 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Tsonga (ts), 2019

Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Tatar (tt), 2020

Bhutani (dz), 0426 Marathi (mr), 1318 Twi (tw), 2023

Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111

Estonian (et), 0520 Maltese (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118

Basque (eu), 0521 Burmese (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126

Persian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209

Finnish (fi), 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 Volapuük (vo), 2215

Fiji (fj), 0610 Norwegian (no), 1415 Wolof (wo), 2315

Faroese (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408

Frisian (fy), 0625 Oromo (om), 1513 Yoruba (yo), 2515

Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu), 2621

Scottish Gaelic (gd), 0704 Panjabi (pa), 1601

Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl), 1612

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

En 155

Chapter

Customizing the Audio Setting related with Audio Visual

To Ensure Safe Driving

CAUTION

For safety reasons, Voice Help menu (Voice Reco-

g.Help) is not available while your vehicle is in

motion. To enable this function, you must stop in

a safe place and put on the parking brake before

setting your route.

Depending on the selected languages, the

commands that you registered before may not

be available.

=For details, refer to Available Voice Com-

mands on page 159

Basics of Voice Operation

Your Pioneer navigation system uses the latest

in voice recognition technology. You can use

voice commands to operate many of its func-

tions. This chapter describes where you can

use voice commands, and also what com-

mands the system accepts.

Flow of voice operation

You can start voice operation any time even

when the map screen is displayed or audio is

operated. (Some operations are not available.)

The basic steps of voice operation are as fol-

lows.

1 Touch VOICE icon to activate voice op-

eration.

2 Speak a command into the microphone

after the beep.

3 When the command is recognized, the

navigation system displays the response

message on the screen, and pronounces it

in some cases.

4 As necessary, repeat Step 3.

5 The requested operation will be carried

out.

pThe voice operation may not be operable for a

minute after the navigation system has booted

up.

pIf you operate using “CD-SR1”Steering Re-

mote Control (sold separately), the following

buttons can be used for operation:

VR ACTIVATION / OFF HOOK button:

Same function as VOICE icon.

VR CANCEL / ON HOOK button:

Return to previous screen.

To start voice operation

No sounds can be output during .

%Touch VOICE icon.

Navigation screen

Audio screen

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

156

Chapter

pDepending on the operating state of the na-

vigation system, some commands dis-

played in Voice Help may be unavailable.

Available commands are in white and una-

vailable commands are in gray.

When using voice operation for the

first time

Until you are familiar with this system, it is re-

commended that you stop the vehicle in a safe

place and refer to the commands displayed in

the Voice Help menu (a list of the words you

can speak). When your vehicle is parked with

the parking brake on, see the Voice Help

menu and speak voice command on that

menu (except for some cases).

Voice Help menu

VOICE icon

!When voice command is possible

!When voice command is not accepted

pWhen you say “Voice Help”, the navigation

system pronounces the displayed words

that can be vocalized.

pIf no voice icon is displayed, check to see

whether the microphone is properly con-

nected and turn the power on again.

pIf there are multiple pages, the voice help

menu can be switched by using or

on the screen. You can also switch

the page by saying “Next page”or “Pre-

vious page”.

pIf you say “Back”or touch [Back], the

screen returns to the previous screen.

To cancel voice operation

You can cancel voice operation features at any

time by saying “Cancel”. After you cancel

voice operation, the map is displayed.

pIf no command is made in the next 6 sec-

onds or the recognition fails three times

successively, the voice recognition

switches to standby mode. To reactivate

voice operation, touch VOICE icon.

Tips for Voice Operation

For your voice commands to be correctly re-

cognized and interpreted, ensure that condi-

tions are suitable for recognition.

Reduce the volume setting on your

vehicle audio system

=For details, refer to Switching the muting/at-

tenuation timing on page 150

Close the vehicle windows

Please note that wind through the vehicle win-

dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the

vehicle can interfere with voice operation.

Position the microphone carefully

For optimum pick-up, the microphone should

be fixed at a suitable distance directly in front

of the driver.

Pause before giving a command

Speaking too soon may cause the recognition

to fail.

Pronounce your commands carefully

Speak slowly, deliberately, and clearly.

pIf the registered voice command and the

default voice command is the same, the re-

gistered voice command (e.g. the pronun-

ciation for the entry in “Address Book”and

the playlist in Music library ) will take prior-

ity. In this case, the default voice command

will not function. To use the default voice

command, change or delete the registered

voice command that is identical to the de-

fault voice command.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

En 157

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

An Example of Voice

Operation

Search for POI in vicinity

In this example, you want to search for the

nearest gas station and set it as your destina-

tion.

pGive the following verbal commands after

switching to the navigation screen.

=For details, refer to Voice commands related

to navigation on page 161

1 Press MAP button to display the navi-

gation map screen.

2 Touch VOICE icon.

A list of commands for voice operation ap-

pears. After the message, the beep indicates

that the system is ready to accept your voice

command. Say a command after this beep.

3 Say “Destination”.

A message to prompt the next operation is

given.

pIf you say “Back”or touch [Back], the

screen returns to the previous screen.

4 Say “Vicinity Search”.

Say the corresponding commands for the

function you want to operate. Here, the selec-

tion method of your destination is specified.

When you want to search the gas station near-

est to the current location, say “Vicinity

Search”.

The message “Vicinity search. Please re-

quest POI category.”appears, and the naviga-

tion system pronounces that message.

5 Say “GAS Station”.

The message “Vicinity search. Gas Station”

appears.

The map of the nearest gas station is shown.

pFor categories that can be used as the voice

commands, refer to “Category list for vicinity

search”.

=For details, refer to Category list for vicinity

search on page 172

6 Touch VOICE icon.

7 Say “Next”or “Previous”to select the

desired facilities.

8 After confirming the location, say “Set

As Destination”.

If there is no route, the system starts the route

calculation. If the route is already set, touch

VOICE icon to start route calculation.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

158

Chapter

Search for the playlist

In this example, you want to search for a play-

list and play that playlist.

1 Touch VOICE icon when the audio

source is “LIBRARY”.

2 Say “Music Search”.

3 Say the desired group.

pIf the desired group is already selected, you

can skip this step.

4 Say the name of the playlist you want

to play.

pIf there are multiple pages, voice help menu

can be switched by using or on

the screen. You can also switch the page by

saying “Next page”or “Previous page”.

pYou can also search the track in the current

playlist by saying “Track Search”.

Available Voice Commands

This section describes the flow and available

commands of each voice operation.

pWhen [Language]in[Regional Settings]

is changed to another language, the com-

mands that you registered can be used

only if the language for voice operation is

the same.

pFor <City Name>, <Street Name>,

<House number> shown on the following

chart, say the real name or number which

you want to search for. For example, if the

real city name is “Long Beach”and you

want to operate “Search by address,”say

“Long Beach”instead of <City Name>.

pFor <POI Name> shown on the following

chart, say the real POI name that you want

to search for. For example, if the real POI

name is “San Francisco International Air-

port”and you want to operate “Go to <POI

Name>,”say “Go to San Francisco Interna-

tional Airport”(or “Go to SFO”). You can vo-

calize <POI Name> included in the

following categories only.

—Railway Station, City Center, Airport,

Ferry Terminal, Airline Access, Golf

Courses, Shopping Center, Parks, and

Recreation Area

pFor <Registered location’s pronunciation>

shown on the following chart, say the regis-

tered pronunciation. For example, if the re-

gistered pronunciation in address book is

“My office”and you want to operate

“Search by entry on the address book”, say

“My office”. You can hear and edit the pro-

nunciation.

=For details, refer to Changing a pronun-

ciation on page 62

pFor <Registered phone book’s pronuncia-

tion> shown on the following chart, say

the registered pronunciation. For example,

if the registered pronunciation in phone

book is “My friend”and you want to operate

“Telephone Book”, say “My friend”. You can

hear and edit the pronunciation.

=For details, refer to Editing the entry in

“Phone Book”on page 84

pFor <Album playlist name>, <Artist play-

list name>, <Track name> shown on the

following chart, say the name in the music

library (if you edited their pronunciation,

say their pronunciation). You can hear and

edit the pronunciation.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

En 159

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

=For details, refer to Changing the pronun-

ciation of a playlist name or track name on

page 119

pFor <Category Name>and <Sub Category

Name> in “Vicinity Search”, refer to “Cate-

gory list for vicinity search”and say the de-

sired category in that list.

pYou can skip the commands with the mark

(*). For example, in case search by Point of

interest, the system can recognize the com-

mand even if you say “POI”without saying

“Destination”.

pIf some candidates have been found, the

candidate list appears. Select the one from

the list and proceed to next step.

pDuring the voice operation, location screen

(A) or (B) may appear. In such a case, go to

“Location screen (A) and (B)”in the later

section, and continue the voice operation.

=For details, refer to Location screen (A)

and (B) on page 167

pThe voice operations related the telephone

are available only using hands-free phoning

feature of this system and is unavailable

during a call.

=For details, refer to Using Hands-free

Phoning on page 77

pTerms written in italics are voice com-

mands.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

160

Chapter

Basic commands for voice operation

The following verbal commands can be used

both in navigation screen and audio operation

screen.

Basic commands

Back dReturn the previous screen.

Cancel dCancel the voice operation.

Current Location dReturn the current location map screen.

Voice Help dPronounces the display words that can be vocalized.

Next Page,Previous Page dSwitch the page of Voice Help Menu.

Voice commands related to navigation

Give the following verbal commands after

switching to the navigation screen.

Search by address

Destination*dAddress d<City Name>d<Street Name>d<House Number>dLocation Screen (A)

Notes:

!Select the state, province or territory manually before the voice operation.

!When you say the street name, say the street type together <e.g. XXXX street,xxxx avenue,xxxx road,xxxxx boulevard,

etc. >

!Some operation may be skipped depending on the address.

!If you don’t know the street name or house number, you can say “Area”so that your destination can be set to the

main point of that city or street.

Search by Points of interest

Destination*dPOI d<POI Name>dLocation Screen (A)

Destination*dPOI dGo To <POI Name>dIf the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. If

there is no route, the system starts the route calculation.

Destination*dPOI dWaypoint <POI name>dTouch VOICE icon to start route calculation.

Making phone call to POI

Destination*dPOI dCall <POI name>dTouch VOICE icon to call that facility (Only when the phone number is re-

gistered in the facility.)

Displaying the map of POI

Destination*dPOI dDisplay <POI name>dDisplay the map of that facility’s surroundings.

Search by telephone number

Destination*dTelephone Number dSay the telephone number you want to search. dLocation Screen (A) (If multi-

ple facilities exist with the same phone number, the facilities you intend may not be displayed.)

Note:

You can say 10 digits telephone number only. 911 and the number other than 10 digits is not available.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

En 161

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Search by entry on the address book

Destination*dAddress Book*d<Registered location’s pronunciation>dLocation Screen (A)

Destination*dGo To <Registered location’s pronunciation>dIf the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start

route calculation. If there is no route, the system starts the route calculation.

Destination*dWaypoint <Registered location’s pronunciation>dTouch VOICE icon to start route calculation.

Making phone call to entry on the address book

Destination*dCall <Registered location’s pronunciation>dIf the registered location has telephone number data,

touch VOICE icon to call the registered location.

Displaying the map of the entry on the address book

Destination*dDisplay <Registered location’s pronunciation>dDisplay the map of surroundings on that facility.

Search the facilities in vicinity

Destination*dVicinity Search d<Category Name>, <Sub Category Name>dLocation Screen (B)

Displaying the destination history

Destination*dDestination History dDisplay the Destination History screen.

Setting the route to your home

Destination*dReturn Home dIf the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. (If there is no

route, the system starts the route calculation.)

Making phone call to your home

Destination*dCall Home dTouch VOICE icon to call your home (Only when the phone number is registered in your

home.)

Setting your home to waypoint

Destination*dWaypoint Home dTouch VOICE icon to start route calculation. (This function is only available if you

have set the destination.)

Display the map of surroundings on your home

Destination*dDisplay Home dDisplay the map of surroundings on your home.

Display the map of surroundings on your destination

Destination*dDisplay Destination dDisplay the map of surroundings on your destination.

Set the map location as your destination

Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen. dBasic Operation*dSet As Destina-

tion dIf the route already set, touch VOICE icon to start route calculation. If there is no route, the system starts the

route calculation.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

162

Chapter

Set the map location as your waypoint

Scroll the navigation map or switch the scroll mode from search result screen. dBasic Operation*dSet As Waypoint

dTouch VOICE icon to start route calculation.

Registering the map location to the address book

Basic Operation*dRegistration dThe system register that point and Information edit screen appears.

Operating the navigation map scale

Map Operation*dChange Scale*dXXXX kilometer(s) Scale <25meters Scale, 50meters Scale, 100meters Scale, 200me-

ters Scale, 500meters Scale, 1kilometer Scale, 2kilometers Scale, 5kilometers Scale, 10kilometers Scale, 20kilometers Scale,

50kilometers Scale, 100kilometers Scale, 200kilometers Scale, 500kilometers Scale, 1000kilometers Scale, 2000kilometers

Scale>dMap screen will be changed to selected scale.

Notes:

!These commands are available only when [km / mile] setting is [km].

!This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode.

Map Operation*dChange Scale*dXXXX mile(s) Scale <0.02miles Scale, 0.05miles Scale, 0.1miles Scale, 0.25miles

Scale, 0.5miles Scale, 0.75miles Scale, 1mile Scale, 2.5miles Scale, 5miles Scale, 10miles Scale, 25miles Scale, 50miles

Scale, 100miles Scale, 250miles Scale, 500miles Scale, 1000miles Scale>dMap screen will be changed to selected

scale.

Notes:

!These commands are available only when [km / mile] setting is [mile].

!This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode.

Map Operation*dChange Scale*dXXXX mile/yards Scale <25yards Scale, 50yards Scale, 100yards Scale, 0.25miles

Scale, 0.5miles Scale, 0.75miles Scale, 1mile Scale, 2.5miles Scale, 5miles Scale, 10miles Scale, 25miles Scale, 50miles

Scale, 100miles Scale, 250miles Scale, 500miles Scale, 1000miles Scale>dMap screen will be changed to selected

scale.

Notes:

!These commands are available only when [km / mile] setting is [Mile&Yard].

!This function is not available in vehicle dynamics mode.

Map Operation*dChange Scale*dZoom Out,Zoom In dMap screen will zoom out or zoom in.

Operating the view mode

Map Operation*dChange View Mode*dMap View,Driver’s View,2D Twin Map View,3D Twin Map View,Route View,

Guide View,Rear View,Vehicle Dynamics dMap screen will be changed to selected view mode.

Operating the map orientation

Map Operation*dHeading Up,North Up dMap orientation will be changed.

Recalculating the route

Route Options*dChange Route*dRerouting,Use Main Road,Use Fast Route,Use Short Route,Use Freeway,Avoid

Freeway,Use Ferry,Avoid Ferry,Use Toll Road,Avoid Toll Road dIf the route already set, touch VOICE icon to recalcu-

late.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

En 163

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Checking the current route

Route Options*dRoute Profile dDisplaying the route profile screen.

Route Options*dNext Guidance dYou can hear the information of next guidance point.

Canceling the route

Route Options*dCancel Route dIf the route is already set, touch VOICE icon to cancel the current route.

Route Options*dCancel Waypoint dIf the waypoint is already set, touch VOICE icon to cancel route until next way-

point.

Checking the traffic list

Traffic Information*dTraffic Events List dDisplaying the traffic event list.

Traffic Information*dTraffic On Route List dDisplaying the traffic event list on your route.

Traffic Information*dTraffic Flow List dDisplaying the traffic flow list.

Erase the tracking

Other Operation*dErase Tracks dTouch VOICE icon to delete the tracking.

Viewing the Emergency Info screen

Other Operation*dEmergency Information dDisplaying the Emergency info screen.

Turning on or off the Overlay POI

Other Operation*dDisplay Overlay POI dDisplaying the selected POI in Overlay POI.

Other Operation*dHide Overlay POI dTurn off Overlay POI.

Voice commands related to hands-free phoning

The following verbal commands can be used

both in navigation screen and audio operation

screen.

Operating the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth technology

Call*dTelephone Book d<Registered phone book’s pronunciation>dIf the registered entry in phone book has tele-

phone number data, touch VOICE icon to call the entry.

Call*dCall Registered Point d<Registered location’s pronunciation>dIf the registered location has telephone

number data, touch VOICE icon to call the registered location.

Call*dRedial dTouch VOICE icon to redial.

Call*dCall Phone Number dSay the number you want to call. dTouch VOICE icon to dial. (Note 1)

Call*dReceived Call dDisplaying the received call list.

Call*dCall Favorite X dTouch VOICE icon to dial.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

164

Chapter

Call*dCall Home dTouch VOICE icon to call your home (Only when the phone number is registered in your home.)

Call*dCall <Registered location’s pronunciation>dIf the registered location has telephone number data, touch

VOICE icon to call the registered location.

(Note 1): International call with using “+”is not available in the voice operation.

Voice commands related to AV operation

The following verbal commands can be used

both in navigation screen and audio operation

screen.

Common AV commands

AV Operation*dChange Display*dNavigation Screen dSwitching to the navigation map or menu screen.

AV Operation*dChange Display*dAV Screen dSwitching to the Audio source screen.

AV Operation*dSource Off dTurning the Audio source off.

AV Operation*dTraffic Channel dRecalling the memorized traffic channel for XM or SiriusConnect universal tuner.

AV Operation*dChange Source*dCD,DVD,AM,FM,TV,MCD,AV Input,AUX,Sirius,iPod,XM,EXTERNAL1,EXTER-

NAL2,Music Library dSwitching to the desired audio source. (You cannot switch to an unavailable source.)

Give the following verbal commands after

switching the correspond audio source.

Operation for Multi-CD

AV Operation*dDisc 1 to Disc 12 dSelecting the disc for playback.

Operation for FM

AV Operation*dPreset 1 to Preset 6 dSwitching to that preset station directly.

AV Operation*dChange Band dSwitching the band.

Operation for AM

AV Operation*dPreset 1 to Preset 6 dSwitching to that preset station directly.

Operation for TV

AV Operation*dPreset 1 to Preset 12 dSwitching to that preset station directly.

AV Operation*dChange Band dSwitching the band.

Operation for XM, SIRIUS tuner

AV Operation*dPreset 1 to Preset 6 dSwitching to that preset station directly.

AV Operation*dChange Band dSwitching the band.

AV Operation*dCategory Mode dSwitching to the Category mode.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

En 165

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

AV Operation*dAll Channel Mode dSwitching to the All Channel mode.

AV Operation*dMemo dMemorizing the title and artist information of that song to “My Mix”.

Operation for CD

AV Operation*dChange Media dSwitching the CD-DA part and CD-ROM (MP3) part.

Operation for Music Library

AV Operation*dMusic Search*dAlbum d<Album Playlist name>dPlayback the selected album playlist.

AV Operation*dMusic Search*d<Album Playlist name>dPlayback the selected album playlist. (Note 2)

AV Operation*dMusic Search*dArtist d<Artist Playlist name>dPlayback the selected artist playlist.

AV Operation*dMusic Search*d<Artist Playlist name>dPlayback the selected artist playlist. (Note 2)

AV Operation*dMusic Search*dGenre d<Genre name>dPlayback the selected genre playlist.

AV Operation*dMusic Search*d<Genre name>dPlayback the selected genre playlist. (Note 2)

AV Operation*dMusic Search*dMy Favorites dMy Favorite 1, My Favorite 2, My Favorite 3, My Favorite 4, My Mix d

Playback selected playlist.

AV Operation*dMusic Search*dMy Favorite 1, My Favorite 2, My Favorite 3, My Favorite 4, My Mix dPlayback se-

lected playlist. (Note 2)

AV Operation*dTrack Search d<Track name>dPlayback the selected track. (Note 3)

(Note 2):This operation is available only when that group is already selected.

(Note 3):This operation is available for the playlist currently playing.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

166

Chapter

After checking traffic

information manually

If traffic congestion is found after checking

the traffic information manually, “Do you

want to reroute?”appears on screen. In this

time, you can say voice commands to operate.

Options:

Yes:

The route will be recalculated by touching

VOICE icon.

No:

The route will not be recalculated and the map

screen of that location appears.

Location screen (A) and (B)

Location screen (A)

The following commands can be vocalized:

Set As Destination

If there is no route, the system starts the route

calculation. If the route is already set, touch

VOICE icon to start route calculation.

Set AS Waypoint

Touch VOICE icon to start route calculation.

Display Map

Displays the map of surroundings on that lo-

cation.

Call here

If the location has telephone number data,

touch the VOICE icon to make a call to the lo-

cation.

Location screen (B)

The following commands can be vocalized:

Set As Destination

Same as above.

Set AS Waypoint

Same as above.

Display Map

Same as above.

See the next POI.

See the previous POI.

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

En 167

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Other Voice Commands

The navigation system also can recognize the

words in the following list.

Other voice commands for

navigation operation

Preferential voice command Other voice command

Back Return, Before

Cancel Escape, Skip

Current Location My Location

Voice Help Recognition Help, Help

Next Page Next, Following

Previous Page Back Page

Basic Operation Basics, Basic

Set As Destination Set, Go, Route To Destination, Begin Guidance, Start

Set As Waypoint Set Waypoint, Waypoint

Registration Register, Store

Destination Go To, Search

POI Point Of Interest, Points Of Interest, Business Listing

Address Addresses, Address Search, Search By Address

Area Surrounding, Around

Telephone Number Telephone, Phone Number

Address Book Registered Points, My Addresses, Search By Address Book

Destination History Search History, Destination List

Vicinity Search Vicinity, Search Around, Search In Vicinity

Return Home Go Home, Drive Home

Waypoint Home Waypoint To Home, Registered Home As Waypoint

Call Home Phone Home, Dial Home

Display Home Show Home

Display Destination Destination Map, Show Destination

Map Operation Map, Map Option

Zoom Out Out, Higher

Zoom In In, Lower

Change Scale Scale, Zoom

XXXX meter(s) Scale XXX meter(s)

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

168

Chapter

XXXX kilometer(s) Scale XXXX kilometer(s)

XXXX mile(s) Scale XXXX mile(s)

XXXX yards Scale XXXX yards

Change View Mode View Mode, Change View

Map View Normal Map, Flat Map

Driver’s View Driver, 3D

2D Twin Map View 2D Twin, 2D Split

3D Twin Map View 3D Twin, 3D Split

Route View Turns, Turn View

Guide View Guide, Arrow

Rear View Rear, Back View

Vehicle Dynamics Dynamics, Meters

North Up North, Compass

Heading Up Head Up, Car Up

Route Options Change Route Options

Change Route Edit Route

Rerouting New Route, Update Route

Use Main Road Main Roads, Take Main Roads

Use Fast Route Fast Route, Fastest Route

Use Short Route Short Route, Shortest Route

Use Freeway Motorways, Highways

Use Ferry Ferry, Ferries

Use Toll Road Toll Road, Payroad

Avoid Freeway Avoid Highway, Avoid Interstate

Avoid Ferry Avoid Ferries, Skip Ferries

Avoid Toll Road Avoid Tolls, Avoid Pay

Cancel Route Delete Route, Cancel Guidance

Route Profile Profile

Cancel Waypoint Delete Waypoint, Take Away Waypoint

Next Guidance Following Guidance, Guidance After This

Traffic Information Traffic, View Traffic Info, Display Traffic Information, Current Traffic Information, Display

Traffic Condition

Traffic Events List Event List, Events, Traffic Events

Traffic On Route List On Route List, Route List, Traffic On Route

Traffic Flow List Flow List, Flows, Traffic Flow

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

En 169

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Call Dial, Ring, Dial Out , Place A Call, Make A Call

Call Registered Point Call Address Book, Call Registered

Call Phone Number Call By Number, Call Number, Call By Phone Number, Call Using Phone Number

Telephone Book Tel Book, Phone Book

Redial Call Again, Phone Again

Call Favorite X Call X, Phone X

Received Call Received, Who Called

Other Operation Other, Others

Erase Tracks Delete Tracks, Remove Tracks

Display Overlay POI Show Overlay POI, Display POIs

Yes Ok, I Agree

No Not Ok, I Disagree

Other voice commands for AV operation

Preferential voice command Other voice command

Navigation Screen Navigation, Navi

AV Screen AV, Audio

Change Source Next Source, Source Change

CD Change To CD, Switch To CD

DVD Change To DVD, Switch To DVD

TV Change To TV, Switch To TV

AM Change To AM, Switch To AM

FM Change To FM, Switch To FM

AV Input Video Input

MCD CD Changer

Music Library Change To Music Library, Switch To Music Library

Music Search Search My Music, Search Music

Album Search By Album, Search Album

Artist Search By Artist, Search Artist

Genre Search By Genre, Search Genre

Rock/Pop Rock, Pop

Hip-Hop/Rap Rock, Pop

Soul/Urban Soul, Urban

Track Search Search By Track

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

170

Chapter

iPod Change To iPod, Switch To iPod

XM Change To XM, Switch To XM

Sirius Change To Sirius, Switch To Sirius

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

En 171

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Category list for vicinity search

pIf you say the category name (category

title), the system searches for vicinity POIs

in that category without taking the chain

into consideration.

Category name:

Gas Station

76, ARCO, BP-AMOCO, CHEVRON, CITGO, CLARK,

CONOCO, ESSO, EXXON, FINA, GETTY, GULF, MOBIL,

PETROCANADA, PHILLIPS 66, SHELL, SINCLAIR, SU-

NOCO, TEXACO, ULTRAMAR, Gas Station-Others

Category name:

Bank & ATM

B B & T, BANK OF AMERICA, BANK OF MONTREAL,

BANK OF NEW YORK, BANK OF NOVA SCOTIA, CIBC

BANK, CITIBANK, HSBC BANK USA, J P MORGAN

CHASE, KEY BANK, LA SALLE BANK, LAURENTIAN

BANK OF CANADA, MELLON BANK, NATIONAL BANK

OF CANADA, PNC BANK, REGIONS BANK, ROYAL

BANK OF CANADA, SUN TRUST BANK, TD CANADA

TRUST, UNION BANK OF CALIFORNIA, US BANK, WA-

CHOVIA BANK, WASHINGTON MUTUAL, WELLS

FARGO BANK, Bank & ATM-Others

Category name:

Restaurant

American, Asian, Barbecue, Café & Espresso, Chinese,

Continental, Creole-Cajun, French, Greek, Indian, Italian,

Japanese, Mexican, Pizzeria, Seafood, Steak House,

Thai, Restaurant-Others

Category name:

Fast Food Chains

ARBY'S, AU BON PAIN, BAJA FRESH, BASKIN-ROB-

BINS, BOSTON MARKET, BRAUM'S ICE CREAM &

DAIRY, BURGER KING, CARL'S JR., CARVEL ICE CREAM

BAKERY, CHURCH'S CHICKEN, COLD STONE CREAM-

ERY, DAIRY QUEEN, DUNKIN DONUTS, HAAGEN-DAZS

ICE CREAM, HARDEE'S, HARVEY'S, IN-N-OUT BURGER,

JACK IN THE BOX, K F C, LONG JOHN SILVER'S, MC

DONALD'S, PANDA EXPRESS, PICK UP STIX, POPEYE'S

CHICKEN & BISCUITS, QUIZNOS, RUBIO'S, SECOND

CUP, SONIC, STARBUCK'S COFFEE, SUBWAY SAND-

WICHES & SALADS, TACO BELL, TACO JOHN'S, TCBY,

TIM HORTON'S, TJ CINNAMONS, TOGO'S, WENDY'S,

WHATABURGER

Category name:

Restaurant Chains

A & W FAMILY RESTAURANT, APPLEBEE'S, BENNI-

GAN'S, BOB'S BIG BOY, BONANZA, BONEFISH GRILL,

CARRABBA'S ITALIAN GRILL, CHILI'S GRILL & BAR,

CHUCK E CHEESE PIZZA, CLAIM JUMPER, COCO'S,

DOMINO'S PIZZA, FAZOLI'S, GODFATHER'S PIZZA,

GOLDEN CORRAL FAMILY STEAK HSE, IHOP RESTAU-

RANT, KELSEY'S, LITTLE CAESARS PIZZA, LONE STAR

STEAKHOUSE, MARIE CALLENDER, OLIVE GARDEN

ITALIAN RSTRNT, OUTBACK STEAKHOUSE, PAPA

JOHN'S PIZZA, PASTA CONNECTION, PERKINS FAMILY

RESTAURANT, PIZZA HUT, PONDEROSA STEAK

HOUSE, RED LOBSTER, ROUND TABLE PIZZA, RUBY

TUESDAY, SHAKEY'S PIZZA, SIZZLER, SMOKEY BONES,

STEAK & ALE, SWISS CHALET, TGI FRIDAY'S, THE KEG

Category name:

Supermarkets

ACME, ALBERTSONS, ALDI, A & P, BI-LO, CUB FOODS,

CUMBERLAND FARMS, FOOD LION, GIANT, GIANT

EAGLE, H-E-B, HY-VEE, IGA, JEWEL-OSCO, KROGER,

MEIJER, PANTRY, PATHMARK, PIGGLY WIGGLY, PUBLIX,

RALEY'S, RALPH'S, SAFEWAY, SAVE-A-LOT, SHAW'S

SUPERMARKET, STOP & SHOP, STOP N GO, TOPS

FRIENDLY MARKET, VON'S, WHOLE FOODS, WINN-

DIXIE, Supermarkets-Others

Category name:

Automotive

AAA, RV/TRUCK FACILITY, Automobile Club, Parking,

Car Parts & Accessories, Car Repair Facility, Car Wash

Category name:

Retailer Chains

BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY, COSTCO, FACTORY 2-U,

KMART, KOHL’S, ROSS, SAM’S CLUB, STEIN MART, T J

MAXX, TARGET STORES, WAL-MART, Retailer Chains-

Others

Category name:

Hotel

AMERI HOST INN, BAYMONT INN & SUITES, BEST WES-

TERN, COURTYARD BY MARRIOTT, CROWNE PLAZA,

DAYS INN, DOUBLE TREE, ECONO LODGE, EMBASSY

SUITES, FAIRFIELD INN, HAMPTON INN, HILTON, HIL-

TON GARDEN INN, HOLIDAY INN, HOLIDAY INN EX-

PRESS, HOMEWOOD SUITES, HOWARD JOHNSON,

HYATT, KNIGHTS INN, LA QUINTA INN, MARRIOTT,

MOTEL 6, QUALITY-COMFORT-CLARION, RAMADA INN,

RED ROOF INN, RESIDENCE INNS, SCOTTISH INN,

SHERATON, STAYBRIDGE SUITES, STUDIO 6, SUPER 8,

TRAVELODGE, WINGATE INN, Hotel-Others

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

172

Chapter

Category name:

Car Dealer

ACURA, AUDI, BMW, BUICK, CADILLAC, CHEVROLET,

CHRYSLER, DAEWOO, DODGE, FORD, HONDA, HYUN-

DAI, INFINITI, ISUZU, JAGUAR, JEEP, KIA, LAND

ROVER, LEXUS, LINCOLN, MAZDA, MERCEDES-BENZ,

MITSUBISHI, NISSAN, OLDSMOBILE, PONTIAC,

PORSCHE, SAAB, SATURN, SUBARU, SUZUKI, TOYO-

TA, VOLKSWAGEN, VOLVO, Car Dealer-Others

Category name:

Rental and Other Services

Rental Car, Video Rental, Laundromat, Dry Cleaners

Category name:

Electronics Retailer

BEST BUY, CIRCUIT CITY, COMP USA, FRY’S ELECTRO-

NICS, RADIO SHACK, ULTIMATE ELECTRONICS, Elec-

tronics Retailer-Others

Category name:

Groceries

Liquor Store, Bakery, Butcher, Convenience Store, Deli-

catessen, Groceries-Others

Category name:

Shopping

Shopping Center, Beauty & Barber, Book Store, Music

Store, Fashion, Florist, Furniture, Home Improvement,

Glassware, House & Office, Optometrist, Shoes & Bags,

Sporting Goods, Toys, Cellular Phone Shop, Shopping-

Others

Category name:

Entertainment

Stadium & Arena, Brewery, Casino, Cinema, Night Club,

Theater & Play, Winery, Pub

Category name:

Leisure

Museum, Art Gallery, Zoo, Amusement Park, Fair

Ground, Beach, National Park & Forest, Camping & Hik-

ing, Ski Resort, Bowling, Golf Course, Gym, Pool & Ten-

nis, Travel Agency, Tourist Information, Tourist

Attraction, Park & Recreation

Category name:

Public Service & Facility

Police Station, Government Office, Post Office, Court

House, Convention Center, City Center, Library

Category name:

Transportation

Airline Access, Airport, Ferry Terminal, Train Station,

Rest Area

Category name:

Medical

Doctor, Dentist, Veterinarian, Emergency Medical Ser-

vice, Hospital, Pharmacy

Category name:

School

University & College, Nursery School, Elementary

School, Junior High School, High School, Vocational

School

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

En 173

Chapter

Operating Your Navigation System with Voice

Troubleshooting

If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common

problems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. While this list is not comprehen-

sive, it should answer your most common problems. If a solution to your problem cannot be

found here, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.

Problems in the screen

Symptom Cause Action (See)

Power doesn’t turn on. The navi-

gation system doesn’t operate.

Leads and connectors are incor-

rectly connected.

Confirm once more that all connections are

correct.

The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then

replace the fuse. Be very sure to install a cor-

rect fuse with the same rate.

Noise and other factors are causing

the internal memory to operate in-

correctly.

Refer to “Page 187”and carry out appropriate

measures.

The hard disk drive is not working

because the temperature is extre-

mely low or high.

Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle

falls or rises.

When the ignition switch is

turned ON (or turned to ACC),

the motor sounds.

This system confirms whether a

disc is loaded or not.

This is a normal operation.

The navigation does not boot up. The power cable is not wired cor-

rectly.

Turn the system off and the check the wiring.

The hard disk drive is not running

because the temperature is too low.

Wait until the inside of the vehicle warms up.

The hard disk drive is defective. Consult your authorized Pioneer dealer.

Appendix

174

Appendix

You cannot position your vehicle

on the map or the positioning

error is large.

The quality of signals from the GPS

satellites is poor, causing reduced

positioning accuracy. Such a loss of

signal quality may happen for the

following reasons:

•The GPS antenna is in an unsuita-

ble location.

•Obstacles are blocking signals

from the satellites.

•The position of satellites relative to

your vehicle is bad.

•Signals from the GPS satellites

have been modified to reduce accu-

racy. (GPS satellites are operated by

the US Department of Defense, and

the US government reserves the

right to distort positioning data for

military reasons. This may lead to

greater positioning errors.)

•If a vehicle phone or cellular

phone is used near the GPS anten-

na, GPS reception may be lost tem-

porarily.

•Do not cover the GPS antenna

with spray paint or vehicle wax, be-

cause this may block the reception

of GPS signals. Snow buildup can

also degrade the signals.

Check the GPS signal reception and the posi-

tion of the GPS antenna if necessary, or con-

tinue driving until reception improves. Keep

the antenna clear. (Page 90)

Signals from the vehicle’s speed

pulse are not being picked up prop-

erly.

Check that the cables are properly connected.

If necessary, consult the dealer that installed

the system.

The navigation system may not be

mounted securely in your vehicle.

Check that the navigation system is securely

mounted and, if necessary, consult the dealer

that installed the system.

Your vehicle is operating in Simple

hybrid mode.

Connect the speed signal input (pink lead

wire) of the power cable correctly, and reset

the 3D Hybrid Sensor memory ([Learning

Status]).

The navigation system is installed

with an extreme angle exceeding

the limitation of the installation

angle.

Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-

tion system must be installed within the al-

lowed installation angle. For details, refer to

“Installation Manual”and [Installation

Angle Setup].) (Page 92)

Indication of the position of your ve-

hicle is misaligned after a U-turn or

reversing.

Check whether or not the reverse gear signal

input lead (purple) is connected properly.

(The navigation system works properly with-

out the lead connected, but positioning accu-

racy will be adversely affected.)

The map continually reorients it-

self.

The traveling direction is always set

to Heading Up.

Touch on the screen and change the map

display.

Appendix

En 175

Appendix

The daylight display is used

even when the vehicle lights are

on.

[Day] is selected to [Day/Night Dis-

play].

Check [Day/Night Display] setting and make

sure [Automatic] is selected. (Page 50)

The orange/white lead is not con-

nected.

Check the connection.

The display is very dim. The vehicle’s light is turned ON, and

[Automatic] is selected on [Day/

Night Display].

Read about [Day/Night Display] setting and,

if desired, select [Day]. (Page 50)

The vehicle cabin temperature is ex-

tremely low.

A Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) is used, and

such displays tend to darken when cold. Wait

for the vehicle to warm up.

Picture quality adjustment of the

display is not correct.

Adjust the picture quality. (Page 153)

Display tilt is not at the proper set-

ting.

Press and hold EJECT button to adjust the tilt.

No sounds are heard.

The volume level will not rise.

The volume level is low. Adjust the volume level.

The attenuator or mute is on. Turn the attenuator or mute off.

The speaker lead is disconnected. Check the connection.

The volume of beeps and naviga-

tion guidance cannot be ad-

justed.

You cannot adjust these parameters

with VOL (a/b) button.

Turn the volume up or down with [Volume]in

[Settings]menu.

Adjusting the volume of naviga-

tion guidance and beeps is not

possible.

You cannot adjust them with VOL

(a/b) button.

Turn the volume up or down according to [Vo-

lume]in[Settings] menu. (Page 88)

A strange sound is heard when

the vehicle comes close to a cer-

tain place (e.g. Dog barking).

The sound for the entry of [Address

Book] is set.

Set the sound setting of that entry to [No

Sound]. (Page 63)

An alarm sounds when you ap-

proach the registered location

and the set image pops up, re-

gardless of whether [Address

Book Icon] is set to [Off].

This is a normal operation and not a

malfunction.

To turn off the sound output and image pop

up, select [No Sound] and [No Picture].

Slope is not displayed on Vehi-

cle Dynamics screen.

“Inclination”does not move on

3D Calibration Status screen.

The speed pulse lead is not con-

nected.

Connect the speed pulse lead.

No sound, no voice. has been set, or sound volume

is reduced to 0.

Adjust the volume of the guidance or turn

off. (Page 88)

The person on the other end of

the phone call cannot hear the

conversation due to an echo.

The voice from the person on the

other end of the phone call is output

from the speakers and then picked

up by the microphone again, creat-

ing an echo.

Use the following methods to reduce the

echo:

—Lower the volume on the receiver

—Have both speakers pause slightly before

speaking

The registered phone cannot be

deleted.

Normally, the registered phone can-

not be deleted.

!Overwrite the old registered phone with a

new phone.

!Clear [Phone Settings]. (Page 187)

Appendix

176

Appendix

CD or DVD playback is not pos-

sible.

The disc is inserted upside down. Insert the disc with the label upward.

The disc is dirty. Clean disc.

The disc is cracked or otherwise da-

maged.

Insert a normal, round disc.

The files on the CD are an irregular

file format.

Check the file format.

The CD format cannot be played

back.

Replace disc.

The loaded disc is a type this system

cannot play.

Check what type the disc is. (Also see “Hand-

ling and Care of the Disc”in the hardware

manual and “Page 199”for more cautions

about handling each type of media.)

No picture. The parking brake lead is not con-

nected or applied.

Connect a parking brake lead correctly, and

apply the parking brake.

Parking brake interlock is activated. Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply

the parking brake. (Page 22)

[AV Input] setting is incorrect. Please read the following page and set the

setting correctly. (Page 150)

The audio skips. The navigation system is not firmly

secured.

Secure the navigation system firmly.

Failure hard disk drive. Consult your Pioneer dealer.

“Rear display”picture disap-

pears.

The setting for [REAR SCREEN]isin-

correct.

Please read the following page and set the

rear screen setting correctly. (Page 153)

There was a problem with the “Rear

display”or a faulty wiring connec-

tion, for example.

Check the “Rear display”and its connection.

When the shift lever is in [R], the

rear view camera images are dis-

played. (When [MIRROR] is selected

in [REAR SCREEN] menu.)

Select [DVD]or[AV]in[REAR SCREEN]

menu. When you move the shift lever to a po-

sition other than [R], the screen will be re-

turned to the previous display.

[DVD-V Setup] is carried out. You can not display the video image to “Rear

display”during [DVD-V Setup] menu.

Nothing is displayed and the

touch panel keys cannot be

used.

The setting for the rear view camera

is incorrect.

Connect a rear view camera correctly.

The shift lever was placed in [R]

when the rear view camera was not

connected.

Press AV button to return to the source dis-

play and then select the correct polarity set-

ting for [Camera Input]. (Page 149)

The back light of the LCD panel is

turned off.

Press Vbutton to turn on the back light.

Touch panel key is not respond

or a different key is responding.

Touch panel keys deviate from the

actual positions that respond to

your touch for some reason.

Perform the touch panel calibration. (Page

190)

CD recording is not possible. A disc that cannot be recorded,

such as MP3 disc or DVD-video, is

inserted.

A disc other than a normal music CD cannot

be recorded.

Appendix

En 177

Appendix

CD recording doesn’t stop

though the record progress indi-

cator shows 100 %.

Music Library recording will be can-

celed after playback of the current

track is finished. (The recording

mode stops at the interval of the

tracks.)

Wait until the current track has ended or

change the source manually.

“NO SIGNAL”is displayed at the

right corner on the map.

While waiting for a response from

the XM tuner.

Wait for a while and try the operation again.

You are in an area that cannot re-

ceive XM tuner reception.

Move into an area that can receive XM tuner

reception.

Your current location provides very

poor reception.

Change your location.

“UPDATING”is displayed at the

right corner on the map.

Service subscription is either XM

audio only or XM NavTraffic stand

alone.

Since the GEX-P10XMT is capable of receiving

both XM audio and XM NavTraffic service, if

you are subscribed to only one or the other,

the system checks to see if you have added

another service to your account since you

last powered on the navigation system. When

you subscribe to both services, this message

will stop appearing when you turn the ignition

ON (ACC ON).

No sounds are heard.

The volume level will not rise.

Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.

The system is performing still, slow

motion, or frame-by-frame playback

with DVD-video.

There is no sound during still, slow motion, or

frame-by-frame playback with DVD-video.

The system is paused or performing,

fast rewind or forward during the

MP3 disc playback.

For an MP3, there is no sound on fast rewind

or forward.

“DTS”is selected for the DVD-Video

disc sound track.

Switch to a non “DTS”sound track.

The icon is displayed, and op-

eration is not possible.

The operation is not compatible

with the DVD’s configuration.

This operation is not possible. (For example,

the DVD playing does not feature that angle,

audio system, subtitle language, etc.)

The picture stops (pauses) and

the unit cannot be operated.

Reading of data has become impos-

sible during DVD playback.

After touching gonce, start playback once

more.

The picture is stretched, the as-

pect is incorrect.

The aspect setting is incorrect for

the display.

Select the appropriate setting for that image.

(Page 149, Page 148)

A parental lock message is dis-

played and DVD playback is not

possible.

Parental lock is on. Turn parental lock off or change the level.

(Page 148)

Parental lock for DVD playback

cannot be canceled.

The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number. (Page 148)

Playback is not with the audio

language and subtitle language

settings selected in [DVD-V

Setup].

The DVD playing does not feature

dialog or subtitles in the language

selected in [DVD-V Setup].

Switching to a selected language is not possi-

ble if the language selected in [DVD-V

Setup] is not recorded on the disc.

Appendix

178

Appendix

Dialing is not possible because

the touch panel keys for dialing

are inactive.

Your phone is out of range for ser-

vice.

Retry after entering within range for service.

The connection between cellular

phone and the Bluetooth unit (sold

separately) (navigation system) can-

not be established now.

Perform the connection process.

The cellular phone is not registered

to the navigation system yet.

To use the cellular phone featuring the Blue-

tooth wireless technology with this navigation

system, the registration process is necessary.

When the screen is frozen...

Park your vehicle in a safe place, and cut off

the engine. Turn the ignition key back to “Acc

off”. Then start the engine again, and turn the

power to the navigation system back on. If this

does not solve the problem, press RESET but-

ton on the navigation system.

Messages and How to React to Them

The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system.

pThere are occasions when you may see

error messages other than those shown

here. In such a case, follow the instructions

given on the display.

Messages for navigation functions

Message When What to do (See)

Irregular speed pulse signal

detected. Please power off

the system and check the in-

stallation. Then, please re-

boot the system and press

“OK”.

If the Navigation system does not re-

ceive the vehicle speed pulse.

Consult your Pioneer dealer.

Speed pulse not connected.

Calibration will start without

speed pulse. Accuracy is not

fully ensured without speed

pulse.

The speed signal input (pink lead

wire) of the power cable is not con-

nected.

To operate with 3D hybrid mode, connect the

speed signal input (pink lead wire) of the

power cable correctly.

Although it can be operated with Simple hy-

brid mode without connecting the speed sig-

nal input, the precision of the positioning will

be less accurate.

Appendix

En 179

Appendix

Vibration detected. Please

power off the system and

check the installation. Then,

please re-boot the system and

press “OK”.

The navigation unit is installed in a

place where it may be affected by a

large vibration.

Re-install the navigation unit in a place where

the unit will not be affected by vibration.

Direction of G sensor is not

correct. Please power off the

system and check the installa-

tion. Then, please re-boot the

system and press “OK”.

Direction of G sensor is set incor-

rectly.

See the Installation Manual and set the direc-

tion of the navigation unit correctly.

Gyro Sensor is not working

properly. Please consult your

dealer or Pioneer service cen-

ter.

Abnormal Gyrosensor output is de-

tected.

Write down the error code shown on the

screen. Turn off the power, and then contact

your nearest Pioneer service facility.

Positioning is not possible

due to the hardware. Please

contact your dealer or Pioneer

service center.

The location display is not possible

due to hardware failure.

Consult your dealer.

GPS antenna problem de-

tected. Please contact your

dealer or Pioneer service cen-

ter.

The location display is not possible

due to failure of the GPS antenna.

Consult your dealer.

This function is currently una-

vailable.

The screen cannot be displayed with

Vehicle Dynamics Display. The sen-

sor has not been taught so the sen-

sor information cannot be acquired.

If the sensor learning status reaches the Sen-

sor Initializing, the system is ready to be

used.

The vertical installation angle

is changed. Gyro Sensor cali-

bration is re-initialized.

If the mounting angle of the naviga-

tion unit has been changed.

The system initializes the sensor in order to

operate it with the maximum performance

and automatically starts re-learning.

Excess vertical installation

angle detected. Please install

the navigation unit correctly.

The navigation system is installed

with an extreme angle exceeding

the limitation of the installation

angle.

Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-

tion system must be installed within the al-

lowed installation angle. For details refer to

Installation Manual.)

No data available at this time. No data is available that can be

used with the XM tuner.

Wait for a while and try the operation again.

UPDATING (Updating) The selected channel is not in-

cluded in your subscription.

Select another channel.

Radio is being updated with the lat-

est encryption code.

Wait until the encryption code is fully up-

dated.

Route calculation was not

possible.

Route calculation has failed be-

cause of a malfunction in map data,

software, or hardware.

!Change the destination.

!Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-

sage persists.

Route calculation not possible

because destination is too far.

The destination is too far. !Set a destination closer to the starting

point.

!Set one or more waypoints.

Route calculation not possible

because destination is too

close.

The destination or waypoint(s) are

too close.

Set a destination and waypoint(s) farther

from the starting point.

Appendix

180

Appendix

Route calculation not possible

due to traffic regulations.

•The destination or waypoint(s) are

in a Control Traffic Zone (CTR) and

the route calculation is hampered.

•Your vehicle is currently in a Con-

trol Traffic Zone (CTR) and the route

calculation is hampered.

!Set a destination and waypoint(s) outside

the CTR if you know where the restricted area

is.

!Try a destination or waypoint(s) away from

the currently set points to some extent.

!Drive your vehicle to an unrestricted area

and reset the destination and waypoint(s).

Route calculation not possible

because navigation cannot be

provided around destination

or starting point.

The destination, waypoint(s), or

starting point are in an area where

no road exists (e.g. a mountain) and

the route calculation is impossible.

!Set a destination and waypoint(s) on roads.

!Reset the destination after you drive the ve-

hicle to any road.

Route to destination cannot

be calculated.

The destination or waypoint(s) are in

an isolated island, etc. without a

ferry and the route calculation is im-

possible. If there is no road con-

nected to your starting point or

destination, this message will ap-

pear.

Change the destination.

•Ferry could not be avoided.

•Toll roads could not be

avoided.

•Freeway could not be

avoided.

•Ferry, toll roads and free-

ways could not be avoided.

•Ferry and toll roads could

not be avoided.

•Toll roads and freeways

could not be avoided.

•Ferry and freeways could

not be avoided.

These messages appear when a

ferry route, toll roads, or freeways

are included in the route to the des-

tination or waypoints even though a

route is set to avoid them.

You can identify these condition by

the icons.

If the current route is not desired, set destina-

tion or waypoints that do not pass through a

ferry route, toll roads, or freeways. (Page 32)

The address does not exist. Do

you want to continue?

The house number entered does not

exist in the database for the speci-

fied street.

Re-enter the existing house number. Or, pro-

ceed to the next step without entering the

house number and set the main point of that

street as your destination.

This area does not contain

any POI's of the selected type.

Facilities of the selected category do

not exist in the surrounding areas.

Use another search method or move to an-

other location and perform Vicinity Search

again.

Failed to make the route pro-

file.

In rare cases, a route calculation

error may occur.

!Retry.

!Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-

sage persists.

There is no Traffic List. There is no available traffic informa-

tion now.

Move to the location where you can receive

the XM NavTraffic information, and then try

the operation again.

There is no pictures folder.

Please create /Pictures/ folder

and store JPEG files in that

Folder.

Cannot load the image because Pic-

tures folder is not found in the in-

serted disc.

Use the appropriate data after reading “Page

94”.

Appendix

En 181

Appendix

Data Read error.

Failed to read the data because the

CD-R is damaged or dirty. Or, the

pick-up lens of the DVD drive is

dirty.

Try re-reading the data by inserting a clean

CD-R. Clean the pick-up lens with a commer-

cially available cleaning kit for DVD, then try

to reading again.

Pictures folder exists on the CD-R

but no data in JPEG format exists.

Use the appropriate data after reading “Page

94”.

JPEG file is corrupt. The data is damaged or an attempt

was made to set a JPEG image that

was not made to specifications as

the background picture.

Use the appropriate data after reading “Page

94”.

CAUTION!

System detected improper con-

nection of Parking Brake lead.

Please check your configuration

for safety. Please see Operation

Manual for more information re-

garding safe operation.

Parking brake lead is incorrectly

connected.

Confirm once more that their connections are

correct.

Connection failed. The cellular phone’s Bluetooth wire-

less technology is turned off.

Turn the target phone’s Bluetooth wireless

technology on.

The cellular phone is paired (con-

nected) with another device.

Cancel the pairing (connection) and retry.

Rejection has been received from

the cellular phone.

Operate the target phone and accept the con-

nection request from the navigation system.

(Furthermore, check the connection settings

on your cellular phone.)

The target cellular phone can not be

found.

Check whether your cellular phone is turned

off and, whether the distance to your cellular

phone is too far.

Registration step has been success-

ful but connection has failed for

some reason.

Retry the registration and if a connection still

cannot be established, try connecting using

your cellular phone.

Registration failed. The cellular phone’s Bluetooth wire-

less technology is turned off during

the registration step.

Keep turning the target phone’s Bluetooth

wireless technology on during the registra-

tion.

Rejection by the cellular phone has

received.

Operate the target phone and accept the re-

gistration request from the navigation system.

(Furthermore, check the connection settings

on your cellular phone.)

Registration step has failed for

some reason.

Retry the registration and if the registration

still fails, try registering using your cellular

phone.

Automatic connection in pro-

gress. Please try again later.

If you try to perform another opera-

tion during automatic connection

by the system.

!Wait for a while and retry.

!Establish that connection temporarily and

retry that later.

Automatic connection in pro-

gress. Please try manually

later.

If you try to connect another phone

during automatic connection by the

system.

Establish that connection temporarily and

retry it later.

Appendix

182

Appendix

Could not find any available

phone.

No available phone exists in the sur-

roundings when the system

searches for the cellular phone fea-

turing Bluetooth wireless technol-

ogy for registration.

!Turn the target phone’s Bluetooth wireless

technology on.

!Check whether your cellular phone is

turned off and, whether the distance to your

cellular phone is too far.

Bluetooth unit error. It is not

possible to find any mobile

phones.

If the Bluetooth unit (sold sepa-

rately) is disconnected from this na-

vigation system or Bluetooth unit

carries out another processing

when the system search the cellular

phone featuring Bluetooth wireless

technology for registration.

!Check the connection and retry.

!Establish that connection temporarily and

retry later.

Bluetooth unit error. The de-

vice name could not be set.

If the Bluetooth unit (sold sepa-

rately) is disconnected from this na-

vigation system or the Bluetooth

unit carries out another process

when you change the device name.

!Check the connection and retry.

!Establish that connection temporarily and

retry later.

Registration is not available. If you try to perform another opera-

tion immediately after connection

failure.

Wait for a while and retry.

Reading failed. If you transferred the data from your

cellular phone in a format can not

be received with navigation system.

Select just a suitable item, format, and then

retry.

Disconnection has been made dur-

ing transfer for some reason.

Connect your cellular phone again and retry.

Calibration failed. Please refer

to the owner’s manual.

The touch panel calibration has not

been carried out with appropriate

steps.

Please read the instruction of touch panel ca-

libration and retry. (Page 190)

The HDD is not connected. Failure of the built-in hard disk drive

has occurred, such as internal elec-

trical problem or file system error.

Consult your dealer.

Cannot use HDD. Failure of the built-in hard disk drive

has occurred, such as internal elec-

trical problem or file system error.

Consult your dealer.

There is no applicable pro-

gram.

Failure of the built-in hard disk drive

has occurred, such as internal elec-

trical problem or file system error.

Consult your dealer.

The HDD cannot be operated

due to excessive heat. Please

move your vehicle to a safe

place and turn the power off

until the temperature goes

down.

Hard disk drive cannot run due to

high temperature.

Park your vehicle to safe place, turn the igni-

tion switch off, and wait until the temperature

inside the vehicle drops.

Appendix

En 183

Appendix

Messages for Audio Functions

When problems occur in the audio source, a message may appears on the display. Refer to the

table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error persists,

contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Service Center.

Built-in DVD drive

Message When What to do (See)

Unreadable disc If you try to use a disc which is in-

compatible with this system.

Insert a suitable disc.

If you insert a disc upside down. Insert the disc with the label upward.

If the disc is dirty. Clean the disc.

If the disc is cracked or otherwise

damaged.

Insert a normal, round disc.

Mechanical failure of DVD drive oc-

curs.

Consult your Pioneer dealer.

Playback error. Please remove

the disc.

Electrical or mechanical error has

occurred.

Press RESET button. (Also see the Hardware

Manual.) (Page 187)

Region code error The disc does not have the same re-

gion number as the navigation sys-

tem.

Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing the

correct region number.

Playback error due to irregu-

lar temperature. Please re-

move the disc.

The temperature of the built-in DVD

drive exceeds the operating limits.

Park your vehicle in safe place, turn the igni-

tion switch off, and wait until the built-in DVD

drive’s temperature returns to within normal

operating limits.

ATTENTION! Viewing of front

seat video source while driv-

ing is strictly prohibited.

Parking brake interlock is activated. Park your vehicle in the safe place and apply

the parking brake. (Page 22)

Search error The title number, chapter number,

time, or 10 key command that you

enter in [10Key Search] do not

exist. (This message will appear

when the DVD drive cannot accept

that command.)

Enter the available numbers or 10 key com-

mand or use another search method.

Hard disk drive (Music Library)

Message When What to do (See)

This CD cannot be recorded If you insert a CD which prohibits

second-generation copies or dupli-

cate.

Use another CD and retry.

•Recording error. Switching

to CD playback mode

•Recording error. Recording

is stopped

•The recording was unstable.

Restart the recording from

the beginning of the track.

If recording can not be carried out

due to continuous skipping on cer-

tain part of the disc because the

disc is dirty, scratched, or otherwise

damaged, the pick-up lens of the

DVD drive is dirty, or extreme vibra-

tion occurs continuously.

!Clean the disc and retry.

!Clean the pick-up lens with a commercially

available cleaning kit for DVD, then retry.

!Retry in vibration-free condition.

Appendix

184

Appendix

Exceeded playlist maximum.

No more playlists can be re-

corded.

If you try to record a new CD but the

maximum number of playlists are

already recorded. (The album play-

list can be stores up to 400.)

Delete some playlists and retry.

Playback error. Music Library

cannot be played

The music library component is ab-

normal.

Consult your dealer.

This playlist cannot store

more than 99 tracks.

If you try to add tracks but My Mix

or My Favorite playlists are maxi-

mum number. (My Mix and My Fa-

vorite playlists can store the tracks

up to 99.)

Delete some tracks and retry.

This track cannot be added to

MyMix.

The music library component is ab-

normal.

Consult your dealer.

Name cannot be used for

voice recognition. Try again.

Some invalid characters have been

entered and the system cannot con-

vert it to the appropriate pronuncia-

tion.

Enter different characters so that the system

can pronounce it.

Single recording mode will

only record the first track of

Recording tracks other than the first

track of CD when the recording

mode is [Single].

When you set [Single]in[REC Mode], the

system only can record the first track of CD.

Set [Auto]or[Manual]in[REC Mode] and

retry. (Page 152)

HDD is full. This CD cannot be

recorded

There is no free space for recording

in the hard disk drive.

Delete some tracks or playlists and try again

if you want to record that CD.

Unable to select appropriate

Track info due to multiple en-

tries in the database.

Some corresponding data is found

in the Gracenote®Database, but the

system cannot select one to append

a title.

Enter the title manually, or try to retrieve the

title by touching [Update Title].

All artist names in the playlist

have been deleted because

no character has been en-

tered. Do you want to pro-

ceed?

If you try to delete the artist name

entirely. The artist will not be dis-

played in the artist group and artist

name on the information plate also

will not be displayed.

If you enter the artist name again, the artist

name appears.

Other sources

Message When What to do (See)

Search failed. iPod is preparing playback. There-

fore, the operation is invalid now.

Wait until [Ready] disappears and try the op-

eration.

Invalid command - the memo

has not been stored.

•If you try to memorize 000 Chan-

nel to My Mix.

•If you try to memorize a channel

that is OFF AIR to My Mix.

•If you try to memorize a channel

to My Mix while an XM tuner error

occurs.

Tune an appropriate channel and memorize

it.

Invalid command - the CH has

not been stored.

•If you try to memorize 000 or 001

Channel to Tbutton’s preset.

•If you try to memorize a channel

that is OFF AIR to Tbutton’s preset.

•If you try to memorize a channel

to Tbutton’s preset while an XM

tuner error occurs.

Tune an appropriate channel and memorize

it.

Appendix

En 185

Appendix

186

Appendix

Returning the Navigation

System to the Default or

Factory Settings

You can return settings or recorded contents

to the default or factory settings. There are

four methods to clear user data, and the situa-

tions and the cleared contents are different for

each method. For the contents that are cleared

in each method, see the list presented later.

pThe map data and the system data are not

cleared from the hard disk drive by any

clearing method.

Method 1: RESET button

Pressing RESET button clears almost all set-

tings of the audio function.

The system becomes the same state when the

battery of the vehicle is removed or the yellow

lead of the navigation system is disconnected.

Method 2: [Restore Factory Settings]

Clears some items in [Map] menu and in [Set-

tings] menu.

=For details, refer to Restoring the Default Set-

ting on page 96

Method 3: [Reset] on start-up

Clears the setting values stored in the hard

disk drive.

=For details, refer to If system errors fre-

quently occur on page 190

Method 4: [Clear user information from

hard disk] on start-up

Clears all user data (including Music Library)

stored in the hard disk drive.

=For details, refer to Completely returning the

navigation system to the initial state on page

190

Appendix

En 187

Appendix

Setting items to be deleted

The items to be deleted vary depending on the

reset method. The items listed in the following

table return to the default or factory settings.

The items not listed below will be retained.

However, if you carry out [Clear user infor-

mation from hard disk], all the settings re-

lated to the navigation function including

the items not listed below are deleted.

—: The setting will be retained.

1: The setting will be cleared and returned to

the default or factory settings.

Navigation functions Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4

Map function

View mode and scale setting on

the map

——11

Direction of the map ——11

Last cursor position on the map

screen

——11

Route Setting

Current route ——11

Guidance state of the current

route

——11

Vehicle position information ——11

Route conditions —111

[Destination] menu

Auto fill-in function for cities and

streets

——11

Point registered in [Address

Book]

———1

Sorting order selected in [Ad-

dress Book]

——11

[Information]menu

Sorting order selected in [Traffic

Events], [Traffic On Route], and

[Traffic Flow]

——11

[Traffic Settings]——11

[Phone Settings]([Phone

Menu])

——11

[Phone Book], [Dial Favorites],

[Dialed Numbers], [Received

Calls]([Phone Menu])

——11

[Stock Info]———1

[My Favorites]———1

[Emergency Info]——11

Appendix

188

Appendix

[Map]menu

[Short-Cut Selection],[View

Mode]

——11

[Displayed Info], [Overlay POI],

[Day/Night Display], [AV Guide

Mode], [Road Color]

—111

[Settings] menu

[Language]([Regional Set-

tings]), [Time]([Regional Set-

tings]), [Installation Angle

Setup]([Hardware]), [Defined

Locations], [Modify Current Lo-

cation], [Background Picture

Setting]

——11

Items other than above —111

[3D Calibration Status]([Hard-

ware])

————

[Vehicle Dynamics]Right and left gauge type, [Ad-

just Look]

——11

[Audio Settings] All items 1———

[System Settings]

[Mute Set], [Clock DISP], [REC

Mode]1—11

Other items 1———

Audio functions Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4

Music Library [LIBRARY]

Repeat, Random settings 1—11

Track data ———1

Playlist ———1

Last playback position ———1

[XM] Alert on/off for My Mix 1—11

[DVD] All settings 1———

[CD] All settings 1———

[ROM](MP3) All settings 1———

[FM]Preset memory and the other

settings 1———

[AM]Preset memory and the other

settings 1———

[TV]Preset memory and the other

settings 1———

[REAR SCREEN] Rear Screen setting 1———

Others

Picture Adjust 1———

Display Tilt 1———

Appendix

En 189

Appendix

If system errors frequently occur

If system errors frequently occur and the

power to the navigation system turns off, inap-

propriate content may have been recorded in

the memory or the hard disk drive. In such a

case, normal operations may be restored by

clearing the setting values stored in the hard

disk drive.

1 Start the engine.

After a few moments, the start-up screen

comes on for a few seconds.

2 Touch and hold MAP button while the

start-up screen is displayed.

“Clear memory screen”appears.

3 Touch [Reset].

4 Touch [Yes].

The setting values stored in the hard disk drive

return to the default or factory settings. After

that, the navigation splash screen appears.

Completely returning the

navigation system to the initial

state

To return the entire navigation system to the

default or factory settings, initialize the naviga-

tion system in the following order:

1 Press RESET button on the hardware.

2 Initialize the user data area on the hard disk

drive.

3 Clear the learned data in the sensor.

1 Turn the ignition switch off.

2 Press RESET button.

3 Start the engine.

After a few moments, the start-up screen

comes on for a few seconds.

4 Touch and hold MAP button while the

start-up screen is displayed.

“Clear memory screen”appears.

5 Touch [Clear user information from

hard disk].

pThis reset operation clears all music data

recorded in the music library. Note that the

cleared data cannot be restored.

6 Touch [Yes].

The user area in the hard disk drive is initia-

lized. After that, the navigation system re-

starts.

7 Press MENU button and then touch

[Settings].

The setting menu appears.

8 Touch [Hardware] and then touch [3D

Calibration Status].

9 Touch [Learning Status] and then touch

[Reset All].

Adjusting the Response

Positions of the Touch Panels

(Touch Panel Calibration)

If you feel that the touch panel keys on the

screen deviate from the actual positions that

respond to your touch, adjust the response po-

sitions of the touch panel. There are two ad-

justment methods: 4-point adjustment, in

which you touch four corners of the screen;

and 16-point adjustment, in which you make

fine-adjustments on the entire screen.

Appendix

190

Appendix

pMake sure to use the supplied stylus for ad-

justment, and gently touch the screen. If

you press the touch panel forcefully, the

touch panel may be damaged. Do not use

a sharp pointed tool such as a ballpoint

pen or a mechanical pen. Otherwise the

screen is damaged.

Stylus (supplied with navigation

system)

1 Press V button.

The Picture Adjust screen appears.

2 Press and hold V button for two sec-

onds or more.

The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen ap-

pears.

3 Touch and hold each of the arrows on

the four corners of the screen with the

touch panel adjustment pen.

Hold the pen on the arrow until each one of

the four arrows turns red.

4 Press V button.

The adjusted position data is saved.

pDo not turn off the engine while saving the

adjusted position data.

pPress MAP button to complete the 4-point

adjustment.

5 Press V button.

The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen

appears.

6 Gently touch the center of + mark dis-

played on the screen with the touch panel

adjustment pen.

After you touch all marks, the adjusted posi-

tion data is saved.

pDo not turn off the engine while saving the

adjusted position data.

pPress Vbutton to return to the previous ad-

justment position.

pTo cancel the adjustment, press MAP but-

ton.

7 Press MAP button.

The adjustment is complete.

pIf touch panel adjustment cannot be per-

formed properly, consult your local Pioneer

dealer.

Positioning Technology

The navigation system accurately measures

your current location by combining the posi-

tioning by GPS and by Dead Reckoning.

Positioning by GPS

The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a

network of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each

of the satellites, which orbit at a height of

68 900 000 feet (21 000 km), continually broad-

casts radio signals giving time and position in-

formation. This ensures that signals from at

least three can be picked up from any open

area on the ground’s surface.

Appendix

En 191

Appendix

The accuracy of the GPS information depends

on how good the reception is. When the sig-

nals are strong and reception is good, GPS

can determine latitude, longitude and altitude

for accurate positioning in three dimensions.

But if signal quality is poor, only two dimen-

sions, latitude and longitude, can be obtained

and positioning errors are somewhat greater.

Positioning by dead reckoning

The 3D Hybrid Sensor in the navigation system

also calculates your position. The current loca-

tion is measured by detecting driving distance

with the speed pulse, the turning direction

with the Gyrosensor and inclination of the

road with the G sensor.

The 3D Hybrid Sensor can even calculate

changes of altitude, and corrects for discre-

pancies in the distance traveled caused by

driving along winding roads or up slopes.

Also, the navigation system learns the driving

conditions and stores information in the mem-

ory; thus, as you drive more, the precision of

the positioning becomes more accurate.

The method of positioning changes as follows

depending on whether the speed pulse of your

vehicle is detected or not:

3D hybrid mode

This is active when the speed pulse is de-

tected. Inclination of a street can be detected.

Simple hybrid mode

When the speed pulse is not detected, posi-

tioning is performed in this mode. Only hori-

zontal movement is detected, so it becomes

less accurate. Also, when the positioning by

GPS is not available, such as when your vehi-

cle enters a long tunnel, the discrepancy be-

tween your actual and calculated position may

become bigger.

pThe speed pulse data comes from the

speed sensing circuit. The location of this

speed sensing circuit depends on your ve-

hicle model. In some cases, it is impossible

to make a connection to it, and in such a

case we recommend that ND-PG1 speed

pulse generator (sold separately) be used.

How do GPS and dead

reckoning work together?

For maximum accuracy, your navigation sys-

tem continually compares GPS data with your

estimated position as calculated from the data

of 3D Hybrid Sensor. However, if only the data

from the 3D Hybrid Sensor is available for a

long period, positioning errors are gradually

compounded until the estimated position be-

comes unreliable. For this reason, whenever

GPS signals are available, they are matched

with the data of the 3D Hybrid Sensor and

used to correct it for improved accuracy.

To ensure maximum accuracy, the dead reck-

oning system learns with experience. By com-

paring the position it estimates with your

actual position as obtained using GPS, it can

correct for various types of error, such as tire

wear and the rolling motion of your vehicle. As

you drive, the dead reckoning system gradu-

ally gathers more data, learns more, and the

accuracy of its estimates gradually increases.

So, after you have driven some distance, you

can expect your position as shown on the map

to show fewer errors.

pIf you use chains on your wheels for winter

driving or put on the spare wheel, errors

may suddenly increase because of differ-

ence in wheel diameter. The system detects

the fact that the tire diameter has changed,

and automatically replaces the value for

calculating distance.

Appendix

192

Appendix

pIf ND-PG1 is used or if your vehicle is oper-

ating in Simple hybrid mode, the distance

calculation value cannot be replaced auto-

matically.

Map matching

As mentioned, the GPS and dead reckoning

systems used by this navigation system are

susceptible to certain errors. Their calcula-

tions may, on occasion, place you in a location

on the map where no road exists. In this situa-

tion, the processing system understands that

vehicles travel only on roads, and can correct

your position by adjusting it to a nearby road.

This is called map matching.

With map matching

Without map matching

Handling Large Errors

Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by

combining GPS, Dead Reckoning, and map

matching. However, in some situations, these

functions may not work properly, and the error

may become bigger.

When the positioning by GPS is

impossible

!If signals cannot be received from more

than two GPS satellites, GPS positioning

does not take place.

!In some driving conditions, signals from

GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle.

In this case, it is impossible for the system

to use GPS positioning.

In tunnels or enclosed parking garages

Under elevated roads or similar struc-

tures

When driving among high buildings

When driving through a dense forest or

tall trees

!If a car phone or cellular phone is used

near the GPS antenna, GPS reception may

be lost temporarily.

Appendix

En 193

Appendix

!Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray

paint or car wax, because this may block

the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup

can also degrade the signals, so keep the

antenna clear.

pIf, for any reason, GPS signals cannot be re-

ceived, learning and error correction are

not possible. If GPS positioning has been

operating for only a short time, your vehi-

cle’s actual position and the current loca-

tion mark on the map may diverge

considerably. Once GPS reception is re-

stored, accuracy will be recovered.

Vehicles that Cannot

Obtain Speed Pulse Data

pThe speed pulse data comes from the

speed sensing circuit. The location of this

speed sensing circuit depends on your ve-

hicle model. In some cases, it is impossible

to make a connection to it, and in such a

case we recommend that ND-PG1 speed

pulse generator (sold separately) be

used.

Conditions Likely to Cause

Noticeable Positioning Errors

For various reasons such as the state of the

road you are traveling on and the state of re-

ception of the GPS signal, the actual position

of your vehicle may differ from the position

displayed on the map screen.

!If you make a shallow turn.

!If there is a parallel road.

!If there is another road very nearby, such

as in the case of an elevated freeway.

!If you take a recently opened road that is

not on the map.

Appendix

194

Appendix

!If you drive in zig-zags.

!If the road has connected hairpin bends.

!If there is a loop or similar road configura-

tion.

!If you take a ferry.

!If you are driving on a long, straight road or

a gently curving road.

!If you are on a steep mountain road with

many height changes.

!If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot

or similar using a spiral ramp.

Appendix

En 195

Appendix

!If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si-

milar structure.

!If your vehicle’s wheels spin, such as on a

gravel road or in snow.

!If you put on chains, or change your tires

for ones with a different size.

!If trees or other obstacles block the GPS

signals for a considerable period.

!If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-

stop manner, as in a traffic congestion.

!If you join the road after driving around a

large parking lot.

!When you pass around a traffic circle.

!When starting driving immediately after

starting the engine.

!If you turn your navigation system on while

driving.

Some types of vehicles may not output a

speed signal while driving at just a few kilo-

meters per hour. In such a case, the current lo-

cation of your vehicle may not be displayed

correctly while in a traffic congestion or in a

parking lot.

Appendix

196

Appendix

When the Hard Disk Drive is

Disconnected

If there is no hard disk drive because of repair

or service, you can operate only the Radio

source without the hard disk drive.

The following screen also may appear because

the hard disk drive can not run due to low tem-

perature. In such a case, park your vehicle in a

safe place and turn the ignition switch off.

After the temperature inside the vehicle re-

turns to normal, turn the ignition switch on.

Only the following operations are available.

Other functions cannot be operated.

!Only the FM and AM sources can be oper-

ated. (Preset station select cannot be oper-

ated.)

!If the selected source before ejecting the

hard disk drive is [AV], the [AV INPUT]

source is available on “Rear display”. (If the

selected source is [DVD], nothing is output

to “Rear display”. If the selected source is

[MIRROR], the same image as “Front dis-

play”is output to “Rear display”.)

!Rear view camera is available only when

the vehicle is backing up. ([Rear View]is

not available.)

Route Setting Information

Route search specifications

Your navigation system sets a route to your

destination by applying certain built-in rules to

the map data. This section provides some use-

ful information about how a route is set.

CAUTION

When a route is calculated, the route and voice

guidance for the route is automatically set. Also,

for day or time traffic regulations, only informa-

tion about traffic regulations at the time when the

route was calculated is shown. One-way streets

and street closures may not be taken into consid-

eration. For example, if a street is open during the

morning only, but you arrive later, it would be

against the traffic regulations so you cannot drive

along the set route. When driving, please follow

the actual traffic signs. Also, the system may not

know some traffic regulations.

!The calculated route is one example of the

route to your destination decided by the na-

vigation system whilst taking the type of

streets or traffic regulations into account. It

is not necessarily an optimum route. (In

some cases, you may not be able to set the

streets you want to pass. If you need to

pass a certain street, set the waypoint on

that street.)

!The route set by your navigation system

may not use the streets known to local dri-

vers, such as small streets or special roads.

!Some route options may become the same

route. If waypoints are set, only one route is

calculated.

!If the destination is too far, there may be in-

stances where the route cannot be set. (If

you want to set a long-distance route going

across several areas, set waypoints along

the way.)

!During voice guidance, turns and intersec-

tions from the freeway are announced.

However, if you pass intersections, turns,

and other guide points in rapid succession,

some may not be announced.

!It is possible that guidance may direct you

off a freeway and then back on again.

Appendix

En 197

Appendix

!In some cases, the route may require you

to travel in the opposite direction to your

current heading. In such cases, you are in-

structed to turn around, so please turn

around safely by following the actual traffic

rules.

!In some cases, guidance may direct you

past your destination and then indicate a

U-turn to get back to it.

!In some cases, a route may begin on the

opposite side of a railway or river from your

actual current location. If this happens,

drive towards your destination for a while,

and try route calculation again.

!When there is a traffic congestion or clo-

sure ahead, if driving through the traffic

congestion or closure is better than taking

the detour, a detour route may not appear.

!There may be instances when the starting

point and the destination point are not on

the highlighted route.

!The number of traffic circle exits displayed

on the screen may differ from the actual

number of roads.

Auto Reroute

!Auto Reroute is used when you deviate

more than 0.02 mile (Approx. 30 m) from

the route.

!The Auto Reroute function does not work in

the following cases:

—when your vehicle is not on a street

—when you are too close to your destina-

tion

—when your vehicle is on a ferry

—when driving on a road inside a facility

—when driving on a traffic circle

—when driving on the routes are de-

scribed in “Route highlighting”

!The system assumes the driver deviated

either intentionally or inadvertently from

the route and searches for another route

(intelligent rerouting). Depending on the si-

tuation, the system may search a new route

that does not return to the original one.

Route highlighting

!Once set, the route is highlighted in bright

green or light blue on the map.

!The immediate vicinity of your starting

point and destination may not be high-

lighted, and neither will areas with particu-

larly complex road layouts. Consequently,

the route may appear to be cut off on the

display, but voice guidance will continue.

Roads not used in calculations

Even though displayed on screen, the follow-

ing roads are not included in route calcula-

tions.

!Walkways

!Public vehicle only

!Non access road

=For details, refer to Viewing the Map Color Le-

gend on page 49

Tracking

!Your navigation system marks your course

on the map in certain increments. This is

called tracking. It is handy when you want

to check a route traveled without guidance

or if returning along a complex route.

!A maximum of about 155 miles (250 km) is

marked and, as you travel beyond this limit,

tracking marks are erased in order from the

most distant. Tracking display shows about

100 miles (160 km) tracking of your vehicle

with white dots.

=For more details about “Tracking can also

be set for automatic erasing whenever the na-

vigation system is switched off”, refer to Set-

ting the Item on the Map Screen on page 46

Displaying POI

Points of Interest (POI) that can be displayed

on the enlarged map of the intersection or

[Driver’s View] (left screen) are only the spe-

cial Points of Interest (POI) that contain the

position information. Not all of Points of Inter-

ests (POI) are displayed.

Appendix

198

Appendix

Detail Information for

Playable Media

DVD discs and other DVD media

types

!It may not be possible to use certain func-

tions with some DVD-Video discs.

!It may not be possible to play back some

DVD video discs.

!When DVD-R/DVD-RW discs are used,

playback is possible only for discs that

have been finalized.

!When DVD-R/DVD-RW discs are used,

playback is possible only for discs that

have been recorded in Video format (video

mode). It is not possible to play back DVD-

R/-RW discs which have been recorded in

Video Recording format (VR mode).

!It may not be possible to play back DVD-R/

DVD-RW discs that have been recorded in

Video format (video mode) because of disc

characteristics, scratches or dirt on the

disc, or dirt, scratches or condensation on

the lens of this product.

!It is not possible to play back general DVD-

ROM discs or DVD-RAM discs. Only DVD-

ROM discs authorized by Pioneer can be

read.

!Playback of discs recorded on a personal

computer may not be possible depending

on the environment and the application set-

tings. Please record with the correct for-

mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer

of the application.)

About playing DualDisc

!DualDiscs are two-sided discs that have a

recordable CD for audio on one side and a

recordable DVD for video on the other.

!Playback of the DVD side is possible with

this unit. However, since the CD side of

DualDiscs is not physically compatible with

the general CD standard, it may not be pos-

sible to play the CD side with this naviga-

tion system.

!Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual-

Disc may result in scratches on the disc.

!Serious scratches can lead to playback pro-

blems on this navigation system. In some

cases, a DualDisc may become stuck in

the disc loading slot and will not eject. To

prevent this, we recommend you refrain

from using DualDisc with this navigation

system.

!Please refer to the manufacturer for more

detailed information about DualDiscs.

CD-R/CD-RW discs

!When CD-R/CD-RW discs are used, play-

back is possible only for discs that have

been finalized.

!It may not be possible to play back CD-R/

CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re-

corder or a personal computer because of

disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on

the disc, or dirt, scratches or condensation

on the lens of this product.

!Playback of discs recorded on a personal

computer may not be possible, depending

on the environment and the application set-

tings. Please record with the correct for-

mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer

of the application.)

!Playback of CD-R/CD-RW discs may be-

come impossible with direct exposure to

sunlight, high temperatures, or depending

on the storage conditions in the vehicle.

!Titles and other text information recorded

on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be dis-

played by this product (in the case of audio

data (CD-DA)).

!If you insert a CD-RW disc into this pro-

duct, it will take more time to play back

than when you insert a conventional CD or

CD-R disc.

!Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW

discs before using them.

Appendix

En 199

Appendix

MP3 files

!When naming an MP3 file, add the corre-

sponding filename extension (.mp3).

!This navigation system plays back files with

the filename extension (.mp3) as MP3 files.

To prevent noise and malfunctions, do not

use this extension for files other than MP3

files.

!MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and

refers to an audio compression technology

standard.

!This product allows playback of MP3 files

on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW discs. Re-

corded discs can be played back if they are

compatible with level 1 and level 2 of

ISO9660 and with the Romeo and Joliet file

system.

!It is possible to play back multi-session

compatible recorded discs.

!MP3 files are not compatible with packet

write data transfer.

!The maximum number of characters for

the file and folder name is 32 characters,

including extension (.mp3). However the

navigation system uses proportional font.

Therefore, the number of the characters

that you can display varies according to the

width of each character.

!When playing discs with both MP3 files

and audio data (CD-DA), such as CD-

EXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs, both types

can be played only by switching the mode

between MP3 and CD-DA.

!The folder selection sequence for playback

and other operations is the writing se-

quence used by the writing software. For

this reason, the expected sequence at the

time of playback may not coincide with the

actual playback sequence. However, there

also are some writing software that permit

the setting of the playback order.

!Some audio CDs contain tracks that merge

into one another without a pause. When

these discs are converted to MP3 files and

burned to a CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROM, the

files will be played back on this player with

a short pause between each one, regard-

less of the length of the pause between

tracks on the original audio CD.

!Files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver.

1.0 and Ver. 1.1 formats for displaying

album (disc title), track (track title) and ar-

tist (track artist).

!The emphasis function is valid only when

MP3 files of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz fre-

quencies are played back. (16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

sampling frequencies can be played back.)

!There is no m3u playlist compatibility.

!There is no compatibility with the MP3i

(MP3 interactive) or MP3 PRO formats.

!The sound quality of MP3 files generally im-

proves with an increased bit rate. This pro-

duct can play recordings with bit rates

from 8 kbps to 320 kbps, but in order to be

able to enjoy sound of a certain quality, we

recommend only using discs recorded with

a bit rate of at least 128 kbps.

!Playing MP3 file on the DVD-R (-RW) is not

supported.

About folders and MP3 files

An outline of a CD-ROM with MP3 files on it is

shown below. Subfolders are shown as folders

in the folder currently selected.

pThe following figure is an example of the

tier structure in the CD. The numbers in the

figure indicate the order in which folder

numbers are assigned and the order to be

played back.

Indicates the order in which folder num-

bers are assigned.

Appendix

200

Appendix

Indicates each file. The number is assigned

in the order of the track to be played back.

1First tier

2Second tier

3Third tier

Notes

!This product assigns folder numbers. The user

can not assign folder numbers.

!If you are using a folder that does not contain

an MP3 file, the folder itself will display but

you will not be able to see any files in the

folder.

!MP3 files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be

played back. However, there is a delay when

starting playback on discs with numerous

tiers. For this reason we recommend creating

discs with no more than 2 tiers.

!It is possible to play back up to 253 folders on

one disc.

Appendix

En 201

Appendix

Display Information

Navigation menu

[Destination] menu

Page

Address Search 28

Return Home 55, 58

Go to 55, 58

POI Search 51

Route Overview 34

Address Book 56, 58

Destination History 56, 64

Telephone Search 55

Vicinity Search 53

Cancel Route 33

[Information] menu

Page

Traffic On Route 66

Traffic Events 65

Traffic Flow 67

Traffic Settings 69

Phone Menu

Dial 81

Phone Book 82, 84

Dial Favorites 82, 84

Read Bus. Card 83

Dialed Numbers 81, 86

Received Calls 81, 86

Phone Settings 78

Stock Info 70

Set My Favorites 70

My Favorites 71

Emergency Info 73

XM Status 72

[Map] menu

Page

Displayed Info

Close Up View 46

City Map 46

Tracking Display 46

Show Mute Button 46

Show Traffic Incident 46

Second Maneuver Arrow 46

Bluetooth Connected 46

Address Book Icon 46

3D Landmark 46

Short-Cut Selection 48

Overlay POI 49

Map Legend 49

View Mode 49

Day/Night Display 50

Appendix

202

Appendix

AV Guide Mode 50

Road Color 50

[Settings] menu

Page

Volume 88

Regional Settings

Language 88

Time 89

Keyboard 89

km / mile 89

Average Speed 90

Hardware

Connection Status 90

3D Calibration Status 91

Installation Angle Setup 92

Service Info Screen 92

Hard Disk Info 92

Defined Locations 58

Background Picture Setting 93

Demo Mode 95

Modify Current Location 95

Restore Factory Settings 96

Shortcut menu

pThe shortcuts displayed on screen can be

customized.

pItems marked with an asterisk (*3) cannot

be removed from Shortcut menu.

=For details, refer to Selecting the Shortcut on

page 48

Shortcut menu

Page

:Destination*45

:Route Options*

Route Condition 34

Avoid Toll Road 34

Avoid Ferry 34

Avoid Freeway 34

Time restrictions 34

Learning Route 34

:Registration 59

:Vicinity Search 54

:Overlay POI 49

:Volume 88

:Phone Book 82, 84

:Dial Favorite 1 to 5 82, 84

:Whole Route Overview 36

:Stock Info 70

:Set My Favorites 70

:My Favorites 71

:Traffic On Route 66

:Traffic Events 65

:Day/Night Display 50

:Address Book Icon Display 46

Appendix

En 203

Appendix

Menu in the Audio Screen

[Audio Settings] menu

Page

Equalizer 142

Staging 142

FAD/BAL 142

Sub Woofer 145

Loudness 145

HPF 146

Source Level 146

[System Settings] menu

Page

DVD-V Setup 147

Wide Mode 149

Camera Input 149

AV Input 150

AUX Input 150

Mute Set 150

Mute Level 151

Guide/Tel SP 151

Auto ANT 151

Clock DISP 151

REC Mode 152

Rear SP 152

5.1Ch Setup 152

Appendix

204

Appendix

Glossary

3D Hybrid sensor

The built-in sensor which enables the system

to estimate your vehicle’s position. A learning

function increases its accuracy and its learn-

ing data can be stored in memory.

Address Book

A list of locations registered manually.

Aspect ratio

This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen.

A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3.

Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of

16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional

presence and atmosphere.

Bit rate

This expresses data volume per second, or bps

units (bits per second). The higher the rate,

the more information is available to reproduce

the sound. Using the same encoding method

(such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better

the sound.

Chapter

DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters

which are numbered in the same way as the

chapters of a book. With DVD-Video discs fea-

turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired

scene with chapter search.

Current location

The present location of your vehicle; your cur-

rent location is shown on the map by a red tri-

angle mark.

Default setting

A factory setting which applies when you first

switch on the system; you can customize de-

fault settings to suit your own needs in the

menu.

Destination

A location you choose as the end point of your

journey.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio

from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is

the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound

system used in theaters.

Manufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

DTS

This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is

a surround system delivering multi-channel

audio from up to 6 independent channels.

“DTS”and “DTS Digital Out”are registered tra-

demarks of DTS, Inc.

Favorite location

A frequently visited location (such as your

workplace or a relative’s home) that you can

GPS

Global Positioning System. A network of satel-

lites that provides navigation signals for a vari-

ety of purposes.

Appendix

En 205

Appendix

Gracenote®Music recognition service

Music recognition technology and related

data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is

the industry standard in music recognition

technology and related content delivery. For

more information visit www.gracenote.com.

Guidance mode

The mode in which guidance is given as you

drive to your destination; the system automati-

cally switches to this mode as soon as a route

has been set.

Guidance point

These are important landmarks along your

route, generally intersections. The next gui-

dance point along your route is indicated on

the map by the yellow flag icon.

Home location

Your registered home location.

ID3 tag

This is a method of embedding track-related

information in a MP3 file. This embedded in-

formation can include the track title, the ar-

tist’s name, the album title, the music genre,

the year of production, comments and other

data. The contents can be freely edited using

software with ID3 Tag editing functions.

Although the tags are restricted to the number

of characters, the information can be viewed

when the track is played back.

ISO9660 format

This is the international standard for the for-

mat logic of DVD/CD-ROM folders and files.

For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations

for the following two levels:

Level 1:

The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con-

sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English

capital letters, half-byte numerals and the “_”

sign, with a file-extension of three characters).

Level 2:

The file name can have up to 31 characters (in-

cluding the separation mark “.”and a file ex-

tension). Each folder contains less than 8

hierarchies.

Extended formats

Joliet:

File names can have up to 64 characters.

Romeo:

File names can have up to 128 characters.

Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code

modulation

This stands for linear pulse code modulation,

which is the signal recording system used for

music CDs and DVDs. Generally, DVDs are re-

corded with higher sampling frequency and

bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide

higher sound quality.

m3u

Playlists created using the “WINAMP”soft-

ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u).

A list of options shown on the display; choices

are selected touching the display.

MP3

MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an

audio compression standard set by a working

group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan-

dards Organization). MP3 is able to compress

audio data to about 1/10th the size of a con-

ventional disc.

MPEG

This stands for Moving Pictures Experts

Group, and is an international video image

compression standard. Some DVDs feature di-

gital audio compressed and recorded using

this system.

Appendix

206

Appendix

Multi-angle

With regular TV programs, although multiple

cameras are used to simultaneously shoot

scenes, only images from one camera at a

time are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDs

feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let-

ting you choose your viewing angle as desired.

Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)

Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi-

ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages

can be recorded on a single disc, letting you

choose as desired.

Multi-session

Multi-session is a recording method that al-

lows additional data to be recorded later.

When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or

CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is

treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses-

sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses-

sions in one disc.

Multi-subtitle

Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re-

corded on a single DVD, letting you choose as

desired.

Optical digital output

By transmitting audio signals in a digital sig-

nal format, the chance of sonic quality dete-

riorating in the course of transmission is

minimized. An optical digital output is de-

signed to transmit digital signals optically.

Packet write

This is a general term for a method of writing

on CD-R, etc. at the time required for a file,

just as is done with files on floppy or hard

discs.

Parental lock

Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-or-

iented scenes feature parental lock which pre-

vents children from viewing such scenes. With

this kind of disc, if you set the unit’s parental

lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for

children will be disabled, or these scenes will

be skipped.

Point of Interest (POI)

Point Of Interest; any of a range of locations

stored in the data, such as railway stations,

shops, restaurants, and amusement parks.

Region number

DVD players and DVD discs feature region

numbers indicating the area in which they

were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos-

sible unless it features the same region num-

ber as the DVD player. The navigation system’s

region number is displayed on the bottom of

the navigation unit.

Route setting

The process of determining the ideal route to a

specific location; route setting is done auto-

matically by the system when you specify a

destination.

Set route

The route marked out by the system to your

destination. It is highlighted in bright green on

the map.

Title

DVD-Video discs have a high data capacity, en-

abling recording of multiple movies on a sin-

gle disc. If, for example, one disc contains

three separate movies, they are divided into

title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the

convenience of title search and other func-

tions.

Tracking

Marks on the map indicating the route you

have traveled.

TV system (NTSC, PAL, SECAM)

Different areas of the world use different TV

systems. North America uses NTSC, Europe

uses PAL and SECAM, and South America

uses PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL and NTSC.

Appendix

En 207

Appendix

Almost all are incompatible with each other.

To display the video image, such as TV or DVD-

video correctly, you may need to coordinate

your system at the same TV system or use a

multi-system equipment.

VBR

VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally

speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more

widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit

rate according to the needs of audio compres-

sion, it is possible to achieve compression

priority sound quality.

Voice guidance

The giving of directions by a recorded voice

while in guidance mode.

Voice recognition

The technology that allows the system to un-

derstand the driver’s voice commands.

Waypoint

A location that you choose to visit before your

destination; a journey can be built up from

multiple way points and the destination.

Appendix

208

Appendix

0-9

3D hybrid mode ............................................192

3D Hybrid Sensor ..........................................192

3D Landmark ...................................................47

3D POI ..............................................................39

Active touch panel key ...................................28

Address Book ............................................60,.82

Address Search ...............................................28

Album group .................................................113

Artist group ....................................................113

Audio operation ..............................................97

Auto antenna .................................................151

Auto fill-in function .........................................30

Auto reroute .....................................................23

Auto Reroute .................................................198

AUX input ......................................................141

AV Guide Mode ...............................................50

AV Input .........................................................139

AV Settings menu ...........................................99

Average Speed ................................................90

Background Picture ........................................93

Backlight ........................................................154

Bluetooth unit .................................................77

BSM ................................................................109

BSSM ..............................................................138

Business card ..................................................83

Cancel Route ...................................................33

CD-R (-RW) ................................................85,.94

CD-R(-RW) ........................................................93

CD-TEXT ..................................................100,.110

Contacts ...........................................................83

Current location ..............................................33

Dead reckoning .............................................192

Default or Factory Settings ..........................187

Demo Mode .....................................................95

Destination History .........................................64

Dialed number history ...................................81

Direct scale key ...............................................43

Distance study .................................................92

Dolby Digital ..................................................205

DTS .................................................................205

Enlarged map of the intersection .................40

Equalizer .........................................................142

Estimated time of arrival ................................42

External Unit ..................................................139

Favorite location ..............................................58

Frame-by-frame playback .............................105

Front display ..................................................197

Front Display ....................................................10

Genre group ...................................................113

GPS .................................................................191

Gracenote® Data-

base ................................100,.110,.111,.113,.122

Guidance point ................................................41

Hands-free phoning ........................................86

Hands-free Phoning .......................................77

Hard Disk Drive .......................................24,.197

Hard disk recording ......................................100

Heading up ......................................................41

High pass filter ..............................................146

Home location .................................................58

ID3 tag ....................................................103,.206

Inactive touch panel key ................................28

Incoming call ...................................................80

Installation angle ............................................92

IPod .................................................................134

ISO9660 format .............................................206

Joliet ...............................................................206

JPEG .................................................................95

Keyboard ....................................................30,.89

Language .................................................88,.147

Learning Route ................................................35

Index

En 209

Learning Status ...............................................91

Linear PCM ....................................................206

Location confirmation screen .......................31

M3u .................................................................206

Map Legend .....................................................49

Map matching ...............................................193

Map Mode ........................................................38

Mode1 ...............................................................95

MPEG ..............................................................206

Multi Angle ....................................................147

Multiple routes ................................................32

Multi-session .................................................207

Music Library .........................................110,.112

MUTE lead .............................................150,.151

Muting/attenuation ...............................150,.151

My Favorite group .........................................113

My Mix ............................................................116

North up ...........................................................42

Notification icon ..............................................68

Packet write ...................................................207

Parental lock ..........................................148,.207

Parking brake interlock ..................................22

Phone book ......................................................83

Phone Menu ....................................................77

Picture adjustment .......................................153

Playlist ....................................................113,.159

POI ........................................23,.51,.53,.158,.198

Profile for the Bluetooth unit ........................77

Q ......................................................................143

Rear display ...................................................153

Rear Display ....................................................10

Rear view camera ...................................22,.149

Received call history ......................................81

Region number .............................................207

Roads without turn-by-turn instructions ......43

Romeo ............................................................206

Route calculation condition ..........................32

Route Calculation Conditions .......................34

Route confirmation screen ............................32

Scroll mode .....................................................43

Second Maneuver Arrow ...............................47

Simple hybrid mode .............................179,.192

Simulated sound stage ................................144

Single-session ..................................................95

Slow-motion playback ..................................105

Source ..............................................................97

Speed Pulse .......................................90,.91,.194

Speed pulse generator .........................192,.194

Splash Screen ...........................................93,.95

Steering Remote Control .................78,.98,.156

Street list screen .............................................31

Street name or city name input screen .......29

Stylus ..............................................................191

Subwoofer ..............................................145,.152

Text box .............................................................30

Time difference ................................................89

Time restrictions .............................................35

Touch Panel Calibration ...............................190

Tracking ..........................................................198

Tracking Display ..............................................46

Travel time ........................................................42

TV system .......................................................207

Unit of distance and speed ...........................89

VBR .........................................................104,.208

Vehicle Dynamics Display .............................76

Video image .....................................................10

View mode .......................................................38

Voice Commands ..........................................159

Voice Help menu ..........................................157

Voice Operation .............................................156

Volume ..............................................................88

Waypoint ..........................................................41

Waypoints ........................................................36

Wide screen mode ........................................149

Index

210

PIONEER CORPORATION

4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU

TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.

P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.

TEL: (800) 421-1404

PIONEER EUROPE NV

Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium

TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.

253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936

TEL: 65-6472-7555

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia

TEL: (03) 9586-6300

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.

300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada

TEL: 1-877-283-5901

TEL: 905-479-4411

PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.

Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso

Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000

TEL:55-9178-4270

先鋒股份有限公司

總公司:台北市中山北路二段44號13樓

電話: (02) 2521-3588

先鋒電子（香港）有限公司

香港九龍尖沙咀海港城世界商業中心9樓901-6室

電話: (0852) 2848-6488

Published by Pioneer Corporation.

Printed in China

<CRB2619-A/U> UC

Pioneer CRB2619 AU If Not Then AVIC Z3 Operation Manual0218

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation